pub struct Client { /* private fields */ }
Expand description
Client for Amazon Relational Database Service
Client for invoking operations on Amazon Relational Database Service. Each operation on Amazon Relational Database Service is a method on this
this struct. .send()
MUST be invoked on the generated operations to dispatch the request to the service.
§Constructing a Client
A Config
is required to construct a client. For most use cases, the aws-config
crate should be used to automatically resolve this config using
aws_config::load_from_env()
, since this will resolve an SdkConfig
which can be shared
across multiple different AWS SDK clients. This config resolution process can be customized
by calling aws_config::from_env()
instead, which returns a ConfigLoader
that uses
the builder pattern to customize the default config.
In the simplest case, creating a client looks as follows:
let config = aws_config::load_from_env().await;
let client = aws_sdk_rds::Client::new(&config);
Occasionally, SDKs may have additional service-specific values that can be set on the Config
that
is absent from SdkConfig
, or slightly different settings for a specific client may be desired.
The Builder
struct implements From<&SdkConfig>
, so setting these specific settings can be
done as follows:
let sdk_config = ::aws_config::load_from_env().await;
let config = aws_sdk_rds::config::Builder::from(&sdk_config)
.some_service_specific_setting("value")
.build();
See the aws-config
docs and Config
for more information on customizing configuration.
Note: Client construction is expensive due to connection thread pool initialization, and should be done once at application start-up.
§Using the Client
A client has a function for every operation that can be performed by the service.
For example, the AddRoleToDBCluster
operation has
a Client::add_role_to_db_cluster
, function which returns a builder for that operation.
The fluent builder ultimately has a send()
function that returns an async future that
returns a result, as illustrated below:
let result = client.add_role_to_db_cluster()
.db_cluster_identifier("example")
.send()
.await;
The underlying HTTP requests that get made by this can be modified with the customize_operation
function on the fluent builder. See the customize
module for more
information.
§Waiters
This client provides wait_until
methods behind the Waiters
trait.
To use them, simply import the trait, and then call one of the wait_until
methods. This will
return a waiter fluent builder that takes various parameters, which are documented on the builder
type. Once parameters have been provided, the wait
method can be called to initiate waiting.
For example, if there was a wait_until_thing
method, it could look like:
let result = client.wait_until_thing()
.thing_id("someId")
.wait(Duration::from_secs(120))
.await;
Implementations§
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn add_role_to_db_cluster(&self) -> AddRoleToDBClusterFluentBuilder
pub fn add_role_to_db_cluster(&self) -> AddRoleToDBClusterFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the AddRoleToDBCluster
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the DB cluster to associate the IAM role with.
role_arn(impl Into<String>)
/set_role_arn(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role to associate with the Aurora DB cluster, for example
arn:aws:iam::123456789012:role/AuroraAccessRole
.feature_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_feature_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of the feature for the DB cluster that the IAM role is to be associated with. For information about supported feature names, see
DBEngineVersion
.
- On success, responds with
AddRoleToDbClusterOutput
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<AddRoleToDBClusterError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn add_role_to_db_instance(&self) -> AddRoleToDBInstanceFluentBuilder
pub fn add_role_to_db_instance(&self) -> AddRoleToDBInstanceFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the AddRoleToDBInstance
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the DB instance to associate the IAM role with.
role_arn(impl Into<String>)
/set_role_arn(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role to associate with the DB instance, for example
arn:aws:iam::123456789012:role/AccessRole
.feature_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_feature_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the feature for the DB instance that the IAM role is to be associated with. For information about supported feature names, see
DBEngineVersion
.
- On success, responds with
AddRoleToDbInstanceOutput
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<AddRoleToDBInstanceError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn add_source_identifier_to_subscription(
&self,
) -> AddSourceIdentifierToSubscriptionFluentBuilder
pub fn add_source_identifier_to_subscription( &self, ) -> AddSourceIdentifierToSubscriptionFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the AddSourceIdentifierToSubscription
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
subscription_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_subscription_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the RDS event notification subscription you want to add a source identifier to.
source_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_source_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe identifier of the event source to be added.
Constraints:
-
If the source type is a DB instance, a
DBInstanceIdentifier
value must be supplied. -
If the source type is a DB cluster, a
DBClusterIdentifier
value must be supplied. -
If the source type is a DB parameter group, a
DBParameterGroupName
value must be supplied. -
If the source type is a DB security group, a
DBSecurityGroupName
value must be supplied. -
If the source type is a DB snapshot, a
DBSnapshotIdentifier
value must be supplied. -
If the source type is a DB cluster snapshot, a
DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier
value must be supplied. -
If the source type is an RDS Proxy, a
DBProxyName
value must be supplied.
-
- On success, responds with
AddSourceIdentifierToSubscriptionOutput
with field(s):event_subscription(Option<EventSubscription>)
:Contains the results of a successful invocation of the
DescribeEventSubscriptions
action.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<AddSourceIdentifierToSubscriptionError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Constructs a fluent builder for the AddTagsToResource
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
resource_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_resource_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe Amazon RDS resource that the tags are added to. This value is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN). For information about creating an ARN, see Constructing an RDS Amazon Resource Name (ARN).
tags(Tag)
/set_tags(Option<Vec::<Tag>>)
:
required: trueThe tags to be assigned to the Amazon RDS resource.
- On success, responds with
AddTagsToResourceOutput
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<AddTagsToResourceError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn apply_pending_maintenance_action(
&self,
) -> ApplyPendingMaintenanceActionFluentBuilder
pub fn apply_pending_maintenance_action( &self, ) -> ApplyPendingMaintenanceActionFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the ApplyPendingMaintenanceAction
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
resource_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_resource_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe RDS Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource that the pending maintenance action applies to. For information about creating an ARN, see Constructing an RDS Amazon Resource Name (ARN).
apply_action(impl Into<String>)
/set_apply_action(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe pending maintenance action to apply to this resource.
Valid Values:
-
ca-certificate-rotation
-
db-upgrade
-
hardware-maintenance
-
os-upgrade
-
system-update
For more information about these actions, see Maintenance actions for Amazon Aurora or Maintenance actions for Amazon RDS.
-
opt_in_type(impl Into<String>)
/set_opt_in_type(Option<String>)
:
required: trueA value that specifies the type of opt-in request, or undoes an opt-in request. An opt-in request of type
immediate
can’t be undone.Valid Values:
-
immediate
- Apply the maintenance action immediately. -
next-maintenance
- Apply the maintenance action during the next maintenance window for the resource. -
undo-opt-in
- Cancel any existingnext-maintenance
opt-in requests.
-
- On success, responds with
ApplyPendingMaintenanceActionOutput
with field(s):resource_pending_maintenance_actions(Option<ResourcePendingMaintenanceActions>)
:Describes the pending maintenance actions for a resource.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<ApplyPendingMaintenanceActionError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Constructs a fluent builder for the AuthorizeDBSecurityGroupIngress
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_security_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_security_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the DB security group to add authorization to.
cidrip(impl Into<String>)
/set_cidrip(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe IP range to authorize.
ec2_security_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_ec2_security_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseName of the EC2 security group to authorize. For VPC DB security groups,
EC2SecurityGroupId
must be provided. Otherwise,EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId
and eitherEC2SecurityGroupName
orEC2SecurityGroupId
must be provided.ec2_security_group_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_ec2_security_group_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseId of the EC2 security group to authorize. For VPC DB security groups,
EC2SecurityGroupId
must be provided. Otherwise,EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId
and eitherEC2SecurityGroupName
orEC2SecurityGroupId
must be provided.ec2_security_group_owner_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_ec2_security_group_owner_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseAmazon Web Services account number of the owner of the EC2 security group specified in the
EC2SecurityGroupName
parameter. The Amazon Web Services access key ID isn’t an acceptable value. For VPC DB security groups,EC2SecurityGroupId
must be provided. Otherwise,EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId
and eitherEC2SecurityGroupName
orEC2SecurityGroupId
must be provided.
- On success, responds with
AuthorizeDbSecurityGroupIngressOutput
with field(s):db_security_group(Option<DbSecurityGroup>)
:Contains the details for an Amazon RDS DB security group.
This data type is used as a response element in the
DescribeDBSecurityGroups
action.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<AuthorizeDBSecurityGroupIngressError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn backtrack_db_cluster(&self) -> BacktrackDBClusterFluentBuilder
pub fn backtrack_db_cluster(&self) -> BacktrackDBClusterFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the BacktrackDBCluster
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe DB cluster identifier of the DB cluster to be backtracked. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
Constraints:
-
Must contain from 1 to 63 alphanumeric characters or hyphens.
-
First character must be a letter.
-
Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.
Example:
my-cluster1
-
backtrack_to(DateTime)
/set_backtrack_to(Option<DateTime>)
:
required: trueThe timestamp of the time to backtrack the DB cluster to, specified in ISO 8601 format. For more information about ISO 8601, see the ISO8601 Wikipedia page.
If the specified time isn’t a consistent time for the DB cluster, Aurora automatically chooses the nearest possible consistent time for the DB cluster.
Constraints:
-
Must contain a valid ISO 8601 timestamp.
-
Can’t contain a timestamp set in the future.
Example:
2017-07-08T18:00Z
-
force(bool)
/set_force(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to force the DB cluster to backtrack when binary logging is enabled. Otherwise, an error occurs when binary logging is enabled.
use_earliest_time_on_point_in_time_unavailable(bool)
/set_use_earliest_time_on_point_in_time_unavailable(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to backtrack the DB cluster to the earliest possible backtrack time when BacktrackTo is set to a timestamp earlier than the earliest backtrack time. When this parameter is disabled and BacktrackTo is set to a timestamp earlier than the earliest backtrack time, an error occurs.
- On success, responds with
BacktrackDbClusterOutput
with field(s):db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:Contains a user-supplied DB cluster identifier. This identifier is the unique key that identifies a DB cluster.
backtrack_identifier(Option<String>)
:Contains the backtrack identifier.
backtrack_to(Option<DateTime>)
:The timestamp of the time to which the DB cluster was backtracked.
backtracked_from(Option<DateTime>)
:The timestamp of the time from which the DB cluster was backtracked.
backtrack_request_creation_time(Option<DateTime>)
:The timestamp of the time at which the backtrack was requested.
status(Option<String>)
:The status of the backtrack. This property returns one of the following values:
-
applying
- The backtrack is currently being applied to or rolled back from the DB cluster. -
completed
- The backtrack has successfully been applied to or rolled back from the DB cluster. -
failed
- An error occurred while the backtrack was applied to or rolled back from the DB cluster. -
pending
- The backtrack is currently pending application to or rollback from the DB cluster.
-
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<BacktrackDBClusterError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn cancel_export_task(&self) -> CancelExportTaskFluentBuilder
pub fn cancel_export_task(&self) -> CancelExportTaskFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the CancelExportTask
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
export_task_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_export_task_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe identifier of the snapshot or cluster export task to cancel.
- On success, responds with
CancelExportTaskOutput
with field(s):export_task_identifier(Option<String>)
:A unique identifier for the snapshot or cluster export task. This ID isn’t an identifier for the Amazon S3 bucket where the data is exported.
source_arn(Option<String>)
:The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the snapshot or cluster exported to Amazon S3.
export_only(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:The data exported from the snapshot or cluster.
Valid Values:
-
database
- Export all the data from a specified database. -
database.table
table-name - Export a table of the snapshot or cluster. This format is valid only for RDS for MySQL, RDS for MariaDB, and Aurora MySQL. -
database.schema
schema-name - Export a database schema of the snapshot or cluster. This format is valid only for RDS for PostgreSQL and Aurora PostgreSQL. -
database.schema.table
table-name - Export a table of the database schema. This format is valid only for RDS for PostgreSQL and Aurora PostgreSQL.
-
snapshot_time(Option<DateTime>)
:The time when the snapshot was created.
task_start_time(Option<DateTime>)
:The time when the snapshot or cluster export task started.
task_end_time(Option<DateTime>)
:The time when the snapshot or cluster export task ended.
s3_bucket(Option<String>)
:The Amazon S3 bucket where the snapshot or cluster is exported to.
s3_prefix(Option<String>)
:The Amazon S3 bucket prefix that is the file name and path of the exported data.
iam_role_arn(Option<String>)
:The name of the IAM role that is used to write to Amazon S3 when exporting a snapshot or cluster.
kms_key_id(Option<String>)
:The key identifier of the Amazon Web Services KMS key that is used to encrypt the data when it’s exported to Amazon S3. The KMS key identifier is its key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name. The IAM role used for the export must have encryption and decryption permissions to use this KMS key.
status(Option<String>)
:The progress status of the export task. The status can be one of the following:
-
CANCELED
-
CANCELING
-
COMPLETE
-
FAILED
-
IN_PROGRESS
-
STARTING
-
percent_progress(Option<i32>)
:The progress of the snapshot or cluster export task as a percentage.
total_extracted_data_in_gb(Option<i32>)
:The total amount of data exported, in gigabytes.
failure_cause(Option<String>)
:The reason the export failed, if it failed.
warning_message(Option<String>)
:A warning about the snapshot or cluster export task.
source_type(Option<ExportSourceType>)
:The type of source for the export.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<CancelExportTaskError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn copy_db_cluster_parameter_group(
&self,
) -> CopyDBClusterParameterGroupFluentBuilder
pub fn copy_db_cluster_parameter_group( &self, ) -> CopyDBClusterParameterGroupFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the CopyDBClusterParameterGroup
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
source_db_cluster_parameter_group_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_source_db_cluster_parameter_group_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe identifier or Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the source DB cluster parameter group. For information about creating an ARN, see Constructing an ARN for Amazon RDS in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
Constraints:
-
Must specify a valid DB cluster parameter group.
-
target_db_cluster_parameter_group_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_target_db_cluster_parameter_group_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe identifier for the copied DB cluster parameter group.
Constraints:
-
Can’t be null, empty, or blank
-
Must contain from 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens
-
First character must be a letter
-
Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens
Example:
my-cluster-param-group1
-
target_db_cluster_parameter_group_description(impl Into<String>)
/set_target_db_cluster_parameter_group_description(Option<String>)
:
required: trueA description for the copied DB cluster parameter group.
tags(Tag)
/set_tags(Option<Vec::<Tag>>)
:
required: falseA list of tags.
For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide or Tagging Amazon Aurora and Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
- On success, responds with
CopyDbClusterParameterGroupOutput
with field(s):db_cluster_parameter_group(Option<DbClusterParameterGroup>)
:Contains the details of an Amazon RDS DB cluster parameter group.
This data type is used as a response element in the
DescribeDBClusterParameterGroups
action.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<CopyDBClusterParameterGroupError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn copy_db_cluster_snapshot(&self) -> CopyDBClusterSnapshotFluentBuilder
pub fn copy_db_cluster_snapshot(&self) -> CopyDBClusterSnapshotFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the CopyDBClusterSnapshot
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
source_db_cluster_snapshot_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_source_db_cluster_snapshot_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe identifier of the DB cluster snapshot to copy. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
You can’t copy an encrypted, shared DB cluster snapshot from one Amazon Web Services Region to another.
Constraints:
-
Must specify a valid system snapshot in the “available” state.
-
If the source snapshot is in the same Amazon Web Services Region as the copy, specify a valid DB snapshot identifier.
-
If the source snapshot is in a different Amazon Web Services Region than the copy, specify a valid DB cluster snapshot ARN. For more information, go to Copying Snapshots Across Amazon Web Services Regions in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
Example:
my-cluster-snapshot1
-
target_db_cluster_snapshot_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_target_db_cluster_snapshot_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe identifier of the new DB cluster snapshot to create from the source DB cluster snapshot. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
Constraints:
-
Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens.
-
First character must be a letter.
-
Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.
Example:
my-cluster-snapshot2
-
kms_key_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_kms_key_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for an encrypted DB cluster snapshot. The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the Amazon Web Services KMS key.
If you copy an encrypted DB cluster snapshot from your Amazon Web Services account, you can specify a value for
KmsKeyId
to encrypt the copy with a new KMS key. If you don’t specify a value forKmsKeyId
, then the copy of the DB cluster snapshot is encrypted with the same KMS key as the source DB cluster snapshot.If you copy an encrypted DB cluster snapshot that is shared from another Amazon Web Services account, then you must specify a value for
KmsKeyId
.To copy an encrypted DB cluster snapshot to another Amazon Web Services Region, you must set
KmsKeyId
to the Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier you want to use to encrypt the copy of the DB cluster snapshot in the destination Amazon Web Services Region. KMS keys are specific to the Amazon Web Services Region that they are created in, and you can’t use KMS keys from one Amazon Web Services Region in another Amazon Web Services Region.If you copy an unencrypted DB cluster snapshot and specify a value for the
KmsKeyId
parameter, an error is returned.pre_signed_url(impl Into<String>)
/set_pre_signed_url(Option<String>)
:
required: falseWhen you are copying a DB cluster snapshot from one Amazon Web Services GovCloud (US) Region to another, the URL that contains a Signature Version 4 signed request for the
CopyDBClusterSnapshot
API operation in the Amazon Web Services Region that contains the source DB cluster snapshot to copy. Use thePreSignedUrl
parameter when copying an encrypted DB cluster snapshot from another Amazon Web Services Region. Don’t specifyPreSignedUrl
when copying an encrypted DB cluster snapshot in the same Amazon Web Services Region.This setting applies only to Amazon Web Services GovCloud (US) Regions. It’s ignored in other Amazon Web Services Regions.
The presigned URL must be a valid request for the
CopyDBClusterSnapshot
API operation that can run in the source Amazon Web Services Region that contains the encrypted DB cluster snapshot to copy. The presigned URL request must contain the following parameter values:-
KmsKeyId
- The KMS key identifier for the KMS key to use to encrypt the copy of the DB cluster snapshot in the destination Amazon Web Services Region. This is the same identifier for both theCopyDBClusterSnapshot
operation that is called in the destination Amazon Web Services Region, and the operation contained in the presigned URL. -
DestinationRegion
- The name of the Amazon Web Services Region that the DB cluster snapshot is to be created in. -
SourceDBClusterSnapshotIdentifier
- The DB cluster snapshot identifier for the encrypted DB cluster snapshot to be copied. This identifier must be in the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) format for the source Amazon Web Services Region. For example, if you are copying an encrypted DB cluster snapshot from the us-west-2 Amazon Web Services Region, then yourSourceDBClusterSnapshotIdentifier
looks like the following example:arn:aws:rds:us-west-2:123456789012:cluster-snapshot:aurora-cluster1-snapshot-20161115
.
To learn how to generate a Signature Version 4 signed request, see Authenticating Requests: Using Query Parameters (Amazon Web Services Signature Version 4) and Signature Version 4 Signing Process.
If you are using an Amazon Web Services SDK tool or the CLI, you can specify
SourceRegion
(or–source-region
for the CLI) instead of specifyingPreSignedUrl
manually. SpecifyingSourceRegion
autogenerates a presigned URL that is a valid request for the operation that can run in the source Amazon Web Services Region.-
copy_tags(bool)
/set_copy_tags(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to copy all tags from the source DB cluster snapshot to the target DB cluster snapshot. By default, tags are not copied.
tags(Tag)
/set_tags(Option<Vec::<Tag>>)
:
required: falseA list of tags.
For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide or Tagging Amazon Aurora and Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
- On success, responds with
CopyDbClusterSnapshotOutput
with field(s):db_cluster_snapshot(Option<DbClusterSnapshot>)
:Contains the details for an Amazon RDS DB cluster snapshot
This data type is used as a response element in the
DescribeDBClusterSnapshots
action.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<CopyDBClusterSnapshotError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn copy_db_parameter_group(&self) -> CopyDBParameterGroupFluentBuilder
pub fn copy_db_parameter_group(&self) -> CopyDBParameterGroupFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the CopyDBParameterGroup
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
source_db_parameter_group_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_source_db_parameter_group_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe identifier or ARN for the source DB parameter group. For information about creating an ARN, see Constructing an ARN for Amazon RDS in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
Constraints:
-
Must specify a valid DB parameter group.
-
target_db_parameter_group_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_target_db_parameter_group_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe identifier for the copied DB parameter group.
Constraints:
-
Can’t be null, empty, or blank
-
Must contain from 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens
-
First character must be a letter
-
Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens
Example:
my-db-parameter-group
-
target_db_parameter_group_description(impl Into<String>)
/set_target_db_parameter_group_description(Option<String>)
:
required: trueA description for the copied DB parameter group.
tags(Tag)
/set_tags(Option<Vec::<Tag>>)
:
required: falseA list of tags.
For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide or Tagging Amazon Aurora and Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
- On success, responds with
CopyDbParameterGroupOutput
with field(s):db_parameter_group(Option<DbParameterGroup>)
:Contains the details of an Amazon RDS DB parameter group.
This data type is used as a response element in the
DescribeDBParameterGroups
action.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<CopyDBParameterGroupError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn copy_db_snapshot(&self) -> CopyDBSnapshotFluentBuilder
pub fn copy_db_snapshot(&self) -> CopyDBSnapshotFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the CopyDBSnapshot
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
source_db_snapshot_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_source_db_snapshot_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe identifier for the source DB snapshot.
If the source snapshot is in the same Amazon Web Services Region as the copy, specify a valid DB snapshot identifier. For example, you might specify
rds:mysql-instance1-snapshot-20130805
.If the source snapshot is in a different Amazon Web Services Region than the copy, specify a valid DB snapshot ARN. For example, you might specify
arn:aws:rds:us-west-2:123456789012:snapshot:mysql-instance1-snapshot-20130805
.If you are copying from a shared manual DB snapshot, this parameter must be the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the shared DB snapshot.
If you are copying an encrypted snapshot this parameter must be in the ARN format for the source Amazon Web Services Region.
Constraints:
-
Must specify a valid system snapshot in the “available” state.
Example:
rds:mydb-2012-04-02-00-01
Example:
arn:aws:rds:us-west-2:123456789012:snapshot:mysql-instance1-snapshot-20130805
-
target_db_snapshot_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_target_db_snapshot_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe identifier for the copy of the snapshot.
Constraints:
-
Can’t be null, empty, or blank
-
Must contain from 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens
-
First character must be a letter
-
Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens
Example:
my-db-snapshot
-
kms_key_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_kms_key_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for an encrypted DB snapshot. The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key.
If you copy an encrypted DB snapshot from your Amazon Web Services account, you can specify a value for this parameter to encrypt the copy with a new KMS key. If you don’t specify a value for this parameter, then the copy of the DB snapshot is encrypted with the same Amazon Web Services KMS key as the source DB snapshot.
If you copy an encrypted DB snapshot that is shared from another Amazon Web Services account, then you must specify a value for this parameter.
If you specify this parameter when you copy an unencrypted snapshot, the copy is encrypted.
If you copy an encrypted snapshot to a different Amazon Web Services Region, then you must specify an Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for the destination Amazon Web Services Region. KMS keys are specific to the Amazon Web Services Region that they are created in, and you can’t use KMS keys from one Amazon Web Services Region in another Amazon Web Services Region.
tags(Tag)
/set_tags(Option<Vec::<Tag>>)
:
required: falseA list of tags.
For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide or Tagging Amazon Aurora and Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
copy_tags(bool)
/set_copy_tags(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to copy all tags from the source DB snapshot to the target DB snapshot. By default, tags aren’t copied.
pre_signed_url(impl Into<String>)
/set_pre_signed_url(Option<String>)
:
required: falseWhen you are copying a snapshot from one Amazon Web Services GovCloud (US) Region to another, the URL that contains a Signature Version 4 signed request for the
CopyDBSnapshot
API operation in the source Amazon Web Services Region that contains the source DB snapshot to copy.This setting applies only to Amazon Web Services GovCloud (US) Regions. It’s ignored in other Amazon Web Services Regions.
You must specify this parameter when you copy an encrypted DB snapshot from another Amazon Web Services Region by using the Amazon RDS API. Don’t specify
PreSignedUrl
when you are copying an encrypted DB snapshot in the same Amazon Web Services Region.The presigned URL must be a valid request for the
CopyDBClusterSnapshot
API operation that can run in the source Amazon Web Services Region that contains the encrypted DB cluster snapshot to copy. The presigned URL request must contain the following parameter values:-
DestinationRegion
- The Amazon Web Services Region that the encrypted DB snapshot is copied to. This Amazon Web Services Region is the same one where theCopyDBSnapshot
operation is called that contains this presigned URL.For example, if you copy an encrypted DB snapshot from the us-west-2 Amazon Web Services Region to the us-east-1 Amazon Web Services Region, then you call the
CopyDBSnapshot
operation in the us-east-1 Amazon Web Services Region and provide a presigned URL that contains a call to theCopyDBSnapshot
operation in the us-west-2 Amazon Web Services Region. For this example, theDestinationRegion
in the presigned URL must be set to the us-east-1 Amazon Web Services Region. -
KmsKeyId
- The KMS key identifier for the KMS key to use to encrypt the copy of the DB snapshot in the destination Amazon Web Services Region. This is the same identifier for both theCopyDBSnapshot
operation that is called in the destination Amazon Web Services Region, and the operation contained in the presigned URL. -
SourceDBSnapshotIdentifier
- The DB snapshot identifier for the encrypted snapshot to be copied. This identifier must be in the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) format for the source Amazon Web Services Region. For example, if you are copying an encrypted DB snapshot from the us-west-2 Amazon Web Services Region, then yourSourceDBSnapshotIdentifier
looks like the following example:arn:aws:rds:us-west-2:123456789012:snapshot:mysql-instance1-snapshot-20161115
.
To learn how to generate a Signature Version 4 signed request, see Authenticating Requests: Using Query Parameters (Amazon Web Services Signature Version 4) and Signature Version 4 Signing Process.
If you are using an Amazon Web Services SDK tool or the CLI, you can specify
SourceRegion
(or–source-region
for the CLI) instead of specifyingPreSignedUrl
manually. SpecifyingSourceRegion
autogenerates a presigned URL that is a valid request for the operation that can run in the source Amazon Web Services Region.-
option_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_option_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of an option group to associate with the copy of the snapshot.
Specify this option if you are copying a snapshot from one Amazon Web Services Region to another, and your DB instance uses a nondefault option group. If your source DB instance uses Transparent Data Encryption for Oracle or Microsoft SQL Server, you must specify this option when copying across Amazon Web Services Regions. For more information, see Option group considerations in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
target_custom_availability_zone(impl Into<String>)
/set_target_custom_availability_zone(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe external custom Availability Zone (CAZ) identifier for the target CAZ.
Example:
rds-caz-aiqhTgQv
.copy_option_group(bool)
/set_copy_option_group(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to copy the DB option group associated with the source DB snapshot to the target Amazon Web Services account and associate with the target DB snapshot. The associated option group can be copied only with cross-account snapshot copy calls.
- On success, responds with
CopyDbSnapshotOutput
with field(s):db_snapshot(Option<DbSnapshot>)
:Contains the details of an Amazon RDS DB snapshot.
This data type is used as a response element in the
DescribeDBSnapshots
action.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<CopyDBSnapshotError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn copy_option_group(&self) -> CopyOptionGroupFluentBuilder
pub fn copy_option_group(&self) -> CopyOptionGroupFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the CopyOptionGroup
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
source_option_group_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_source_option_group_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe identifier for the source option group.
Constraints:
-
Must specify a valid option group.
-
target_option_group_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_target_option_group_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe identifier for the copied option group.
Constraints:
-
Can’t be null, empty, or blank
-
Must contain from 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens
-
First character must be a letter
-
Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens
Example:
my-option-group
-
target_option_group_description(impl Into<String>)
/set_target_option_group_description(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe description for the copied option group.
tags(Tag)
/set_tags(Option<Vec::<Tag>>)
:
required: falseA list of tags.
For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide or Tagging Amazon Aurora and Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
- On success, responds with
CopyOptionGroupOutput
with field(s): - On failure, responds with
SdkError<CopyOptionGroupError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn create_blue_green_deployment(
&self,
) -> CreateBlueGreenDeploymentFluentBuilder
pub fn create_blue_green_deployment( &self, ) -> CreateBlueGreenDeploymentFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the CreateBlueGreenDeployment
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
blue_green_deployment_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_blue_green_deployment_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the blue/green deployment.
Constraints:
-
Can’t be the same as an existing blue/green deployment name in the same account and Amazon Web Services Region.
-
source(impl Into<String>)
/set_source(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the source production database.
Specify the database that you want to clone. The blue/green deployment creates this database in the green environment. You can make updates to the database in the green environment, such as an engine version upgrade. When you are ready, you can switch the database in the green environment to be the production database.
target_engine_version(impl Into<String>)
/set_target_engine_version(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe engine version of the database in the green environment.
Specify the engine version to upgrade to in the green environment.
target_db_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_target_db_parameter_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe DB parameter group associated with the DB instance in the green environment.
To test parameter changes, specify a DB parameter group that is different from the one associated with the source DB instance.
target_db_cluster_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_target_db_cluster_parameter_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe DB cluster parameter group associated with the Aurora DB cluster in the green environment.
To test parameter changes, specify a DB cluster parameter group that is different from the one associated with the source DB cluster.
tags(Tag)
/set_tags(Option<Vec::<Tag>>)
:
required: falseTags to assign to the blue/green deployment.
target_db_instance_class(impl Into<String>)
/set_target_db_instance_class(Option<String>)
:
required: falseSpecify the DB instance class for the databases in the green environment.
This parameter only applies to RDS DB instances, because DB instances within an Aurora DB cluster can have multiple different instance classes. If you’re creating a blue/green deployment from an Aurora DB cluster, don’t specify this parameter. After the green environment is created, you can individually modify the instance classes of the DB instances within the green DB cluster.
upgrade_target_storage_config(bool)
/set_upgrade_target_storage_config(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseWhether to upgrade the storage file system configuration on the green database. This option migrates the green DB instance from the older 32-bit file system to the preferred configuration. For more information, see Upgrading the storage file system for a DB instance.
target_iops(i32)
/set_target_iops(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe amount of Provisioned IOPS (input/output operations per second) to allocate for the green DB instance. For information about valid IOPS values, see Amazon RDS DB instance storage in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
This setting doesn’t apply to Amazon Aurora blue/green deployments.
target_storage_type(impl Into<String>)
/set_target_storage_type(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe storage type to associate with the green DB instance.
Valid Values:
gp2 | gp3 | io1 | io2
This setting doesn’t apply to Amazon Aurora blue/green deployments.
target_allocated_storage(i32)
/set_target_allocated_storage(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe amount of storage in gibibytes (GiB) to allocate for the green DB instance. You can choose to increase or decrease the allocated storage on the green DB instance.
This setting doesn’t apply to Amazon Aurora blue/green deployments.
target_storage_throughput(i32)
/set_target_storage_throughput(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe storage throughput value for the green DB instance.
This setting applies only to the
gp3
storage type.This setting doesn’t apply to Amazon Aurora blue/green deployments.
- On success, responds with
CreateBlueGreenDeploymentOutput
with field(s):blue_green_deployment(Option<BlueGreenDeployment>)
:Details about a blue/green deployment.
For more information, see Using Amazon RDS Blue/Green Deployments for database updates in the Amazon RDS User Guide and Using Amazon RDS Blue/Green Deployments for database updates in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<CreateBlueGreenDeploymentError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn create_custom_db_engine_version(
&self,
) -> CreateCustomDBEngineVersionFluentBuilder
pub fn create_custom_db_engine_version( &self, ) -> CreateCustomDBEngineVersionFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the CreateCustomDBEngineVersion
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
engine(impl Into<String>)
/set_engine(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe database engine. RDS Custom for Oracle supports the following values:
-
custom-oracle-ee
-
custom-oracle-ee-cdb
-
custom-oracle-se2
-
custom-oracle-se2-cdb
-
engine_version(impl Into<String>)
/set_engine_version(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of your CEV. The name format is 19.customized_string. For example, a valid CEV name is
19.my_cev1
. This setting is required for RDS Custom for Oracle, but optional for Amazon RDS. The combination ofEngine
andEngineVersion
is unique per customer per Region.database_installation_files_s3_bucket_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_database_installation_files_s3_bucket_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of an Amazon S3 bucket that contains database installation files for your CEV. For example, a valid bucket name is
my-custom-installation-files
.database_installation_files_s3_prefix(impl Into<String>)
/set_database_installation_files_s3_prefix(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon S3 directory that contains the database installation files for your CEV. For example, a valid bucket name is
123456789012/cev1
. If this setting isn’t specified, no prefix is assumed.image_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_image_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe ID of the Amazon Machine Image (AMI). For RDS Custom for SQL Server, an AMI ID is required to create a CEV. For RDS Custom for Oracle, the default is the most recent AMI available, but you can specify an AMI ID that was used in a different Oracle CEV. Find the AMIs used by your CEVs by calling the DescribeDBEngineVersions operation.
kms_key_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_kms_key_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for an encrypted CEV. A symmetric encryption KMS key is required for RDS Custom, but optional for Amazon RDS.
If you have an existing symmetric encryption KMS key in your account, you can use it with RDS Custom. No further action is necessary. If you don’t already have a symmetric encryption KMS key in your account, follow the instructions in Creating a symmetric encryption KMS key in the Amazon Web Services Key Management Service Developer Guide.
You can choose the same symmetric encryption key when you create a CEV and a DB instance, or choose different keys.
description(impl Into<String>)
/set_description(Option<String>)
:
required: falseAn optional description of your CEV.
manifest(impl Into<String>)
/set_manifest(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe CEV manifest, which is a JSON document that describes the installation .zip files stored in Amazon S3. Specify the name/value pairs in a file or a quoted string. RDS Custom applies the patches in the order in which they are listed.
The following JSON fields are valid:
- MediaImportTemplateVersion
-
Version of the CEV manifest. The date is in the format
YYYY-MM-DD
. - databaseInstallationFileNames
-
Ordered list of installation files for the CEV.
- opatchFileNames
-
Ordered list of OPatch installers used for the Oracle DB engine.
- psuRuPatchFileNames
-
The PSU and RU patches for this CEV.
- OtherPatchFileNames
-
The patches that are not in the list of PSU and RU patches. Amazon RDS applies these patches after applying the PSU and RU patches.
For more information, see Creating the CEV manifest in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
tags(Tag)
/set_tags(Option<Vec::<Tag>>)
:
required: falseA list of tags.
For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide or Tagging Amazon Aurora and Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
source_custom_db_engine_version_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_source_custom_db_engine_version_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe ARN of a CEV to use as a source for creating a new CEV. You can specify a different Amazon Machine Imagine (AMI) by using either
Source
orUseAwsProvidedLatestImage
. You can’t specify a different JSON manifest when you specifySourceCustomDbEngineVersionIdentifier
.use_aws_provided_latest_image(bool)
/set_use_aws_provided_latest_image(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to use the latest service-provided Amazon Machine Image (AMI) for the CEV. If you specify
UseAwsProvidedLatestImage
, you can’t also specifyImageId
.
- On success, responds with
CreateCustomDbEngineVersionOutput
with field(s):engine(Option<String>)
:The name of the database engine.
engine_version(Option<String>)
:The version number of the database engine.
db_parameter_group_family(Option<String>)
:The name of the DB parameter group family for the database engine.
db_engine_description(Option<String>)
:The description of the database engine.
db_engine_version_description(Option<String>)
:The description of the database engine version.
default_character_set(Option<CharacterSet>)
:The default character set for new instances of this engine version, if the
CharacterSetName
parameter of the CreateDBInstance API isn’t specified.image(Option<CustomDbEngineVersionAmi>)
:The EC2 image
db_engine_media_type(Option<String>)
:A value that indicates the source media provider of the AMI based on the usage operation. Applicable for RDS Custom for SQL Server.
supported_character_sets(Option<Vec::<CharacterSet>>)
:A list of the character sets supported by this engine for the
CharacterSetName
parameter of theCreateDBInstance
operation.supported_nchar_character_sets(Option<Vec::<CharacterSet>>)
:A list of the character sets supported by the Oracle DB engine for the
NcharCharacterSetName
parameter of theCreateDBInstance
operation.valid_upgrade_target(Option<Vec::<UpgradeTarget>>)
:A list of engine versions that this database engine version can be upgraded to.
supported_timezones(Option<Vec::<Timezone>>)
:A list of the time zones supported by this engine for the
Timezone
parameter of theCreateDBInstance
action.exportable_log_types(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:The types of logs that the database engine has available for export to CloudWatch Logs.
supports_log_exports_to_cloudwatch_logs(Option<bool>)
:Indicates whether the engine version supports exporting the log types specified by ExportableLogTypes to CloudWatch Logs.
supports_read_replica(Option<bool>)
:Indicates whether the database engine version supports read replicas.
supported_engine_modes(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:A list of the supported DB engine modes.
supported_feature_names(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:A list of features supported by the DB engine.
The supported features vary by DB engine and DB engine version.
To determine the supported features for a specific DB engine and DB engine version using the CLI, use the following command:
aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine <engine_name> –engine-version <engine_version></engine_version> </engine_name>
For example, to determine the supported features for RDS for PostgreSQL version 13.3 using the CLI, use the following command:
aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine postgres –engine-version 13.3
The supported features are listed under
SupportedFeatureNames
in the output.status(Option<String>)
:The status of the DB engine version, either
available
ordeprecated
.supports_parallel_query(Option<bool>)
:Indicates whether you can use Aurora parallel query with a specific DB engine version.
supports_global_databases(Option<bool>)
:Indicates whether you can use Aurora global databases with a specific DB engine version.
major_engine_version(Option<String>)
:The major engine version of the CEV.
database_installation_files_s3_bucket_name(Option<String>)
:The name of the Amazon S3 bucket that contains your database installation files.
database_installation_files_s3_prefix(Option<String>)
:The Amazon S3 directory that contains the database installation files. If not specified, then no prefix is assumed.
db_engine_version_arn(Option<String>)
:The ARN of the custom engine version.
kms_key_id(Option<String>)
:The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for an encrypted CEV. This parameter is required for RDS Custom, but optional for Amazon RDS.
create_time(Option<DateTime>)
:The creation time of the DB engine version.
tag_list(Option<Vec::<Tag>>)
:A list of tags.
For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide or Tagging Amazon Aurora and Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
supports_babelfish(Option<bool>)
:Indicates whether the engine version supports Babelfish for Aurora PostgreSQL.
custom_db_engine_version_manifest(Option<String>)
:JSON string that lists the installation files and parameters that RDS Custom uses to create a custom engine version (CEV). RDS Custom applies the patches in the order in which they’re listed in the manifest. You can set the Oracle home, Oracle base, and UNIX/Linux user and group using the installation parameters. For more information, see JSON fields in the CEV manifest in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
supports_limitless_database(Option<bool>)
:Indicates whether the DB engine version supports Aurora Limitless Database.
supports_certificate_rotation_without_restart(Option<bool>)
:Indicates whether the engine version supports rotating the server certificate without rebooting the DB instance.
supported_ca_certificate_identifiers(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:A list of the supported CA certificate identifiers.
For more information, see Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB instance in the Amazon RDS User Guide and Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB cluster in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
supports_local_write_forwarding(Option<bool>)
:Indicates whether the DB engine version supports forwarding write operations from reader DB instances to the writer DB instance in the DB cluster. By default, write operations aren’t allowed on reader DB instances.
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
supports_integrations(Option<bool>)
:Indicates whether the DB engine version supports zero-ETL integrations with Amazon Redshift.
serverless_v2_features_support(Option<ServerlessV2FeaturesSupport>)
:Specifies any Aurora Serverless v2 properties or limits that differ between Aurora engine versions. You can test the values of this attribute when deciding which Aurora version to use in a new or upgraded DB cluster. You can also retrieve the version of an existing DB cluster and check whether that version supports certain Aurora Serverless v2 features before you attempt to use those features.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<CreateCustomDBEngineVersionError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn create_db_cluster(&self) -> CreateDBClusterFluentBuilder
pub fn create_db_cluster(&self) -> CreateDBClusterFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the CreateDBCluster
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
availability_zones(impl Into<String>)
/set_availability_zones(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseA list of Availability Zones (AZs) where you specifically want to create DB instances in the DB cluster.
For information on AZs, see Availability Zones in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only
Constraints:
-
Can’t specify more than three AZs.
-
backup_retention_period(i32)
/set_backup_retention_period(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe number of days for which automated backups are retained.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
Default:
1
Constraints:
-
Must be a value from 1 to 35.
-
character_set_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_character_set_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of the character set (
CharacterSet
) to associate the DB cluster with.Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only
database_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_database_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name for your database of up to 64 alphanumeric characters. A database named
postgres
is always created. If this parameter is specified, an additional database with this name is created.Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe identifier for this DB cluster. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
Constraints:
-
Must contain from 1 to 63 (for Aurora DB clusters) or 1 to 52 (for Multi-AZ DB clusters) letters, numbers, or hyphens.
-
First character must be a letter.
-
Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.
Example:
my-cluster1
-
db_cluster_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_parameter_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of the DB cluster parameter group to associate with this DB cluster. If you don’t specify a value, then the default DB cluster parameter group for the specified DB engine and version is used.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
Constraints:
-
If supplied, must match the name of an existing DB cluster parameter group.
-
vpc_security_group_ids(impl Into<String>)
/set_vpc_security_group_ids(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseA list of EC2 VPC security groups to associate with this DB cluster.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
db_subnet_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_subnet_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseA DB subnet group to associate with this DB cluster.
This setting is required to create a Multi-AZ DB cluster.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
Constraints:
-
Must match the name of an existing DB subnet group.
Example:
mydbsubnetgroup
-
engine(impl Into<String>)
/set_engine(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe database engine to use for this DB cluster.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
Valid Values:
-
aurora-mysql
-
aurora-postgresql
-
mysql
-
postgres
-
neptune
- For information about using Amazon Neptune, see the Amazon Neptune User Guide .
-
engine_version(impl Into<String>)
/set_engine_version(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe version number of the database engine to use.
To list all of the available engine versions for Aurora MySQL version 2 (5.7-compatible) and version 3 (MySQL 8.0-compatible), use the following command:
aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine aurora-mysql –query “DBEngineVersions[].EngineVersion”
You can supply either
5.7
or8.0
to use the default engine version for Aurora MySQL version 2 or version 3, respectively.To list all of the available engine versions for Aurora PostgreSQL, use the following command:
aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine aurora-postgresql –query “DBEngineVersions[].EngineVersion”
To list all of the available engine versions for RDS for MySQL, use the following command:
aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine mysql –query “DBEngineVersions[].EngineVersion”
To list all of the available engine versions for RDS for PostgreSQL, use the following command:
aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine postgres –query “DBEngineVersions[].EngineVersion”
For information about a specific engine, see the following topics:
-
Aurora MySQL - see Database engine updates for Amazon Aurora MySQL in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
-
Aurora PostgreSQL - see Amazon Aurora PostgreSQL releases and engine versions in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
-
RDS for MySQL - see Amazon RDS for MySQL in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
-
RDS for PostgreSQL - see Amazon RDS for PostgreSQL in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
-
port(i32)
/set_port(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe port number on which the instances in the DB cluster accept connections.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
Valid Values:
1150-65535
Default:
-
RDS for MySQL and Aurora MySQL -
3306
-
RDS for PostgreSQL and Aurora PostgreSQL -
5432
-
master_username(impl Into<String>)
/set_master_username(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of the master user for the DB cluster.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
Constraints:
-
Must be 1 to 16 letters or numbers.
-
First character must be a letter.
-
Can’t be a reserved word for the chosen database engine.
-
master_user_password(impl Into<String>)
/set_master_user_password(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe password for the master database user.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
Constraints:
-
Must contain from 8 to 41 characters.
-
Can contain any printable ASCII character except “/”, “”“, or “@”.
-
Can’t be specified if
ManageMasterUserPassword
is turned on.
-
option_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_option_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe option group to associate the DB cluster with.
DB clusters are associated with a default option group that can’t be modified.
preferred_backup_window(impl Into<String>)
/set_preferred_backup_window(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe daily time range during which automated backups are created if automated backups are enabled using the
BackupRetentionPeriod
parameter.Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region. To view the time blocks available, see Backup window in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
Constraints:
-
Must be in the format
hh24:mi-hh24:mi
. -
Must be in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).
-
Must not conflict with the preferred maintenance window.
-
Must be at least 30 minutes.
-
preferred_maintenance_window(impl Into<String>)
/set_preferred_maintenance_window(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe weekly time range during which system maintenance can occur.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region, occurring on a random day of the week. To see the time blocks available, see Adjusting the Preferred DB Cluster Maintenance Window in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
Constraints:
-
Must be in the format
ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi
. -
Days must be one of
Mon | Tue | Wed | Thu | Fri | Sat | Sun
. -
Must be in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).
-
Must be at least 30 minutes.
-
replication_source_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_replication_source_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the source DB instance or DB cluster if this DB cluster is created as a read replica.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
tags(Tag)
/set_tags(Option<Vec::<Tag>>)
:
required: falseTags to assign to the DB cluster.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
storage_encrypted(bool)
/set_storage_encrypted(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether the DB cluster is encrypted.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
kms_key_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_kms_key_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for an encrypted DB cluster.
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN.
When a KMS key isn’t specified in
KmsKeyId
:-
If
ReplicationSourceIdentifier
identifies an encrypted source, then Amazon RDS uses the KMS key used to encrypt the source. Otherwise, Amazon RDS uses your default KMS key. -
If the
StorageEncrypted
parameter is enabled andReplicationSourceIdentifier
isn’t specified, then Amazon RDS uses your default KMS key.
There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.
If you create a read replica of an encrypted DB cluster in another Amazon Web Services Region, make sure to set
KmsKeyId
to a KMS key identifier that is valid in the destination Amazon Web Services Region. This KMS key is used to encrypt the read replica in that Amazon Web Services Region.Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
-
pre_signed_url(impl Into<String>)
/set_pre_signed_url(Option<String>)
:
required: falseWhen you are replicating a DB cluster from one Amazon Web Services GovCloud (US) Region to another, an URL that contains a Signature Version 4 signed request for the
CreateDBCluster
operation to be called in the source Amazon Web Services Region where the DB cluster is replicated from. SpecifyPreSignedUrl
only when you are performing cross-Region replication from an encrypted DB cluster.The presigned URL must be a valid request for the
CreateDBCluster
API operation that can run in the source Amazon Web Services Region that contains the encrypted DB cluster to copy.The presigned URL request must contain the following parameter values:
-
KmsKeyId
- The KMS key identifier for the KMS key to use to encrypt the copy of the DB cluster in the destination Amazon Web Services Region. This should refer to the same KMS key for both theCreateDBCluster
operation that is called in the destination Amazon Web Services Region, and the operation contained in the presigned URL. -
DestinationRegion
- The name of the Amazon Web Services Region that Aurora read replica will be created in. -
ReplicationSourceIdentifier
- The DB cluster identifier for the encrypted DB cluster to be copied. This identifier must be in the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) format for the source Amazon Web Services Region. For example, if you are copying an encrypted DB cluster from the us-west-2 Amazon Web Services Region, then yourReplicationSourceIdentifier
would look like Example:arn:aws:rds:us-west-2:123456789012:cluster:aurora-cluster1
.
To learn how to generate a Signature Version 4 signed request, see Authenticating Requests: Using Query Parameters (Amazon Web Services Signature Version 4) and Signature Version 4 Signing Process.
If you are using an Amazon Web Services SDK tool or the CLI, you can specify
SourceRegion
(or–source-region
for the CLI) instead of specifyingPreSignedUrl
manually. SpecifyingSourceRegion
autogenerates a presigned URL that is a valid request for the operation that can run in the source Amazon Web Services Region.Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only
-
enable_iam_database_authentication(bool)
/set_enable_iam_database_authentication(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to enable mapping of Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts. By default, mapping isn’t enabled.
For more information, see IAM Database Authentication in the Amazon Aurora User Guide or IAM database authentication for MariaDB, MySQL, and PostgreSQL in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
backtrack_window(i64)
/set_backtrack_window(Option<i64>)
:
required: falseThe target backtrack window, in seconds. To disable backtracking, set this value to
0
.Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora MySQL DB clusters only
Default:
0
Constraints:
-
If specified, this value must be set to a number from 0 to 259,200 (72 hours).
-
enable_cloudwatch_logs_exports(impl Into<String>)
/set_enable_cloudwatch_logs_exports(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseThe list of log types that need to be enabled for exporting to CloudWatch Logs.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
The following values are valid for each DB engine:
-
Aurora MySQL -
audit | error | general | instance | slowquery | iam-db-auth-error
-
Aurora PostgreSQL -
instance | postgresql | iam-db-auth-error
-
RDS for MySQL -
error | general | slowquery | iam-db-auth-error
-
RDS for PostgreSQL -
postgresql | upgrade | iam-db-auth-error
For more information about exporting CloudWatch Logs for Amazon RDS, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
For more information about exporting CloudWatch Logs for Amazon Aurora, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
-
engine_mode(impl Into<String>)
/set_engine_mode(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe DB engine mode of the DB cluster, either
provisioned
orserverless
.The
serverless
engine mode only applies for Aurora Serverless v1 DB clusters. Aurora Serverless v2 DB clusters use theprovisioned
engine mode.For information about limitations and requirements for Serverless DB clusters, see the following sections in the Amazon Aurora User Guide:
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only
scaling_configuration(ScalingConfiguration)
/set_scaling_configuration(Option<ScalingConfiguration>)
:
required: falseFor DB clusters in
serverless
DB engine mode, the scaling properties of the DB cluster.Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only
rds_custom_cluster_configuration(RdsCustomClusterConfiguration)
/set_rds_custom_cluster_configuration(Option<RdsCustomClusterConfiguration>)
:
required: falseReserved for future use.
deletion_protection(bool)
/set_deletion_protection(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether the DB cluster has deletion protection enabled. The database can’t be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection isn’t enabled.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
global_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_global_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe global cluster ID of an Aurora cluster that becomes the primary cluster in the new global database cluster.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only
enable_http_endpoint(bool)
/set_enable_http_endpoint(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to enable the HTTP endpoint for the DB cluster. By default, the HTTP endpoint isn’t enabled.
When enabled, the HTTP endpoint provides a connectionless web service API (RDS Data API) for running SQL queries on the DB cluster. You can also query your database from inside the RDS console with the RDS query editor.
For more information, see Using RDS Data API in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only
copy_tags_to_snapshot(bool)
/set_copy_tags_to_snapshot(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to copy all tags from the DB cluster to snapshots of the DB cluster. The default is not to copy them.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
domain(impl Into<String>)
/set_domain(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Active Directory directory ID to create the DB cluster in.
For Amazon Aurora DB clusters, Amazon RDS can use Kerberos authentication to authenticate users that connect to the DB cluster.
For more information, see Kerberos authentication in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only
domain_iam_role_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_domain_iam_role_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of the IAM role to use when making API calls to the Directory Service.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only
enable_global_write_forwarding(bool)
/set_enable_global_write_forwarding(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to enable this DB cluster to forward write operations to the primary cluster of a global cluster (Aurora global database). By default, write operations are not allowed on Aurora DB clusters that are secondary clusters in an Aurora global database.
You can set this value only on Aurora DB clusters that are members of an Aurora global database. With this parameter enabled, a secondary cluster can forward writes to the current primary cluster, and the resulting changes are replicated back to this cluster. For the primary DB cluster of an Aurora global database, this value is used immediately if the primary is demoted by a global cluster API operation, but it does nothing until then.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only
db_cluster_instance_class(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_instance_class(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe compute and memory capacity of each DB instance in the Multi-AZ DB cluster, for example
db.m6gd.xlarge
. Not all DB instance classes are available in all Amazon Web Services Regions, or for all database engines.For the full list of DB instance classes and availability for your engine, see DB instance class in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
This setting is required to create a Multi-AZ DB cluster.
Valid for Cluster Type: Multi-AZ DB clusters only
allocated_storage(i32)
/set_allocated_storage(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe amount of storage in gibibytes (GiB) to allocate to each DB instance in the Multi-AZ DB cluster.
Valid for Cluster Type: Multi-AZ DB clusters only
This setting is required to create a Multi-AZ DB cluster.
storage_type(impl Into<String>)
/set_storage_type(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe storage type to associate with the DB cluster.
For information on storage types for Aurora DB clusters, see Storage configurations for Amazon Aurora DB clusters. For information on storage types for Multi-AZ DB clusters, see Settings for creating Multi-AZ DB clusters.
This setting is required to create a Multi-AZ DB cluster.
When specified for a Multi-AZ DB cluster, a value for the
Iops
parameter is required.Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
Valid Values:
-
Aurora DB clusters -
aurora | aurora-iopt1
-
Multi-AZ DB clusters -
io1 | io2 | gp3
Default:
-
Aurora DB clusters -
aurora
-
Multi-AZ DB clusters -
io1
When you create an Aurora DB cluster with the storage type set to
aurora-iopt1
, the storage type is returned in the response. The storage type isn’t returned when you set it toaurora
.-
iops(i32)
/set_iops(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe amount of Provisioned IOPS (input/output operations per second) to be initially allocated for each DB instance in the Multi-AZ DB cluster.
For information about valid IOPS values, see Provisioned IOPS storage in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
This setting is required to create a Multi-AZ DB cluster.
Valid for Cluster Type: Multi-AZ DB clusters only
Constraints:
-
Must be a multiple between .5 and 50 of the storage amount for the DB cluster.
-
publicly_accessible(bool)
/set_publicly_accessible(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether the DB cluster is publicly accessible.
When the DB cluster is publicly accessible and you connect from outside of the DB cluster’s virtual private cloud (VPC), its Domain Name System (DNS) endpoint resolves to the public IP address. When you connect from within the same VPC as the DB cluster, the endpoint resolves to the private IP address. Access to the DB cluster is ultimately controlled by the security group it uses. That public access isn’t permitted if the security group assigned to the DB cluster doesn’t permit it.
When the DB cluster isn’t publicly accessible, it is an internal DB cluster with a DNS name that resolves to a private IP address.
Valid for Cluster Type: Multi-AZ DB clusters only
Default: The default behavior varies depending on whether
DBSubnetGroupName
is specified.If
DBSubnetGroupName
isn’t specified, andPubliclyAccessible
isn’t specified, the following applies:-
If the default VPC in the target Region doesn’t have an internet gateway attached to it, the DB cluster is private.
-
If the default VPC in the target Region has an internet gateway attached to it, the DB cluster is public.
If
DBSubnetGroupName
is specified, andPubliclyAccessible
isn’t specified, the following applies:-
If the subnets are part of a VPC that doesn’t have an internet gateway attached to it, the DB cluster is private.
-
If the subnets are part of a VPC that has an internet gateway attached to it, the DB cluster is public.
-
auto_minor_version_upgrade(bool)
/set_auto_minor_version_upgrade(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether minor engine upgrades are applied automatically to the DB cluster during the maintenance window. By default, minor engine upgrades are applied automatically.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB cluster.
For more information about automatic minor version upgrades, see Automatically upgrading the minor engine version.
monitoring_interval(i32)
/set_monitoring_interval(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe interval, in seconds, between points when Enhanced Monitoring metrics are collected for the DB cluster. To turn off collecting Enhanced Monitoring metrics, specify
0
.If
MonitoringRoleArn
is specified, also setMonitoringInterval
to a value other than0
.Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
Valid Values:
0 | 1 | 5 | 10 | 15 | 30 | 60
Default:
0
monitoring_role_arn(impl Into<String>)
/set_monitoring_role_arn(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the IAM role that permits RDS to send Enhanced Monitoring metrics to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. An example is
arn:aws:iam:123456789012:role/emaccess
. For information on creating a monitoring role, see Setting up and enabling Enhanced Monitoring in the Amazon RDS User Guide.If
MonitoringInterval
is set to a value other than0
, supply aMonitoringRoleArn
value.Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
database_insights_mode(DatabaseInsightsMode)
/set_database_insights_mode(Option<DatabaseInsightsMode>)
:
required: falseThe mode of Database Insights to enable for the DB cluster.
If you set this value to
advanced
, you must also set thePerformanceInsightsEnabled
parameter totrue
and thePerformanceInsightsRetentionPeriod
parameter to 465.Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
enable_performance_insights(bool)
/set_enable_performance_insights(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to turn on Performance Insights for the DB cluster.
For more information, see Using Amazon Performance Insights in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
performance_insights_kms_key_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_performance_insights_kms_key_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for encryption of Performance Insights data.
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key.
If you don’t specify a value for
PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId
, then Amazon RDS uses your default KMS key. There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
performance_insights_retention_period(i32)
/set_performance_insights_retention_period(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe number of days to retain Performance Insights data.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
Valid Values:
-
7
-
month * 31, where month is a number of months from 1-23. Examples:
93
(3 months * 31),341
(11 months * 31),589
(19 months * 31) -
731
Default:
7
daysIf you specify a retention period that isn’t valid, such as
94
, Amazon RDS issues an error.-
enable_limitless_database(bool)
/set_enable_limitless_database(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to enable Aurora Limitless Database. You must enable Aurora Limitless Database to create a DB shard group.
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
This setting is no longer used. Instead use the
ClusterScalabilityType
setting.serverless_v2_scaling_configuration(ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration)
/set_serverless_v2_scaling_configuration(Option<ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration>)
:
required: falseContains the scaling configuration of an Aurora Serverless v2 DB cluster.
For more information, see Using Amazon Aurora Serverless v2 in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
network_type(impl Into<String>)
/set_network_type(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe network type of the DB cluster.
The network type is determined by the
DBSubnetGroup
specified for the DB cluster. ADBSubnetGroup
can support only the IPv4 protocol or the IPv4 and the IPv6 protocols (DUAL
).For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only
Valid Values:
IPV4 | DUAL
cluster_scalability_type(ClusterScalabilityType)
/set_cluster_scalability_type(Option<ClusterScalabilityType>)
:
required: falseSpecifies the scalability mode of the Aurora DB cluster. When set to
limitless
, the cluster operates as an Aurora Limitless Database. When set tostandard
(the default), the cluster uses normal DB instance creation.Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
You can’t modify this setting after you create the DB cluster.
db_system_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_system_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseReserved for future use.
manage_master_user_password(bool)
/set_manage_master_user_password(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to manage the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.
For more information, see Password management with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager in the Amazon RDS User Guide and Password management with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
Constraints:
-
Can’t manage the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager if
MasterUserPassword
is specified.
-
master_user_secret_kms_key_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_master_user_secret_kms_key_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier to encrypt a secret that is automatically generated and managed in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.
This setting is valid only if the master user password is managed by RDS in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager for the DB cluster.
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN.
If you don’t specify
MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId
, then theaws/secretsmanager
KMS key is used to encrypt the secret. If the secret is in a different Amazon Web Services account, then you can’t use theaws/secretsmanager
KMS key to encrypt the secret, and you must use a customer managed KMS key.There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
enable_local_write_forwarding(bool)
/set_enable_local_write_forwarding(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether read replicas can forward write operations to the writer DB instance in the DB cluster. By default, write operations aren’t allowed on reader DB instances.
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
ca_certificate_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_ca_certificate_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe CA certificate identifier to use for the DB cluster’s server certificate.
For more information, see Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB instance in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
Valid for Cluster Type: Multi-AZ DB clusters
engine_lifecycle_support(impl Into<String>)
/set_engine_lifecycle_support(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe life cycle type for this DB cluster.
By default, this value is set to
open-source-rds-extended-support
, which enrolls your DB cluster into Amazon RDS Extended Support. At the end of standard support, you can avoid charges for Extended Support by setting the value toopen-source-rds-extended-support-disabled
. In this case, creating the DB cluster will fail if the DB major version is past its end of standard support date.You can use this setting to enroll your DB cluster into Amazon RDS Extended Support. With RDS Extended Support, you can run the selected major engine version on your DB cluster past the end of standard support for that engine version. For more information, see the following sections:
-
Amazon Aurora - Using Amazon RDS Extended Support in the Amazon Aurora User Guide
-
Amazon RDS - Using Amazon RDS Extended Support in the Amazon RDS User Guide
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
Valid Values:
open-source-rds-extended-support | open-source-rds-extended-support-disabled
Default:
open-source-rds-extended-support
-
- On success, responds with
CreateDbClusterOutput
with field(s):db_cluster(Option<DbCluster>)
:Contains the details of an Amazon Aurora DB cluster or Multi-AZ DB cluster.
For an Amazon Aurora DB cluster, this data type is used as a response element in the operations
CreateDBCluster
,DeleteDBCluster
,DescribeDBClusters
,FailoverDBCluster
,ModifyDBCluster
,PromoteReadReplicaDBCluster
,RestoreDBClusterFromS3
,RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot
,RestoreDBClusterToPointInTime
,StartDBCluster
, andStopDBCluster
.For a Multi-AZ DB cluster, this data type is used as a response element in the operations
CreateDBCluster
,DeleteDBCluster
,DescribeDBClusters
,FailoverDBCluster
,ModifyDBCluster
,RebootDBCluster
,RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot
, andRestoreDBClusterToPointInTime
.For more information on Amazon Aurora DB clusters, see What is Amazon Aurora? in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
For more information on Multi-AZ DB clusters, see Multi-AZ deployments with two readable standby DB instances in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<CreateDBClusterError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn create_db_cluster_endpoint(&self) -> CreateDBClusterEndpointFluentBuilder
pub fn create_db_cluster_endpoint(&self) -> CreateDBClusterEndpointFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the CreateDBClusterEndpoint
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe DB cluster identifier of the DB cluster associated with the endpoint. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
db_cluster_endpoint_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_endpoint_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe identifier to use for the new endpoint. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
endpoint_type(impl Into<String>)
/set_endpoint_type(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe type of the endpoint, one of:
READER
,WRITER
,ANY
.static_members(impl Into<String>)
/set_static_members(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseList of DB instance identifiers that are part of the custom endpoint group.
excluded_members(impl Into<String>)
/set_excluded_members(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseList of DB instance identifiers that aren’t part of the custom endpoint group. All other eligible instances are reachable through the custom endpoint. This parameter is relevant only if the list of static members is empty.
tags(Tag)
/set_tags(Option<Vec::<Tag>>)
:
required: falseThe tags to be assigned to the Amazon RDS resource.
- On success, responds with
CreateDbClusterEndpointOutput
with field(s):db_cluster_endpoint_identifier(Option<String>)
:The identifier associated with the endpoint. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:The DB cluster identifier of the DB cluster associated with the endpoint. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
db_cluster_endpoint_resource_identifier(Option<String>)
:A unique system-generated identifier for an endpoint. It remains the same for the whole life of the endpoint.
endpoint(Option<String>)
:The DNS address of the endpoint.
status(Option<String>)
:The current status of the endpoint. One of:
creating
,available
,deleting
,inactive
,modifying
. Theinactive
state applies to an endpoint that can’t be used for a certain kind of cluster, such as awriter
endpoint for a read-only secondary cluster in a global database.endpoint_type(Option<String>)
:The type of the endpoint. One of:
READER
,WRITER
,CUSTOM
.custom_endpoint_type(Option<String>)
:The type associated with a custom endpoint. One of:
READER
,WRITER
,ANY
.static_members(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:List of DB instance identifiers that are part of the custom endpoint group.
excluded_members(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:List of DB instance identifiers that aren’t part of the custom endpoint group. All other eligible instances are reachable through the custom endpoint. Only relevant if the list of static members is empty.
db_cluster_endpoint_arn(Option<String>)
:The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the endpoint.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<CreateDBClusterEndpointError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn create_db_cluster_parameter_group(
&self,
) -> CreateDBClusterParameterGroupFluentBuilder
pub fn create_db_cluster_parameter_group( &self, ) -> CreateDBClusterParameterGroupFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the CreateDBClusterParameterGroup
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_cluster_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_parameter_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the DB cluster parameter group.
Constraints:
-
Must not match the name of an existing DB cluster parameter group.
This value is stored as a lowercase string.
-
db_parameter_group_family(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_parameter_group_family(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe DB cluster parameter group family name. A DB cluster parameter group can be associated with one and only one DB cluster parameter group family, and can be applied only to a DB cluster running a database engine and engine version compatible with that DB cluster parameter group family.
Aurora MySQL
Example:
aurora-mysql5.7
,aurora-mysql8.0
Aurora PostgreSQL
Example:
aurora-postgresql14
RDS for MySQL
Example:
mysql8.0
RDS for PostgreSQL
Example:
postgres13
To list all of the available parameter group families for a DB engine, use the following command:
aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –query “DBEngineVersions[].DBParameterGroupFamily” –engine
For example, to list all of the available parameter group families for the Aurora PostgreSQL DB engine, use the following command:
aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –query “DBEngineVersions[].DBParameterGroupFamily” –engine aurora-postgresql
The output contains duplicates.
The following are the valid DB engine values:
-
aurora-mysql
-
aurora-postgresql
-
mysql
-
postgres
-
description(impl Into<String>)
/set_description(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe description for the DB cluster parameter group.
tags(Tag)
/set_tags(Option<Vec::<Tag>>)
:
required: falseTags to assign to the DB cluster parameter group.
- On success, responds with
CreateDbClusterParameterGroupOutput
with field(s):db_cluster_parameter_group(Option<DbClusterParameterGroup>)
:Contains the details of an Amazon RDS DB cluster parameter group.
This data type is used as a response element in the
DescribeDBClusterParameterGroups
action.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<CreateDBClusterParameterGroupError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn create_db_cluster_snapshot(&self) -> CreateDBClusterSnapshotFluentBuilder
pub fn create_db_cluster_snapshot(&self) -> CreateDBClusterSnapshotFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the CreateDBClusterSnapshot
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_cluster_snapshot_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_snapshot_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe identifier of the DB cluster snapshot. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
Constraints:
-
Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens.
-
First character must be a letter.
-
Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.
Example:
my-cluster1-snapshot1
-
db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe identifier of the DB cluster to create a snapshot for. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
Constraints:
-
Must match the identifier of an existing DBCluster.
Example:
my-cluster1
-
tags(Tag)
/set_tags(Option<Vec::<Tag>>)
:
required: falseThe tags to be assigned to the DB cluster snapshot.
- On success, responds with
CreateDbClusterSnapshotOutput
with field(s):db_cluster_snapshot(Option<DbClusterSnapshot>)
:Contains the details for an Amazon RDS DB cluster snapshot
This data type is used as a response element in the
DescribeDBClusterSnapshots
action.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<CreateDBClusterSnapshotError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn create_db_instance(&self) -> CreateDBInstanceFluentBuilder
pub fn create_db_instance(&self) -> CreateDBInstanceFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the CreateDBInstance
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe meaning of this parameter differs according to the database engine you use.
- Amazon Aurora MySQL
-
The name of the database to create when the primary DB instance of the Aurora MySQL DB cluster is created. If this parameter isn’t specified for an Aurora MySQL DB cluster, no database is created in the DB cluster.
Constraints:
-
Must contain 1 to 64 alphanumeric characters.
-
Must begin with a letter. Subsequent characters can be letters, underscores, or digits (0-9).
-
Can’t be a word reserved by the database engine.
-
- Amazon Aurora PostgreSQL
-
The name of the database to create when the primary DB instance of the Aurora PostgreSQL DB cluster is created. A database named
postgres
is always created. If this parameter is specified, an additional database with this name is created.Constraints:
-
It must contain 1 to 63 alphanumeric characters.
-
Must begin with a letter. Subsequent characters can be letters, underscores, or digits (0 to 9).
-
Can’t be a word reserved by the database engine.
-
- Amazon RDS Custom for Oracle
-
The Oracle System ID (SID) of the created RDS Custom DB instance. If you don’t specify a value, the default value is
ORCL
for non-CDBs andRDSCDB
for CDBs.Default:
ORCL
Constraints:
-
Must contain 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters.
-
Must contain a letter.
-
Can’t be a word reserved by the database engine.
-
- Amazon RDS Custom for SQL Server
-
Not applicable. Must be null.
- RDS for Db2
-
The name of the database to create when the DB instance is created. If this parameter isn’t specified, no database is created in the DB instance. In some cases, we recommend that you don’t add a database name. For more information, see Additional considerations in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
Constraints:
-
Must contain 1 to 64 letters or numbers.
-
Must begin with a letter. Subsequent characters can be letters, underscores, or digits (0-9).
-
Can’t be a word reserved by the specified database engine.
-
- RDS for MariaDB
-
The name of the database to create when the DB instance is created. If this parameter isn’t specified, no database is created in the DB instance.
Constraints:
-
Must contain 1 to 64 letters or numbers.
-
Must begin with a letter. Subsequent characters can be letters, underscores, or digits (0-9).
-
Can’t be a word reserved by the specified database engine.
-
- RDS for MySQL
-
The name of the database to create when the DB instance is created. If this parameter isn’t specified, no database is created in the DB instance.
Constraints:
-
Must contain 1 to 64 letters or numbers.
-
Must begin with a letter. Subsequent characters can be letters, underscores, or digits (0-9).
-
Can’t be a word reserved by the specified database engine.
-
- RDS for Oracle
-
The Oracle System ID (SID) of the created DB instance. If you don’t specify a value, the default value is
ORCL
. You can’t specify the stringnull
, or any other reserved word, forDBName
.Default:
ORCL
Constraints:
-
Can’t be longer than 8 characters.
-
- RDS for PostgreSQL
-
The name of the database to create when the DB instance is created. A database named
postgres
is always created. If this parameter is specified, an additional database with this name is created.Constraints:
-
Must contain 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or underscores.
-
Must begin with a letter. Subsequent characters can be letters, underscores, or digits (0-9).
-
Can’t be a word reserved by the specified database engine.
-
- RDS for SQL Server
-
Not applicable. Must be null.
db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe identifier for this DB instance. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
Constraints:
-
Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens.
-
First character must be a letter.
-
Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.
Example:
mydbinstance
-
allocated_storage(i32)
/set_allocated_storage(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe amount of storage in gibibytes (GiB) to allocate for the DB instance.
This setting doesn’t apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. Aurora cluster volumes automatically grow as the amount of data in your database increases, though you are only charged for the space that you use in an Aurora cluster volume.
- Amazon RDS Custom
-
Constraints to the amount of storage for each storage type are the following:
-
General Purpose (SSD) storage (gp2, gp3): Must be an integer from 40 to 65536 for RDS Custom for Oracle, 16384 for RDS Custom for SQL Server.
-
Provisioned IOPS storage (io1, io2): Must be an integer from 40 to 65536 for RDS Custom for Oracle, 16384 for RDS Custom for SQL Server.
-
- RDS for Db2
-
Constraints to the amount of storage for each storage type are the following:
-
General Purpose (SSD) storage (gp3): Must be an integer from 20 to 65536.
-
Provisioned IOPS storage (io1, io2): Must be an integer from 100 to 65536.
-
- RDS for MariaDB
-
Constraints to the amount of storage for each storage type are the following:
-
General Purpose (SSD) storage (gp2, gp3): Must be an integer from 20 to 65536.
-
Provisioned IOPS storage (io1, io2): Must be an integer from 100 to 65536.
-
Magnetic storage (standard): Must be an integer from 5 to 3072.
-
- RDS for MySQL
-
Constraints to the amount of storage for each storage type are the following:
-
General Purpose (SSD) storage (gp2, gp3): Must be an integer from 20 to 65536.
-
Provisioned IOPS storage (io1, io2): Must be an integer from 100 to 65536.
-
Magnetic storage (standard): Must be an integer from 5 to 3072.
-
- RDS for Oracle
-
Constraints to the amount of storage for each storage type are the following:
-
General Purpose (SSD) storage (gp2, gp3): Must be an integer from 20 to 65536.
-
Provisioned IOPS storage (io1, io2): Must be an integer from 100 to 65536.
-
Magnetic storage (standard): Must be an integer from 10 to 3072.
-
- RDS for PostgreSQL
-
Constraints to the amount of storage for each storage type are the following:
-
General Purpose (SSD) storage (gp2, gp3): Must be an integer from 20 to 65536.
-
Provisioned IOPS storage (io1, io2): Must be an integer from 100 to 65536.
-
Magnetic storage (standard): Must be an integer from 5 to 3072.
-
- RDS for SQL Server
-
Constraints to the amount of storage for each storage type are the following:
-
General Purpose (SSD) storage (gp2, gp3):
-
Enterprise and Standard editions: Must be an integer from 20 to 16384.
-
Web and Express editions: Must be an integer from 20 to 16384.
-
-
Provisioned IOPS storage (io1, io2):
-
Enterprise and Standard editions: Must be an integer from 100 to 16384.
-
Web and Express editions: Must be an integer from 100 to 16384.
-
-
Magnetic storage (standard):
-
Enterprise and Standard editions: Must be an integer from 20 to 1024.
-
Web and Express editions: Must be an integer from 20 to 1024.
-
-
db_instance_class(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_instance_class(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe compute and memory capacity of the DB instance, for example
db.m5.large
. Not all DB instance classes are available in all Amazon Web Services Regions, or for all database engines. For the full list of DB instance classes, and availability for your engine, see DB instance classes in the Amazon RDS User Guide or Aurora DB instance classes in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.engine(impl Into<String>)
/set_engine(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe database engine to use for this DB instance.
Not every database engine is available in every Amazon Web Services Region.
Valid Values:
-
aurora-mysql
(for Aurora MySQL DB instances) -
aurora-postgresql
(for Aurora PostgreSQL DB instances) -
custom-oracle-ee
(for RDS Custom for Oracle DB instances) -
custom-oracle-ee-cdb
(for RDS Custom for Oracle DB instances) -
custom-oracle-se2
(for RDS Custom for Oracle DB instances) -
custom-oracle-se2-cdb
(for RDS Custom for Oracle DB instances) -
custom-sqlserver-ee
(for RDS Custom for SQL Server DB instances) -
custom-sqlserver-se
(for RDS Custom for SQL Server DB instances) -
custom-sqlserver-web
(for RDS Custom for SQL Server DB instances) -
custom-sqlserver-dev
(for RDS Custom for SQL Server DB instances) -
db2-ae
-
db2-se
-
mariadb
-
mysql
-
oracle-ee
-
oracle-ee-cdb
-
oracle-se2
-
oracle-se2-cdb
-
postgres
-
sqlserver-ee
-
sqlserver-se
-
sqlserver-ex
-
sqlserver-web
-
master_username(impl Into<String>)
/set_master_username(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name for the master user.
This setting doesn’t apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. The name for the master user is managed by the DB cluster.
This setting is required for RDS DB instances.
Constraints:
-
Must be 1 to 16 letters, numbers, or underscores.
-
First character must be a letter.
-
Can’t be a reserved word for the chosen database engine.
-
master_user_password(impl Into<String>)
/set_master_user_password(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe password for the master user.
This setting doesn’t apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. The password for the master user is managed by the DB cluster.
Constraints:
-
Can’t be specified if
ManageMasterUserPassword
is turned on. -
Can include any printable ASCII character except “/”, “”“, or “@”. For RDS for Oracle, can’t include the “&” (ampersand) or the “’” (single quotes) character.
Length Constraints:
-
RDS for Db2 - Must contain from 8 to 255 characters.
-
RDS for MariaDB - Must contain from 8 to 41 characters.
-
RDS for Microsoft SQL Server - Must contain from 8 to 128 characters.
-
RDS for MySQL - Must contain from 8 to 41 characters.
-
RDS for Oracle - Must contain from 8 to 30 characters.
-
RDS for PostgreSQL - Must contain from 8 to 128 characters.
-
db_security_groups(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_security_groups(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseA list of DB security groups to associate with this DB instance.
This setting applies to the legacy EC2-Classic platform, which is no longer used to create new DB instances. Use the
VpcSecurityGroupIds
setting instead.vpc_security_group_ids(impl Into<String>)
/set_vpc_security_group_ids(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseA list of Amazon EC2 VPC security groups to associate with this DB instance.
This setting doesn’t apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. The associated list of EC2 VPC security groups is managed by the DB cluster.
Default: The default EC2 VPC security group for the DB subnet group’s VPC.
availability_zone(impl Into<String>)
/set_availability_zone(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Availability Zone (AZ) where the database will be created. For information on Amazon Web Services Regions and Availability Zones, see Regions and Availability Zones.
For Amazon Aurora, each Aurora DB cluster hosts copies of its storage in three separate Availability Zones. Specify one of these Availability Zones. Aurora automatically chooses an appropriate Availability Zone if you don’t specify one.
Default: A random, system-chosen Availability Zone in the endpoint’s Amazon Web Services Region.
Constraints:
-
The
AvailabilityZone
parameter can’t be specified if the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment. -
The specified Availability Zone must be in the same Amazon Web Services Region as the current endpoint.
Example:
us-east-1d
-
db_subnet_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_subnet_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseA DB subnet group to associate with this DB instance.
Constraints:
-
Must match the name of an existing DB subnet group.
Example:
mydbsubnetgroup
-
preferred_maintenance_window(impl Into<String>)
/set_preferred_maintenance_window(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe time range each week during which system maintenance can occur. For more information, see Amazon RDS Maintenance Window in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region, occurring on a random day of the week.
Constraints:
-
Must be in the format
ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi
. -
The day values must be
mon | tue | wed | thu | fri | sat | sun
. -
Must be in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).
-
Must not conflict with the preferred backup window.
-
Must be at least 30 minutes.
-
db_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_parameter_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of the DB parameter group to associate with this DB instance. If you don’t specify a value, then Amazon RDS uses the default DB parameter group for the specified DB engine and version.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
Constraints:
-
Must be 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens.
-
The first character must be a letter.
-
Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.
-
backup_retention_period(i32)
/set_backup_retention_period(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe number of days for which automated backups are retained. Setting this parameter to a positive number enables backups. Setting this parameter to
0
disables automated backups.This setting doesn’t apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. The retention period for automated backups is managed by the DB cluster.
Default:
1
Constraints:
-
Must be a value from 0 to 35.
-
Can’t be set to 0 if the DB instance is a source to read replicas.
-
Can’t be set to 0 for an RDS Custom for Oracle DB instance.
-
preferred_backup_window(impl Into<String>)
/set_preferred_backup_window(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe daily time range during which automated backups are created if automated backups are enabled, using the
BackupRetentionPeriod
parameter. The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region. For more information, see Backup window in the Amazon RDS User Guide.This setting doesn’t apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. The daily time range for creating automated backups is managed by the DB cluster.
Constraints:
-
Must be in the format
hh24:mi-hh24:mi
. -
Must be in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).
-
Must not conflict with the preferred maintenance window.
-
Must be at least 30 minutes.
-
port(i32)
/set_port(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe port number on which the database accepts connections.
This setting doesn’t apply to Aurora DB instances. The port number is managed by the cluster.
Valid Values:
1150-65535
Default:
-
RDS for Db2 -
50000
-
RDS for MariaDB -
3306
-
RDS for Microsoft SQL Server -
1433
-
RDS for MySQL -
3306
-
RDS for Oracle -
1521
-
RDS for PostgreSQL -
5432
Constraints:
-
For RDS for Microsoft SQL Server, the value can’t be
1234
,1434
,3260
,3343
,3389
,47001
, or49152-49156
.
-
multi_az(bool)
/set_multi_az(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment. You can’t set the
AvailabilityZone
parameter if the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment.This setting doesn’t apply to the following DB instances:
-
Amazon Aurora (DB instance Availability Zones (AZs) are managed by the DB cluster.)
-
RDS Custom
-
engine_version(impl Into<String>)
/set_engine_version(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe version number of the database engine to use.
This setting doesn’t apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. The version number of the database engine the DB instance uses is managed by the DB cluster.
For a list of valid engine versions, use the
DescribeDBEngineVersions
operation.The following are the database engines and links to information about the major and minor versions that are available with Amazon RDS. Not every database engine is available for every Amazon Web Services Region.
- Amazon RDS Custom for Oracle
-
A custom engine version (CEV) that you have previously created. This setting is required for RDS Custom for Oracle. The CEV name has the following format: 19.customized_string. A valid CEV name is
19.my_cev1
. For more information, see Creating an RDS Custom for Oracle DB instance in the Amazon RDS User Guide. - Amazon RDS Custom for SQL Server
-
See RDS Custom for SQL Server general requirements in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- RDS for Db2
-
For information, see Db2 on Amazon RDS versions in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- RDS for MariaDB
-
For information, see MariaDB on Amazon RDS versions in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- RDS for Microsoft SQL Server
-
For information, see Microsoft SQL Server versions on Amazon RDS in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- RDS for MySQL
-
For information, see MySQL on Amazon RDS versions in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- RDS for Oracle
-
For information, see Oracle Database Engine release notes in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- RDS for PostgreSQL
-
For information, see Amazon RDS for PostgreSQL versions and extensions in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
auto_minor_version_upgrade(bool)
/set_auto_minor_version_upgrade(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether minor engine upgrades are applied automatically to the DB instance during the maintenance window. By default, minor engine upgrades are applied automatically.
If you create an RDS Custom DB instance, you must set
AutoMinorVersionUpgrade
tofalse
.For more information about automatic minor version upgrades, see Automatically upgrading the minor engine version.
license_model(impl Into<String>)
/set_license_model(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe license model information for this DB instance.
License models for RDS for Db2 require additional configuration. The Bring Your Own License (BYOL) model requires a custom parameter group and an Amazon Web Services License Manager self-managed license. The Db2 license through Amazon Web Services Marketplace model requires an Amazon Web Services Marketplace subscription. For more information, see Amazon RDS for Db2 licensing options in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
The default for RDS for Db2 is
bring-your-own-license
.This setting doesn’t apply to Amazon Aurora or RDS Custom DB instances.
Valid Values:
-
RDS for Db2 -
bring-your-own-license | marketplace-license
-
RDS for MariaDB -
general-public-license
-
RDS for Microsoft SQL Server -
license-included
-
RDS for MySQL -
general-public-license
-
RDS for Oracle -
bring-your-own-license | license-included
-
RDS for PostgreSQL -
postgresql-license
-
iops(i32)
/set_iops(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe amount of Provisioned IOPS (input/output operations per second) to initially allocate for the DB instance. For information about valid IOPS values, see Amazon RDS DB instance storage in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
This setting doesn’t apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. Storage is managed by the DB cluster.
Constraints:
-
For RDS for Db2, MariaDB, MySQL, Oracle, and PostgreSQL - Must be a multiple between .5 and 50 of the storage amount for the DB instance.
-
For RDS for SQL Server - Must be a multiple between 1 and 50 of the storage amount for the DB instance.
-
option_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_option_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe option group to associate the DB instance with.
Permanent options, such as the TDE option for Oracle Advanced Security TDE, can’t be removed from an option group. Also, that option group can’t be removed from a DB instance after it is associated with a DB instance.
This setting doesn’t apply to Amazon Aurora or RDS Custom DB instances.
character_set_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_character_set_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseFor supported engines, the character set (
CharacterSet
) to associate the DB instance with.This setting doesn’t apply to the following DB instances:
-
Amazon Aurora - The character set is managed by the DB cluster. For more information, see
CreateDBCluster
. -
RDS Custom - However, if you need to change the character set, you can change it on the database itself.
-
nchar_character_set_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_nchar_character_set_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of the NCHAR character set for the Oracle DB instance.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
publicly_accessible(bool)
/set_publicly_accessible(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether the DB instance is publicly accessible.
When the DB instance is publicly accessible and you connect from outside of the DB instance’s virtual private cloud (VPC), its Domain Name System (DNS) endpoint resolves to the public IP address. When you connect from within the same VPC as the DB instance, the endpoint resolves to the private IP address. Access to the DB instance is ultimately controlled by the security group it uses. That public access is not permitted if the security group assigned to the DB instance doesn’t permit it.
When the DB instance isn’t publicly accessible, it is an internal DB instance with a DNS name that resolves to a private IP address.
Default: The default behavior varies depending on whether
DBSubnetGroupName
is specified.If
DBSubnetGroupName
isn’t specified, andPubliclyAccessible
isn’t specified, the following applies:-
If the default VPC in the target Region doesn’t have an internet gateway attached to it, the DB instance is private.
-
If the default VPC in the target Region has an internet gateway attached to it, the DB instance is public.
If
DBSubnetGroupName
is specified, andPubliclyAccessible
isn’t specified, the following applies:-
If the subnets are part of a VPC that doesn’t have an internet gateway attached to it, the DB instance is private.
-
If the subnets are part of a VPC that has an internet gateway attached to it, the DB instance is public.
-
tags(Tag)
/set_tags(Option<Vec::<Tag>>)
:
required: falseTags to assign to the DB instance.
db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe identifier of the DB cluster that this DB instance will belong to.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
storage_type(impl Into<String>)
/set_storage_type(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe storage type to associate with the DB instance.
If you specify
io1
,io2
, orgp3
, you must also include a value for theIops
parameter.This setting doesn’t apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. Storage is managed by the DB cluster.
Valid Values:
gp2 | gp3 | io1 | io2 | standard
Default:
io1
, if theIops
parameter is specified. Otherwise,gp3
.tde_credential_arn(impl Into<String>)
/set_tde_credential_arn(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe ARN from the key store with which to associate the instance for TDE encryption.
This setting doesn’t apply to Amazon Aurora or RDS Custom DB instances.
tde_credential_password(impl Into<String>)
/set_tde_credential_password(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe password for the given ARN from the key store in order to access the device.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
storage_encrypted(bool)
/set_storage_encrypted(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifes whether the DB instance is encrypted. By default, it isn’t encrypted.
For RDS Custom DB instances, either enable this setting or leave it unset. Otherwise, Amazon RDS reports an error.
This setting doesn’t apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. The encryption for DB instances is managed by the DB cluster.
kms_key_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_kms_key_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for an encrypted DB instance.
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN.
This setting doesn’t apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is managed by the DB cluster. For more information, see
CreateDBCluster
.If
StorageEncrypted
is enabled, and you do not specify a value for theKmsKeyId
parameter, then Amazon RDS uses your default KMS key. There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.For Amazon RDS Custom, a KMS key is required for DB instances. For most RDS engines, if you leave this parameter empty while enabling
StorageEncrypted
, the engine uses the default KMS key. However, RDS Custom doesn’t use the default key when this parameter is empty. You must explicitly specify a key.domain(impl Into<String>)
/set_domain(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Active Directory directory ID to create the DB instance in. Currently, you can create only Db2, MySQL, Microsoft SQL Server, Oracle, and PostgreSQL DB instances in an Active Directory Domain.
For more information, see Kerberos Authentication in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
This setting doesn’t apply to the following DB instances:
-
Amazon Aurora (The domain is managed by the DB cluster.)
-
RDS Custom
-
domain_fqdn(impl Into<String>)
/set_domain_fqdn(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of an Active Directory domain.
Constraints:
-
Can’t be longer than 64 characters.
Example:
mymanagedADtest.mymanagedAD.mydomain
-
domain_ou(impl Into<String>)
/set_domain_ou(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Active Directory organizational unit for your DB instance to join.
Constraints:
-
Must be in the distinguished name format.
-
Can’t be longer than 64 characters.
Example:
OU=mymanagedADtestOU,DC=mymanagedADtest,DC=mymanagedAD,DC=mydomain
-
domain_auth_secret_arn(impl Into<String>)
/set_domain_auth_secret_arn(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe ARN for the Secrets Manager secret with the credentials for the user joining the domain.
Example:
arn:aws:secretsmanager:region:account-number:secret:myselfmanagedADtestsecret-123456
domain_dns_ips(impl Into<String>)
/set_domain_dns_ips(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseThe IPv4 DNS IP addresses of your primary and secondary Active Directory domain controllers.
Constraints:
-
Two IP addresses must be provided. If there isn’t a secondary domain controller, use the IP address of the primary domain controller for both entries in the list.
Example:
123.124.125.126,234.235.236.237
-
copy_tags_to_snapshot(bool)
/set_copy_tags_to_snapshot(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to copy tags from the DB instance to snapshots of the DB instance. By default, tags are not copied.
This setting doesn’t apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. Copying tags to snapshots is managed by the DB cluster. Setting this value for an Aurora DB instance has no effect on the DB cluster setting.
monitoring_interval(i32)
/set_monitoring_interval(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe interval, in seconds, between points when Enhanced Monitoring metrics are collected for the DB instance. To disable collection of Enhanced Monitoring metrics, specify
0
.If
MonitoringRoleArn
is specified, then you must setMonitoringInterval
to a value other than0
.This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
Valid Values:
0 | 1 | 5 | 10 | 15 | 30 | 60
Default:
0
monitoring_role_arn(impl Into<String>)
/set_monitoring_role_arn(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe ARN for the IAM role that permits RDS to send enhanced monitoring metrics to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. For example,
arn:aws:iam:123456789012:role/emaccess
. For information on creating a monitoring role, see Setting Up and Enabling Enhanced Monitoring in the Amazon RDS User Guide.If
MonitoringInterval
is set to a value other than0
, then you must supply aMonitoringRoleArn
value.This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
domain_iam_role_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_domain_iam_role_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of the IAM role to use when making API calls to the Directory Service.
This setting doesn’t apply to the following DB instances:
-
Amazon Aurora (The domain is managed by the DB cluster.)
-
RDS Custom
-
promotion_tier(i32)
/set_promotion_tier(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe order of priority in which an Aurora Replica is promoted to the primary instance after a failure of the existing primary instance. For more information, see Fault Tolerance for an Aurora DB Cluster in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
Default:
1
Valid Values:
0 - 15
timezone(impl Into<String>)
/set_timezone(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe time zone of the DB instance. The time zone parameter is currently supported only by RDS for Db2 and RDS for SQL Server.
enable_iam_database_authentication(bool)
/set_enable_iam_database_authentication(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to enable mapping of Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts. By default, mapping isn’t enabled.
For more information, see IAM Database Authentication for MySQL and PostgreSQL in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
This setting doesn’t apply to the following DB instances:
-
Amazon Aurora (Mapping Amazon Web Services IAM accounts to database accounts is managed by the DB cluster.)
-
RDS Custom
-
database_insights_mode(DatabaseInsightsMode)
/set_database_insights_mode(Option<DatabaseInsightsMode>)
:
required: falseThe mode of Database Insights to enable for the DB instance.
Aurora DB instances inherit this value from the DB cluster, so you can’t change this value.
enable_performance_insights(bool)
/set_enable_performance_insights(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to enable Performance Insights for the DB instance. For more information, see Using Amazon Performance Insights in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
performance_insights_kms_key_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_performance_insights_kms_key_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for encryption of Performance Insights data.
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key.
If you don’t specify a value for
PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId
, then Amazon RDS uses your default KMS key. There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
performance_insights_retention_period(i32)
/set_performance_insights_retention_period(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe number of days to retain Performance Insights data.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
Valid Values:
-
7
-
month * 31, where month is a number of months from 1-23. Examples:
93
(3 months * 31),341
(11 months * 31),589
(19 months * 31) -
731
Default:
7
daysIf you specify a retention period that isn’t valid, such as
94
, Amazon RDS returns an error.-
enable_cloudwatch_logs_exports(impl Into<String>)
/set_enable_cloudwatch_logs_exports(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseThe list of log types to enable for exporting to CloudWatch Logs. For more information, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
This setting doesn’t apply to the following DB instances:
-
Amazon Aurora (CloudWatch Logs exports are managed by the DB cluster.)
-
RDS Custom
The following values are valid for each DB engine:
-
RDS for Db2 -
diag.log | notify.log | iam-db-auth-error
-
RDS for MariaDB -
audit | error | general | slowquery | iam-db-auth-error
-
RDS for Microsoft SQL Server -
agent | error
-
RDS for MySQL -
audit | error | general | slowquery | iam-db-auth-error
-
RDS for Oracle -
alert | audit | listener | trace | oemagent
-
RDS for PostgreSQL -
postgresql | upgrade | iam-db-auth-error
-
processor_features(ProcessorFeature)
/set_processor_features(Option<Vec::<ProcessorFeature>>)
:
required: falseThe number of CPU cores and the number of threads per core for the DB instance class of the DB instance.
This setting doesn’t apply to Amazon Aurora or RDS Custom DB instances.
deletion_protection(bool)
/set_deletion_protection(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether the DB instance has deletion protection enabled. The database can’t be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection isn’t enabled. For more information, see Deleting a DB Instance.
This setting doesn’t apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. You can enable or disable deletion protection for the DB cluster. For more information, see
CreateDBCluster
. DB instances in a DB cluster can be deleted even when deletion protection is enabled for the DB cluster.max_allocated_storage(i32)
/set_max_allocated_storage(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe upper limit in gibibytes (GiB) to which Amazon RDS can automatically scale the storage of the DB instance.
For more information about this setting, including limitations that apply to it, see Managing capacity automatically with Amazon RDS storage autoscaling in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
This setting doesn’t apply to the following DB instances:
-
Amazon Aurora (Storage is managed by the DB cluster.)
-
RDS Custom
-
enable_customer_owned_ip(bool)
/set_enable_customer_owned_ip(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to enable a customer-owned IP address (CoIP) for an RDS on Outposts DB instance.
A CoIP provides local or external connectivity to resources in your Outpost subnets through your on-premises network. For some use cases, a CoIP can provide lower latency for connections to the DB instance from outside of its virtual private cloud (VPC) on your local network.
For more information about RDS on Outposts, see Working with Amazon RDS on Amazon Web Services Outposts in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
For more information about CoIPs, see Customer-owned IP addresses in the Amazon Web Services Outposts User Guide.
custom_iam_instance_profile(impl Into<String>)
/set_custom_iam_instance_profile(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe instance profile associated with the underlying Amazon EC2 instance of an RDS Custom DB instance.
This setting is required for RDS Custom.
Constraints:
-
The profile must exist in your account.
-
The profile must have an IAM role that Amazon EC2 has permissions to assume.
-
The instance profile name and the associated IAM role name must start with the prefix
AWSRDSCustom
.
For the list of permissions required for the IAM role, see Configure IAM and your VPC in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
-
backup_target(impl Into<String>)
/set_backup_target(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe location for storing automated backups and manual snapshots.
Valid Values:
-
outposts
(Amazon Web Services Outposts) -
region
(Amazon Web Services Region)
Default:
region
For more information, see Working with Amazon RDS on Amazon Web Services Outposts in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
-
network_type(impl Into<String>)
/set_network_type(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe network type of the DB instance.
The network type is determined by the
DBSubnetGroup
specified for the DB instance. ADBSubnetGroup
can support only the IPv4 protocol or the IPv4 and the IPv6 protocols (DUAL
).For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
Valid Values:
IPV4 | DUAL
storage_throughput(i32)
/set_storage_throughput(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe storage throughput value, in mebibyte per second (MiBps), for the DB instance.
This setting applies only to the
gp3
storage type.This setting doesn’t apply to Amazon Aurora or RDS Custom DB instances.
manage_master_user_password(bool)
/set_manage_master_user_password(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to manage the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.
For more information, see Password management with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
Constraints:
-
Can’t manage the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager if
MasterUserPassword
is specified.
-
master_user_secret_kms_key_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_master_user_secret_kms_key_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier to encrypt a secret that is automatically generated and managed in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.
This setting is valid only if the master user password is managed by RDS in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager for the DB instance.
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN.
If you don’t specify
MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId
, then theaws/secretsmanager
KMS key is used to encrypt the secret. If the secret is in a different Amazon Web Services account, then you can’t use theaws/secretsmanager
KMS key to encrypt the secret, and you must use a customer managed KMS key.There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.
ca_certificate_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_ca_certificate_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe CA certificate identifier to use for the DB instance’s server certificate.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
For more information, see Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB instance in the Amazon RDS User Guide and Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB cluster in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
db_system_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_system_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Oracle system identifier (SID), which is the name of the Oracle database instance that manages your database files. In this context, the term “Oracle database instance” refers exclusively to the system global area (SGA) and Oracle background processes. If you don’t specify a SID, the value defaults to
RDSCDB
. The Oracle SID is also the name of your CDB.dedicated_log_volume(bool)
/set_dedicated_log_volume(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseIndicates whether the DB instance has a dedicated log volume (DLV) enabled.
multi_tenant(bool)
/set_multi_tenant(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to use the multi-tenant configuration or the single-tenant configuration (default). This parameter only applies to RDS for Oracle container database (CDB) engines.
Note the following restrictions:
-
The DB engine that you specify in the request must support the multi-tenant configuration. If you attempt to enable the multi-tenant configuration on a DB engine that doesn’t support it, the request fails.
-
If you specify the multi-tenant configuration when you create your DB instance, you can’t later modify this DB instance to use the single-tenant configuration.
-
engine_lifecycle_support(impl Into<String>)
/set_engine_lifecycle_support(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe life cycle type for this DB instance.
By default, this value is set to
open-source-rds-extended-support
, which enrolls your DB instance into Amazon RDS Extended Support. At the end of standard support, you can avoid charges for Extended Support by setting the value toopen-source-rds-extended-support-disabled
. In this case, creating the DB instance will fail if the DB major version is past its end of standard support date.This setting applies only to RDS for MySQL and RDS for PostgreSQL. For Amazon Aurora DB instances, the life cycle type is managed by the DB cluster.
You can use this setting to enroll your DB instance into Amazon RDS Extended Support. With RDS Extended Support, you can run the selected major engine version on your DB instance past the end of standard support for that engine version. For more information, see Using Amazon RDS Extended Support in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
Valid Values:
open-source-rds-extended-support | open-source-rds-extended-support-disabled
Default:
open-source-rds-extended-support
- On success, responds with
CreateDbInstanceOutput
with field(s):db_instance(Option<DbInstance>)
:Contains the details of an Amazon RDS DB instance.
This data type is used as a response element in the operations
CreateDBInstance
,CreateDBInstanceReadReplica
,DeleteDBInstance
,DescribeDBInstances
,ModifyDBInstance
,PromoteReadReplica
,RebootDBInstance
,RestoreDBInstanceFromDBSnapshot
,RestoreDBInstanceFromS3
,RestoreDBInstanceToPointInTime
,StartDBInstance
, andStopDBInstance
.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<CreateDBInstanceError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn create_db_instance_read_replica(
&self,
) -> CreateDBInstanceReadReplicaFluentBuilder
pub fn create_db_instance_read_replica( &self, ) -> CreateDBInstanceReadReplicaFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the CreateDBInstanceReadReplica
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe DB instance identifier of the read replica. This identifier is the unique key that identifies a DB instance. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
source_db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_source_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe identifier of the DB instance that will act as the source for the read replica. Each DB instance can have up to 15 read replicas, with the exception of Oracle and SQL Server, which can have up to five.
Constraints:
-
Must be the identifier of an existing Db2, MariaDB, MySQL, Oracle, PostgreSQL, or SQL Server DB instance.
-
Can’t be specified if the
SourceDBClusterIdentifier
parameter is also specified. -
For the limitations of Oracle read replicas, see Version and licensing considerations for RDS for Oracle replicas in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
-
For the limitations of SQL Server read replicas, see Read replica limitations with SQL Server in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
-
The specified DB instance must have automatic backups enabled, that is, its backup retention period must be greater than 0.
-
If the source DB instance is in the same Amazon Web Services Region as the read replica, specify a valid DB instance identifier.
-
If the source DB instance is in a different Amazon Web Services Region from the read replica, specify a valid DB instance ARN. For more information, see Constructing an ARN for Amazon RDS in the Amazon RDS User Guide. This doesn’t apply to SQL Server or RDS Custom, which don’t support cross-Region replicas.
-
db_instance_class(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_instance_class(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe compute and memory capacity of the read replica, for example db.m4.large. Not all DB instance classes are available in all Amazon Web Services Regions, or for all database engines. For the full list of DB instance classes, and availability for your engine, see DB Instance Class in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
Default: Inherits the value from the source DB instance.
availability_zone(impl Into<String>)
/set_availability_zone(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Availability Zone (AZ) where the read replica will be created.
Default: A random, system-chosen Availability Zone in the endpoint’s Amazon Web Services Region.
Example:
us-east-1d
port(i32)
/set_port(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe port number that the DB instance uses for connections.
Valid Values:
1150-65535
Default: Inherits the value from the source DB instance.
multi_az(bool)
/set_multi_az(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether the read replica is in a Multi-AZ deployment.
You can create a read replica as a Multi-AZ DB instance. RDS creates a standby of your replica in another Availability Zone for failover support for the replica. Creating your read replica as a Multi-AZ DB instance is independent of whether the source is a Multi-AZ DB instance or a Multi-AZ DB cluster.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
auto_minor_version_upgrade(bool)
/set_auto_minor_version_upgrade(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to automatically apply minor engine upgrades to the read replica during the maintenance window.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
Default: Inherits the value from the source DB instance.
For more information about automatic minor version upgrades, see Automatically upgrading the minor engine version.
iops(i32)
/set_iops(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe amount of Provisioned IOPS (input/output operations per second) to initially allocate for the DB instance.
option_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_option_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe option group to associate the DB instance with. If not specified, RDS uses the option group associated with the source DB instance or cluster.
For SQL Server, you must use the option group associated with the source.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
db_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_parameter_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of the DB parameter group to associate with this read replica DB instance.
For Single-AZ or Multi-AZ DB instance read replica instances, if you don’t specify a value for
DBParameterGroupName
, then Amazon RDS uses theDBParameterGroup
of the source DB instance for a same Region read replica, or the defaultDBParameterGroup
for the specified DB engine for a cross-Region read replica.For Multi-AZ DB cluster same Region read replica instances, if you don’t specify a value for
DBParameterGroupName
, then Amazon RDS uses the defaultDBParameterGroup
.Specifying a parameter group for this operation is only supported for MySQL DB instances for cross-Region read replicas, for Multi-AZ DB cluster read replica instances, and for Oracle DB instances. It isn’t supported for MySQL DB instances for same Region read replicas or for RDS Custom.
Constraints:
-
Must be 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens.
-
First character must be a letter.
-
Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.
-
publicly_accessible(bool)
/set_publicly_accessible(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether the DB instance is publicly accessible.
When the DB cluster is publicly accessible, its Domain Name System (DNS) endpoint resolves to the private IP address from within the DB cluster’s virtual private cloud (VPC). It resolves to the public IP address from outside of the DB cluster’s VPC. Access to the DB cluster is ultimately controlled by the security group it uses. That public access isn’t permitted if the security group assigned to the DB cluster doesn’t permit it.
When the DB instance isn’t publicly accessible, it is an internal DB instance with a DNS name that resolves to a private IP address.
For more information, see
CreateDBInstance
.tags(Tag)
/set_tags(Option<Vec::<Tag>>)
:
required: falseA list of tags.
For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide or Tagging Amazon Aurora and Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
db_subnet_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_subnet_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseA DB subnet group for the DB instance. The new DB instance is created in the VPC associated with the DB subnet group. If no DB subnet group is specified, then the new DB instance isn’t created in a VPC.
Constraints:
-
If supplied, must match the name of an existing DB subnet group.
-
The specified DB subnet group must be in the same Amazon Web Services Region in which the operation is running.
-
All read replicas in one Amazon Web Services Region that are created from the same source DB instance must either:
-
Specify DB subnet groups from the same VPC. All these read replicas are created in the same VPC.
-
Not specify a DB subnet group. All these read replicas are created outside of any VPC.
-
Example:
mydbsubnetgroup
-
vpc_security_group_ids(impl Into<String>)
/set_vpc_security_group_ids(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseA list of Amazon EC2 VPC security groups to associate with the read replica.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
Default: The default EC2 VPC security group for the DB subnet group’s VPC.
storage_type(impl Into<String>)
/set_storage_type(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe storage type to associate with the read replica.
If you specify
io1
,io2
, orgp3
, you must also include a value for theIops
parameter.Valid Values:
gp2 | gp3 | io1 | io2 | standard
Default:
io1
if theIops
parameter is specified. Otherwise,gp3
.copy_tags_to_snapshot(bool)
/set_copy_tags_to_snapshot(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to copy all tags from the read replica to snapshots of the read replica. By default, tags aren’t copied.
monitoring_interval(i32)
/set_monitoring_interval(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe interval, in seconds, between points when Enhanced Monitoring metrics are collected for the read replica. To disable collection of Enhanced Monitoring metrics, specify
0
. The default is0
.If
MonitoringRoleArn
is specified, then you must setMonitoringInterval
to a value other than0
.This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
Valid Values:
0, 1, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60
Default:
0
monitoring_role_arn(impl Into<String>)
/set_monitoring_role_arn(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe ARN for the IAM role that permits RDS to send enhanced monitoring metrics to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. For example,
arn:aws:iam:123456789012:role/emaccess
. For information on creating a monitoring role, go to To create an IAM role for Amazon RDS Enhanced Monitoring in the Amazon RDS User Guide.If
MonitoringInterval
is set to a value other than 0, then you must supply aMonitoringRoleArn
value.This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
kms_key_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_kms_key_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for an encrypted read replica.
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key.
If you create an encrypted read replica in the same Amazon Web Services Region as the source DB instance or Multi-AZ DB cluster, don’t specify a value for this parameter. A read replica in the same Amazon Web Services Region is always encrypted with the same KMS key as the source DB instance or cluster.
If you create an encrypted read replica in a different Amazon Web Services Region, then you must specify a KMS key identifier for the destination Amazon Web Services Region. KMS keys are specific to the Amazon Web Services Region that they are created in, and you can’t use KMS keys from one Amazon Web Services Region in another Amazon Web Services Region.
You can’t create an encrypted read replica from an unencrypted DB instance or Multi-AZ DB cluster.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom, which uses the same KMS key as the primary replica.
pre_signed_url(impl Into<String>)
/set_pre_signed_url(Option<String>)
:
required: falseWhen you are creating a read replica from one Amazon Web Services GovCloud (US) Region to another or from one China Amazon Web Services Region to another, the URL that contains a Signature Version 4 signed request for the
CreateDBInstanceReadReplica
API operation in the source Amazon Web Services Region that contains the source DB instance.This setting applies only to Amazon Web Services GovCloud (US) Regions and China Amazon Web Services Regions. It’s ignored in other Amazon Web Services Regions.
This setting applies only when replicating from a source DB instance. Source DB clusters aren’t supported in Amazon Web Services GovCloud (US) Regions and China Amazon Web Services Regions.
You must specify this parameter when you create an encrypted read replica from another Amazon Web Services Region by using the Amazon RDS API. Don’t specify
PreSignedUrl
when you are creating an encrypted read replica in the same Amazon Web Services Region.The presigned URL must be a valid request for the
CreateDBInstanceReadReplica
API operation that can run in the source Amazon Web Services Region that contains the encrypted source DB instance. The presigned URL request must contain the following parameter values:-
DestinationRegion
- The Amazon Web Services Region that the encrypted read replica is created in. This Amazon Web Services Region is the same one where theCreateDBInstanceReadReplica
operation is called that contains this presigned URL.For example, if you create an encrypted DB instance in the us-west-1 Amazon Web Services Region, from a source DB instance in the us-east-2 Amazon Web Services Region, then you call the
CreateDBInstanceReadReplica
operation in the us-east-1 Amazon Web Services Region and provide a presigned URL that contains a call to theCreateDBInstanceReadReplica
operation in the us-west-2 Amazon Web Services Region. For this example, theDestinationRegion
in the presigned URL must be set to the us-east-1 Amazon Web Services Region. -
KmsKeyId
- The KMS key identifier for the key to use to encrypt the read replica in the destination Amazon Web Services Region. This is the same identifier for both theCreateDBInstanceReadReplica
operation that is called in the destination Amazon Web Services Region, and the operation contained in the presigned URL. -
SourceDBInstanceIdentifier
- The DB instance identifier for the encrypted DB instance to be replicated. This identifier must be in the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) format for the source Amazon Web Services Region. For example, if you are creating an encrypted read replica from a DB instance in the us-west-2 Amazon Web Services Region, then yourSourceDBInstanceIdentifier
looks like the following example:arn:aws:rds:us-west-2:123456789012:instance:mysql-instance1-20161115
.
To learn how to generate a Signature Version 4 signed request, see Authenticating Requests: Using Query Parameters (Amazon Web Services Signature Version 4) and Signature Version 4 Signing Process.
If you are using an Amazon Web Services SDK tool or the CLI, you can specify
SourceRegion
(or–source-region
for the CLI) instead of specifyingPreSignedUrl
manually. SpecifyingSourceRegion
autogenerates a presigned URL that is a valid request for the operation that can run in the source Amazon Web Services Region.This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
-
enable_iam_database_authentication(bool)
/set_enable_iam_database_authentication(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to enable mapping of Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts. By default, mapping isn’t enabled.
For more information about IAM database authentication, see IAM Database Authentication for MySQL and PostgreSQL in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
database_insights_mode(DatabaseInsightsMode)
/set_database_insights_mode(Option<DatabaseInsightsMode>)
:
required: falseThe mode of Database Insights to enable for the read replica.
This setting isn’t supported.
enable_performance_insights(bool)
/set_enable_performance_insights(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to enable Performance Insights for the read replica.
For more information, see Using Amazon Performance Insights in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
performance_insights_kms_key_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_performance_insights_kms_key_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for encryption of Performance Insights data.
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key.
If you do not specify a value for
PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId
, then Amazon RDS uses your default KMS key. There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
performance_insights_retention_period(i32)
/set_performance_insights_retention_period(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe number of days to retain Performance Insights data.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
Valid Values:
-
7
-
month * 31, where month is a number of months from 1-23. Examples:
93
(3 months * 31),341
(11 months * 31),589
(19 months * 31) -
731
Default:
7
daysIf you specify a retention period that isn’t valid, such as
94
, Amazon RDS returns an error.-
enable_cloudwatch_logs_exports(impl Into<String>)
/set_enable_cloudwatch_logs_exports(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseThe list of logs that the new DB instance is to export to CloudWatch Logs. The values in the list depend on the DB engine being used. For more information, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
processor_features(ProcessorFeature)
/set_processor_features(Option<Vec::<ProcessorFeature>>)
:
required: falseThe number of CPU cores and the number of threads per core for the DB instance class of the DB instance.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
use_default_processor_features(bool)
/set_use_default_processor_features(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether the DB instance class of the DB instance uses its default processor features.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
deletion_protection(bool)
/set_deletion_protection(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to enable deletion protection for the DB instance. The database can’t be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection isn’t enabled. For more information, see Deleting a DB Instance.
domain(impl Into<String>)
/set_domain(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Active Directory directory ID to create the DB instance in. Currently, only MySQL, Microsoft SQL Server, Oracle, and PostgreSQL DB instances can be created in an Active Directory Domain.
For more information, see Kerberos Authentication in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
domain_iam_role_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_domain_iam_role_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of the IAM role to use when making API calls to the Directory Service.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
domain_fqdn(impl Into<String>)
/set_domain_fqdn(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of an Active Directory domain.
Constraints:
-
Can’t be longer than 64 characters.
Example:
mymanagedADtest.mymanagedAD.mydomain
-
domain_ou(impl Into<String>)
/set_domain_ou(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Active Directory organizational unit for your DB instance to join.
Constraints:
-
Must be in the distinguished name format.
-
Can’t be longer than 64 characters.
Example:
OU=mymanagedADtestOU,DC=mymanagedADtest,DC=mymanagedAD,DC=mydomain
-
domain_auth_secret_arn(impl Into<String>)
/set_domain_auth_secret_arn(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe ARN for the Secrets Manager secret with the credentials for the user joining the domain.
Example:
arn:aws:secretsmanager:region:account-number:secret:myselfmanagedADtestsecret-123456
domain_dns_ips(impl Into<String>)
/set_domain_dns_ips(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseThe IPv4 DNS IP addresses of your primary and secondary Active Directory domain controllers.
Constraints:
-
Two IP addresses must be provided. If there isn’t a secondary domain controller, use the IP address of the primary domain controller for both entries in the list.
Example:
123.124.125.126,234.235.236.237
-
replica_mode(ReplicaMode)
/set_replica_mode(Option<ReplicaMode>)
:
required: falseThe open mode of the replica database: mounted or read-only.
This parameter is only supported for Oracle DB instances.
Mounted DB replicas are included in Oracle Database Enterprise Edition. The main use case for mounted replicas is cross-Region disaster recovery. The primary database doesn’t use Active Data Guard to transmit information to the mounted replica. Because it doesn’t accept user connections, a mounted replica can’t serve a read-only workload.
You can create a combination of mounted and read-only DB replicas for the same primary DB instance. For more information, see Working with Oracle Read Replicas for Amazon RDS in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
For RDS Custom, you must specify this parameter and set it to
mounted
. The value won’t be set by default. After replica creation, you can manage the open mode manually.max_allocated_storage(i32)
/set_max_allocated_storage(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe upper limit in gibibytes (GiB) to which Amazon RDS can automatically scale the storage of the DB instance.
For more information about this setting, including limitations that apply to it, see Managing capacity automatically with Amazon RDS storage autoscaling in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
custom_iam_instance_profile(impl Into<String>)
/set_custom_iam_instance_profile(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe instance profile associated with the underlying Amazon EC2 instance of an RDS Custom DB instance. The instance profile must meet the following requirements:
-
The profile must exist in your account.
-
The profile must have an IAM role that Amazon EC2 has permissions to assume.
-
The instance profile name and the associated IAM role name must start with the prefix
AWSRDSCustom
.
For the list of permissions required for the IAM role, see Configure IAM and your VPC in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
This setting is required for RDS Custom DB instances.
-
network_type(impl Into<String>)
/set_network_type(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe network type of the DB instance.
Valid Values:
-
IPV4
-
DUAL
The network type is determined by the
DBSubnetGroup
specified for read replica. ADBSubnetGroup
can support only the IPv4 protocol or the IPv4 and the IPv6 protocols (DUAL
).For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
-
storage_throughput(i32)
/set_storage_throughput(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseSpecifies the storage throughput value for the read replica.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom or Amazon Aurora DB instances.
enable_customer_owned_ip(bool)
/set_enable_customer_owned_ip(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to enable a customer-owned IP address (CoIP) for an RDS on Outposts read replica.
A CoIP provides local or external connectivity to resources in your Outpost subnets through your on-premises network. For some use cases, a CoIP can provide lower latency for connections to the read replica from outside of its virtual private cloud (VPC) on your local network.
For more information about RDS on Outposts, see Working with Amazon RDS on Amazon Web Services Outposts in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
For more information about CoIPs, see Customer-owned IP addresses in the Amazon Web Services Outposts User Guide.
allocated_storage(i32)
/set_allocated_storage(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe amount of storage (in gibibytes) to allocate initially for the read replica. Follow the allocation rules specified in
CreateDBInstance
.This setting isn’t valid for RDS for SQL Server.
Be sure to allocate enough storage for your read replica so that the create operation can succeed. You can also allocate additional storage for future growth.
source_db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_source_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe identifier of the Multi-AZ DB cluster that will act as the source for the read replica. Each DB cluster can have up to 15 read replicas.
Constraints:
-
Must be the identifier of an existing Multi-AZ DB cluster.
-
Can’t be specified if the
SourceDBInstanceIdentifier
parameter is also specified. -
The specified DB cluster must have automatic backups enabled, that is, its backup retention period must be greater than 0.
-
The source DB cluster must be in the same Amazon Web Services Region as the read replica. Cross-Region replication isn’t supported.
-
dedicated_log_volume(bool)
/set_dedicated_log_volume(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseIndicates whether the DB instance has a dedicated log volume (DLV) enabled.
upgrade_storage_config(bool)
/set_upgrade_storage_config(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseWhether to upgrade the storage file system configuration on the read replica. This option migrates the read replica from the old storage file system layout to the preferred layout.
ca_certificate_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_ca_certificate_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe CA certificate identifier to use for the read replica’s server certificate.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
For more information, see Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB instance in the Amazon RDS User Guide and Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB cluster in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
- On success, responds with
CreateDbInstanceReadReplicaOutput
with field(s):db_instance(Option<DbInstance>)
:Contains the details of an Amazon RDS DB instance.
This data type is used as a response element in the operations
CreateDBInstance
,CreateDBInstanceReadReplica
,DeleteDBInstance
,DescribeDBInstances
,ModifyDBInstance
,PromoteReadReplica
,RebootDBInstance
,RestoreDBInstanceFromDBSnapshot
,RestoreDBInstanceFromS3
,RestoreDBInstanceToPointInTime
,StartDBInstance
, andStopDBInstance
.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<CreateDBInstanceReadReplicaError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn create_db_parameter_group(&self) -> CreateDBParameterGroupFluentBuilder
pub fn create_db_parameter_group(&self) -> CreateDBParameterGroupFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the CreateDBParameterGroup
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_parameter_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the DB parameter group.
Constraints:
-
Must be 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens.
-
First character must be a letter
-
Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens
This value is stored as a lowercase string.
-
db_parameter_group_family(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_parameter_group_family(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe DB parameter group family name. A DB parameter group can be associated with one and only one DB parameter group family, and can be applied only to a DB instance running a database engine and engine version compatible with that DB parameter group family.
To list all of the available parameter group families for a DB engine, use the following command:
aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –query “DBEngineVersions[].DBParameterGroupFamily” –engine
For example, to list all of the available parameter group families for the MySQL DB engine, use the following command:
aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –query “DBEngineVersions[].DBParameterGroupFamily” –engine mysql
The output contains duplicates.
The following are the valid DB engine values:
-
aurora-mysql
-
aurora-postgresql
-
db2-ae
-
db2-se
-
mysql
-
oracle-ee
-
oracle-ee-cdb
-
oracle-se2
-
oracle-se2-cdb
-
postgres
-
sqlserver-ee
-
sqlserver-se
-
sqlserver-ex
-
sqlserver-web
-
description(impl Into<String>)
/set_description(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe description for the DB parameter group.
tags(Tag)
/set_tags(Option<Vec::<Tag>>)
:
required: falseTags to assign to the DB parameter group.
- On success, responds with
CreateDbParameterGroupOutput
with field(s):db_parameter_group(Option<DbParameterGroup>)
:Contains the details of an Amazon RDS DB parameter group.
This data type is used as a response element in the
DescribeDBParameterGroups
action.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<CreateDBParameterGroupError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn create_db_proxy(&self) -> CreateDBProxyFluentBuilder
pub fn create_db_proxy(&self) -> CreateDBProxyFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the CreateDBProxy
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_proxy_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_proxy_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe identifier for the proxy. This name must be unique for all proxies owned by your Amazon Web Services account in the specified Amazon Web Services Region. An identifier must begin with a letter and must contain only ASCII letters, digits, and hyphens; it can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.
engine_family(EngineFamily)
/set_engine_family(Option<EngineFamily>)
:
required: trueThe kinds of databases that the proxy can connect to. This value determines which database network protocol the proxy recognizes when it interprets network traffic to and from the database. For Aurora MySQL, RDS for MariaDB, and RDS for MySQL databases, specify
MYSQL
. For Aurora PostgreSQL and RDS for PostgreSQL databases, specifyPOSTGRESQL
. For RDS for Microsoft SQL Server, specifySQLSERVER
.auth(UserAuthConfig)
/set_auth(Option<Vec::<UserAuthConfig>>)
:
required: trueThe authorization mechanism that the proxy uses.
role_arn(impl Into<String>)
/set_role_arn(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role that the proxy uses to access secrets in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.
vpc_subnet_ids(impl Into<String>)
/set_vpc_subnet_ids(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: trueOne or more VPC subnet IDs to associate with the new proxy.
vpc_security_group_ids(impl Into<String>)
/set_vpc_security_group_ids(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseOne or more VPC security group IDs to associate with the new proxy.
require_tls(bool)
/set_require_tls(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether Transport Layer Security (TLS) encryption is required for connections to the proxy. By enabling this setting, you can enforce encrypted TLS connections to the proxy.
idle_client_timeout(i32)
/set_idle_client_timeout(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe number of seconds that a connection to the proxy can be inactive before the proxy disconnects it. You can set this value higher or lower than the connection timeout limit for the associated database.
debug_logging(bool)
/set_debug_logging(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether the proxy includes detailed information about SQL statements in its logs. This information helps you to debug issues involving SQL behavior or the performance and scalability of the proxy connections. The debug information includes the text of SQL statements that you submit through the proxy. Thus, only enable this setting when needed for debugging, and only when you have security measures in place to safeguard any sensitive information that appears in the logs.
tags(Tag)
/set_tags(Option<Vec::<Tag>>)
:
required: falseAn optional set of key-value pairs to associate arbitrary data of your choosing with the proxy.
- On success, responds with
CreateDbProxyOutput
with field(s):db_proxy(Option<DbProxy>)
:The
DBProxy
structure corresponding to the new proxy.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<CreateDBProxyError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn create_db_proxy_endpoint(&self) -> CreateDBProxyEndpointFluentBuilder
pub fn create_db_proxy_endpoint(&self) -> CreateDBProxyEndpointFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the CreateDBProxyEndpoint
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_proxy_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_proxy_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the DB proxy associated with the DB proxy endpoint that you create.
db_proxy_endpoint_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_proxy_endpoint_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the DB proxy endpoint to create.
vpc_subnet_ids(impl Into<String>)
/set_vpc_subnet_ids(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: trueThe VPC subnet IDs for the DB proxy endpoint that you create. You can specify a different set of subnet IDs than for the original DB proxy.
vpc_security_group_ids(impl Into<String>)
/set_vpc_security_group_ids(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseThe VPC security group IDs for the DB proxy endpoint that you create. You can specify a different set of security group IDs than for the original DB proxy. The default is the default security group for the VPC.
target_role(DbProxyEndpointTargetRole)
/set_target_role(Option<DbProxyEndpointTargetRole>)
:
required: falseThe role of the DB proxy endpoint. The role determines whether the endpoint can be used for read/write or only read operations. The default is
READ_WRITE
. The only role that proxies for RDS for Microsoft SQL Server support isREAD_WRITE
.tags(Tag)
/set_tags(Option<Vec::<Tag>>)
:
required: falseA list of tags.
For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide or Tagging Amazon Aurora and Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
- On success, responds with
CreateDbProxyEndpointOutput
with field(s):db_proxy_endpoint(Option<DbProxyEndpoint>)
:The
DBProxyEndpoint
object that is created by the API operation. The DB proxy endpoint that you create might provide capabilities such as read/write or read-only operations, or using a different VPC than the proxy’s default VPC.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<CreateDBProxyEndpointError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn create_db_security_group(&self) -> CreateDBSecurityGroupFluentBuilder
pub fn create_db_security_group(&self) -> CreateDBSecurityGroupFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the CreateDBSecurityGroup
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_security_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_security_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name for the DB security group. This value is stored as a lowercase string.
Constraints:
-
Must be 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens.
-
First character must be a letter
-
Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens
-
Must not be “Default”
Example:
mysecuritygroup
-
db_security_group_description(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_security_group_description(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe description for the DB security group.
tags(Tag)
/set_tags(Option<Vec::<Tag>>)
:
required: falseTags to assign to the DB security group.
- On success, responds with
CreateDbSecurityGroupOutput
with field(s):db_security_group(Option<DbSecurityGroup>)
:Contains the details for an Amazon RDS DB security group.
This data type is used as a response element in the
DescribeDBSecurityGroups
action.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<CreateDBSecurityGroupError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn create_db_shard_group(&self) -> CreateDBShardGroupFluentBuilder
pub fn create_db_shard_group(&self) -> CreateDBShardGroupFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the CreateDBShardGroup
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_shard_group_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_shard_group_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the DB shard group.
db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the primary DB cluster for the DB shard group.
compute_redundancy(i32)
/set_compute_redundancy(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to create standby DB shard groups for the DB shard group. Valid values are the following:
-
0 - Creates a DB shard group without a standby DB shard group. This is the default value.
-
1 - Creates a DB shard group with a standby DB shard group in a different Availability Zone (AZ).
-
2 - Creates a DB shard group with two standby DB shard groups in two different AZs.
-
max_acu(f64)
/set_max_acu(Option<f64>)
:
required: trueThe maximum capacity of the DB shard group in Aurora capacity units (ACUs).
min_acu(f64)
/set_min_acu(Option<f64>)
:
required: falseThe minimum capacity of the DB shard group in Aurora capacity units (ACUs).
publicly_accessible(bool)
/set_publicly_accessible(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether the DB shard group is publicly accessible.
When the DB shard group is publicly accessible, its Domain Name System (DNS) endpoint resolves to the private IP address from within the DB shard group’s virtual private cloud (VPC). It resolves to the public IP address from outside of the DB shard group’s VPC. Access to the DB shard group is ultimately controlled by the security group it uses. That public access is not permitted if the security group assigned to the DB shard group doesn’t permit it.
When the DB shard group isn’t publicly accessible, it is an internal DB shard group with a DNS name that resolves to a private IP address.
Default: The default behavior varies depending on whether
DBSubnetGroupName
is specified.If
DBSubnetGroupName
isn’t specified, andPubliclyAccessible
isn’t specified, the following applies:-
If the default VPC in the target Region doesn’t have an internet gateway attached to it, the DB shard group is private.
-
If the default VPC in the target Region has an internet gateway attached to it, the DB shard group is public.
If
DBSubnetGroupName
is specified, andPubliclyAccessible
isn’t specified, the following applies:-
If the subnets are part of a VPC that doesn’t have an internet gateway attached to it, the DB shard group is private.
-
If the subnets are part of a VPC that has an internet gateway attached to it, the DB shard group is public.
-
tags(Tag)
/set_tags(Option<Vec::<Tag>>)
:
required: falseA list of tags.
For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide or Tagging Amazon Aurora and Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
- On success, responds with
CreateDbShardGroupOutput
with field(s):db_shard_group_resource_id(Option<String>)
:The Amazon Web Services Region-unique, immutable identifier for the DB shard group.
db_shard_group_identifier(Option<String>)
:The name of the DB shard group.
db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:The name of the primary DB cluster for the DB shard group.
max_acu(Option<f64>)
:The maximum capacity of the DB shard group in Aurora capacity units (ACUs).
min_acu(Option<f64>)
:The minimum capacity of the DB shard group in Aurora capacity units (ACUs).
compute_redundancy(Option<i32>)
:Specifies whether to create standby DB shard groups for the DB shard group. Valid values are the following:
-
0 - Creates a DB shard group without a standby DB shard group. This is the default value.
-
1 - Creates a DB shard group with a standby DB shard group in a different Availability Zone (AZ).
-
2 - Creates a DB shard group with two standby DB shard groups in two different AZs.
-
status(Option<String>)
:The status of the DB shard group.
publicly_accessible(Option<bool>)
:Indicates whether the DB shard group is publicly accessible.
When the DB shard group is publicly accessible, its Domain Name System (DNS) endpoint resolves to the private IP address from within the DB shard group’s virtual private cloud (VPC). It resolves to the public IP address from outside of the DB shard group’s VPC. Access to the DB shard group is ultimately controlled by the security group it uses. That public access isn’t permitted if the security group assigned to the DB shard group doesn’t permit it.
When the DB shard group isn’t publicly accessible, it is an internal DB shard group with a DNS name that resolves to a private IP address.
For more information, see
CreateDBShardGroup
.This setting is only for Aurora Limitless Database.
endpoint(Option<String>)
:The connection endpoint for the DB shard group.
db_shard_group_arn(Option<String>)
:The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the DB shard group.
tag_list(Option<Vec::<Tag>>)
:A list of tags.
For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide or Tagging Amazon Aurora and Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<CreateDBShardGroupError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn create_db_snapshot(&self) -> CreateDBSnapshotFluentBuilder
pub fn create_db_snapshot(&self) -> CreateDBSnapshotFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the CreateDBSnapshot
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_snapshot_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_snapshot_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe identifier for the DB snapshot.
Constraints:
-
Can’t be null, empty, or blank
-
Must contain from 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens
-
First character must be a letter
-
Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens
Example:
my-snapshot-id
-
db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe identifier of the DB instance that you want to create the snapshot of.
Constraints:
-
Must match the identifier of an existing DBInstance.
-
tags(Tag)
/set_tags(Option<Vec::<Tag>>)
:
required: falseA list of tags.
For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide or Tagging Amazon Aurora and Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
- On success, responds with
CreateDbSnapshotOutput
with field(s):db_snapshot(Option<DbSnapshot>)
:Contains the details of an Amazon RDS DB snapshot.
This data type is used as a response element in the
DescribeDBSnapshots
action.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<CreateDBSnapshotError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn create_db_subnet_group(&self) -> CreateDBSubnetGroupFluentBuilder
pub fn create_db_subnet_group(&self) -> CreateDBSubnetGroupFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the CreateDBSubnetGroup
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_subnet_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_subnet_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name for the DB subnet group. This value is stored as a lowercase string.
Constraints:
-
Must contain no more than 255 letters, numbers, periods, underscores, spaces, or hyphens.
-
Must not be default.
-
First character must be a letter.
Example:
mydbsubnetgroup
-
db_subnet_group_description(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_subnet_group_description(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe description for the DB subnet group.
subnet_ids(impl Into<String>)
/set_subnet_ids(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: trueThe EC2 Subnet IDs for the DB subnet group.
tags(Tag)
/set_tags(Option<Vec::<Tag>>)
:
required: falseTags to assign to the DB subnet group.
- On success, responds with
CreateDbSubnetGroupOutput
with field(s):db_subnet_group(Option<DbSubnetGroup>)
:Contains the details of an Amazon RDS DB subnet group.
This data type is used as a response element in the
DescribeDBSubnetGroups
action.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<CreateDBSubnetGroupError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn create_event_subscription(&self) -> CreateEventSubscriptionFluentBuilder
pub fn create_event_subscription(&self) -> CreateEventSubscriptionFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the CreateEventSubscription
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
subscription_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_subscription_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the subscription.
Constraints: The name must be less than 255 characters.
sns_topic_arn(impl Into<String>)
/set_sns_topic_arn(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the SNS topic created for event notification. SNS automatically creates the ARN when you create a topic and subscribe to it.
RDS doesn’t support FIFO (first in, first out) topics. For more information, see Message ordering and deduplication (FIFO topics) in the Amazon Simple Notification Service Developer Guide.
source_type(impl Into<String>)
/set_source_type(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe type of source that is generating the events. For example, if you want to be notified of events generated by a DB instance, you set this parameter to
db-instance
. For RDS Proxy events, specifydb-proxy
. If this value isn’t specified, all events are returned.Valid Values:
db-instance | db-cluster | db-parameter-group | db-security-group | db-snapshot | db-cluster-snapshot | db-proxy | zero-etl | custom-engine-version | blue-green-deployment
event_categories(impl Into<String>)
/set_event_categories(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseA list of event categories for a particular source type (
SourceType
) that you want to subscribe to. You can see a list of the categories for a given source type in the “Amazon RDS event categories and event messages” section of the Amazon RDS User Guide or the Amazon Aurora User Guide . You can also see this list by using theDescribeEventCategories
operation.source_ids(impl Into<String>)
/set_source_ids(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseThe list of identifiers of the event sources for which events are returned. If not specified, then all sources are included in the response. An identifier must begin with a letter and must contain only ASCII letters, digits, and hyphens. It can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.
Constraints:
-
If
SourceIds
are supplied,SourceType
must also be provided. -
If the source type is a DB instance, a
DBInstanceIdentifier
value must be supplied. -
If the source type is a DB cluster, a
DBClusterIdentifier
value must be supplied. -
If the source type is a DB parameter group, a
DBParameterGroupName
value must be supplied. -
If the source type is a DB security group, a
DBSecurityGroupName
value must be supplied. -
If the source type is a DB snapshot, a
DBSnapshotIdentifier
value must be supplied. -
If the source type is a DB cluster snapshot, a
DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier
value must be supplied. -
If the source type is an RDS Proxy, a
DBProxyName
value must be supplied.
-
enabled(bool)
/set_enabled(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to activate the subscription. If the event notification subscription isn’t activated, the subscription is created but not active.
tags(Tag)
/set_tags(Option<Vec::<Tag>>)
:
required: falseA list of tags.
For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide or Tagging Amazon Aurora and Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
- On success, responds with
CreateEventSubscriptionOutput
with field(s):event_subscription(Option<EventSubscription>)
:Contains the results of a successful invocation of the
DescribeEventSubscriptions
action.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<CreateEventSubscriptionError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn create_global_cluster(&self) -> CreateGlobalClusterFluentBuilder
pub fn create_global_cluster(&self) -> CreateGlobalClusterFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the CreateGlobalCluster
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
global_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_global_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe cluster identifier for this global database cluster. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
source_db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_source_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Resource Name (ARN) to use as the primary cluster of the global database.
If you provide a value for this parameter, don’t specify values for the following settings because Amazon Aurora uses the values from the specified source DB cluster:
-
DatabaseName
-
Engine
-
EngineVersion
-
StorageEncrypted
-
engine(impl Into<String>)
/set_engine(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe database engine to use for this global database cluster.
Valid Values:
aurora-mysql | aurora-postgresql
Constraints:
-
Can’t be specified if
SourceDBClusterIdentifier
is specified. In this case, Amazon Aurora uses the engine of the source DB cluster.
-
engine_version(impl Into<String>)
/set_engine_version(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe engine version to use for this global database cluster.
Constraints:
-
Can’t be specified if
SourceDBClusterIdentifier
is specified. In this case, Amazon Aurora uses the engine version of the source DB cluster.
-
engine_lifecycle_support(impl Into<String>)
/set_engine_lifecycle_support(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe life cycle type for this global database cluster.
By default, this value is set to
open-source-rds-extended-support
, which enrolls your global cluster into Amazon RDS Extended Support. At the end of standard support, you can avoid charges for Extended Support by setting the value toopen-source-rds-extended-support-disabled
. In this case, creating the global cluster will fail if the DB major version is past its end of standard support date.This setting only applies to Aurora PostgreSQL-based global databases.
You can use this setting to enroll your global cluster into Amazon RDS Extended Support. With RDS Extended Support, you can run the selected major engine version on your global cluster past the end of standard support for that engine version. For more information, see Using Amazon RDS Extended Support in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
Valid Values:
open-source-rds-extended-support | open-source-rds-extended-support-disabled
Default:
open-source-rds-extended-support
deletion_protection(bool)
/set_deletion_protection(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to enable deletion protection for the new global database cluster. The global database can’t be deleted when deletion protection is enabled.
database_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_database_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name for your database of up to 64 alphanumeric characters. If you don’t specify a name, Amazon Aurora doesn’t create a database in the global database cluster.
Constraints:
-
Can’t be specified if
SourceDBClusterIdentifier
is specified. In this case, Amazon Aurora uses the database name from the source DB cluster.
-
storage_encrypted(bool)
/set_storage_encrypted(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to enable storage encryption for the new global database cluster.
Constraints:
-
Can’t be specified if
SourceDBClusterIdentifier
is specified. In this case, Amazon Aurora uses the setting from the source DB cluster.
-
tags(Tag)
/set_tags(Option<Vec::<Tag>>)
:
required: falseTags to assign to the global cluster.
- On success, responds with
CreateGlobalClusterOutput
with field(s):global_cluster(Option<GlobalCluster>)
:A data type representing an Aurora global database.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<CreateGlobalClusterError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn create_integration(&self) -> CreateIntegrationFluentBuilder
pub fn create_integration(&self) -> CreateIntegrationFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the CreateIntegration
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
source_arn(impl Into<String>)
/set_source_arn(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the database to use as the source for replication.
target_arn(impl Into<String>)
/set_target_arn(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe ARN of the Redshift data warehouse to use as the target for replication.
integration_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_integration_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the integration.
kms_key_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_kms_key_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Web Services Key Management System (Amazon Web Services KMS) key identifier for the key to use to encrypt the integration. If you don’t specify an encryption key, RDS uses a default Amazon Web Services owned key.
additional_encryption_context(impl Into<String>, impl Into<String>)
/set_additional_encryption_context(Option<HashMap::<String, String>>)
:
required: falseAn optional set of non-secret key–value pairs that contains additional contextual information about the data. For more information, see Encryption context in the Amazon Web Services Key Management Service Developer Guide.
You can only include this parameter if you specify the
KMSKeyId
parameter.tags(Tag)
/set_tags(Option<Vec::<Tag>>)
:
required: falseA list of tags.
For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide or Tagging Amazon Aurora and Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
data_filter(impl Into<String>)
/set_data_filter(Option<String>)
:
required: falseData filtering options for the integration. For more information, see Data filtering for Aurora zero-ETL integrations with Amazon Redshift or Data filtering for Amazon RDS zero-ETL integrations with Amazon Redshift.
description(impl Into<String>)
/set_description(Option<String>)
:
required: falseA description of the integration.
- On success, responds with
CreateIntegrationOutput
with field(s):source_arn(Option<String>)
:The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the database used as the source for replication.
target_arn(Option<String>)
:The ARN of the Redshift data warehouse used as the target for replication.
integration_name(Option<String>)
:The name of the integration.
integration_arn(Option<String>)
:The ARN of the integration.
kms_key_id(Option<String>)
:The Amazon Web Services Key Management System (Amazon Web Services KMS) key identifier for the key used to to encrypt the integration.
additional_encryption_context(Option<HashMap::<String, String>>)
:The encryption context for the integration. For more information, see Encryption context in the Amazon Web Services Key Management Service Developer Guide.
status(Option<IntegrationStatus>)
:The current status of the integration.
tags(Option<Vec::<Tag>>)
:A list of tags.
For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide or Tagging Amazon Aurora and Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
create_time(Option<DateTime>)
:The time when the integration was created, in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).
errors(Option<Vec::<IntegrationError>>)
:Any errors associated with the integration.
data_filter(Option<String>)
:Data filters for the integration. These filters determine which tables from the source database are sent to the target Amazon Redshift data warehouse.
description(Option<String>)
:A description of the integration.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<CreateIntegrationError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn create_option_group(&self) -> CreateOptionGroupFluentBuilder
pub fn create_option_group(&self) -> CreateOptionGroupFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the CreateOptionGroup
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
option_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_option_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueSpecifies the name of the option group to be created.
Constraints:
-
Must be 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens
-
First character must be a letter
-
Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens
Example:
myoptiongroup
-
engine_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_engine_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the engine to associate this option group with.
Valid Values:
-
db2-ae
-
db2-se
-
mariadb
-
mysql
-
oracle-ee
-
oracle-ee-cdb
-
oracle-se2
-
oracle-se2-cdb
-
postgres
-
sqlserver-ee
-
sqlserver-se
-
sqlserver-ex
-
sqlserver-web
-
major_engine_version(impl Into<String>)
/set_major_engine_version(Option<String>)
:
required: trueSpecifies the major version of the engine that this option group should be associated with.
option_group_description(impl Into<String>)
/set_option_group_description(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe description of the option group.
tags(Tag)
/set_tags(Option<Vec::<Tag>>)
:
required: falseTags to assign to the option group.
- On success, responds with
CreateOptionGroupOutput
with field(s): - On failure, responds with
SdkError<CreateOptionGroupError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn create_tenant_database(&self) -> CreateTenantDatabaseFluentBuilder
pub fn create_tenant_database(&self) -> CreateTenantDatabaseFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the CreateTenantDatabase
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe user-supplied DB instance identifier. RDS creates your tenant database in this DB instance. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
tenant_db_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_tenant_db_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe user-supplied name of the tenant database that you want to create in your DB instance. This parameter has the same constraints as
DBName
inCreateDBInstance
.master_username(impl Into<String>)
/set_master_username(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name for the master user account in your tenant database. RDS creates this user account in the tenant database and grants privileges to the master user. This parameter is case-sensitive.
Constraints:
-
Must be 1 to 16 letters, numbers, or underscores.
-
First character must be a letter.
-
Can’t be a reserved word for the chosen database engine.
-
master_user_password(impl Into<String>)
/set_master_user_password(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe password for the master user in your tenant database.
Constraints:
-
Must be 8 to 30 characters.
-
Can include any printable ASCII character except forward slash (
/
), double quote (“
), at symbol (@
), ampersand (&
), or single quote (’
). -
Can’t be specified when
ManageMasterUserPassword
is enabled.
-
character_set_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_character_set_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe character set for your tenant database. If you don’t specify a value, the character set name defaults to
AL32UTF8
.nchar_character_set_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_nchar_character_set_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe
NCHAR
value for the tenant database.manage_master_user_password(bool)
/set_manage_master_user_password(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to manage the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.
For more information, see Password management with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
Constraints:
-
Can’t manage the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager if
MasterUserPassword
is specified.
-
master_user_secret_kms_key_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_master_user_secret_kms_key_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier to encrypt a secret that is automatically generated and managed in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.
This setting is valid only if the master user password is managed by RDS in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager for the DB instance.
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN.
If you don’t specify
MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId
, then theaws/secretsmanager
KMS key is used to encrypt the secret. If the secret is in a different Amazon Web Services account, then you can’t use theaws/secretsmanager
KMS key to encrypt the secret, and you must use a customer managed KMS key.There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.
tags(Tag)
/set_tags(Option<Vec::<Tag>>)
:
required: falseA list of tags.
For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide or Tagging Amazon Aurora and Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
- On success, responds with
CreateTenantDatabaseOutput
with field(s):tenant_database(Option<TenantDatabase>)
:A tenant database in the DB instance. This data type is an element in the response to the
DescribeTenantDatabases
action.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<CreateTenantDatabaseError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn delete_blue_green_deployment(
&self,
) -> DeleteBlueGreenDeploymentFluentBuilder
pub fn delete_blue_green_deployment( &self, ) -> DeleteBlueGreenDeploymentFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DeleteBlueGreenDeployment
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
blue_green_deployment_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_blue_green_deployment_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe unique identifier of the blue/green deployment to delete. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
Constraints:
-
Must match an existing blue/green deployment identifier.
-
delete_target(bool)
/set_delete_target(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to delete the resources in the green environment. You can’t specify this option if the blue/green deployment status is
SWITCHOVER_COMPLETED
.
- On success, responds with
DeleteBlueGreenDeploymentOutput
with field(s):blue_green_deployment(Option<BlueGreenDeployment>)
:Details about a blue/green deployment.
For more information, see Using Amazon RDS Blue/Green Deployments for database updates in the Amazon RDS User Guide and Using Amazon RDS Blue/Green Deployments for database updates in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DeleteBlueGreenDeploymentError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn delete_custom_db_engine_version(
&self,
) -> DeleteCustomDBEngineVersionFluentBuilder
pub fn delete_custom_db_engine_version( &self, ) -> DeleteCustomDBEngineVersionFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DeleteCustomDBEngineVersion
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
engine(impl Into<String>)
/set_engine(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe database engine. RDS Custom for Oracle supports the following values:
-
custom-oracle-ee
-
custom-oracle-ee-cdb
-
custom-oracle-se2
-
custom-oracle-se2-cdb
-
engine_version(impl Into<String>)
/set_engine_version(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe custom engine version (CEV) for your DB instance. This option is required for RDS Custom, but optional for Amazon RDS. The combination of
Engine
andEngineVersion
is unique per customer per Amazon Web Services Region.
- On success, responds with
DeleteCustomDbEngineVersionOutput
with field(s):engine(Option<String>)
:The name of the database engine.
engine_version(Option<String>)
:The version number of the database engine.
db_parameter_group_family(Option<String>)
:The name of the DB parameter group family for the database engine.
db_engine_description(Option<String>)
:The description of the database engine.
db_engine_version_description(Option<String>)
:The description of the database engine version.
default_character_set(Option<CharacterSet>)
:The default character set for new instances of this engine version, if the
CharacterSetName
parameter of the CreateDBInstance API isn’t specified.image(Option<CustomDbEngineVersionAmi>)
:The EC2 image
db_engine_media_type(Option<String>)
:A value that indicates the source media provider of the AMI based on the usage operation. Applicable for RDS Custom for SQL Server.
supported_character_sets(Option<Vec::<CharacterSet>>)
:A list of the character sets supported by this engine for the
CharacterSetName
parameter of theCreateDBInstance
operation.supported_nchar_character_sets(Option<Vec::<CharacterSet>>)
:A list of the character sets supported by the Oracle DB engine for the
NcharCharacterSetName
parameter of theCreateDBInstance
operation.valid_upgrade_target(Option<Vec::<UpgradeTarget>>)
:A list of engine versions that this database engine version can be upgraded to.
supported_timezones(Option<Vec::<Timezone>>)
:A list of the time zones supported by this engine for the
Timezone
parameter of theCreateDBInstance
action.exportable_log_types(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:The types of logs that the database engine has available for export to CloudWatch Logs.
supports_log_exports_to_cloudwatch_logs(Option<bool>)
:Indicates whether the engine version supports exporting the log types specified by ExportableLogTypes to CloudWatch Logs.
supports_read_replica(Option<bool>)
:Indicates whether the database engine version supports read replicas.
supported_engine_modes(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:A list of the supported DB engine modes.
supported_feature_names(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:A list of features supported by the DB engine.
The supported features vary by DB engine and DB engine version.
To determine the supported features for a specific DB engine and DB engine version using the CLI, use the following command:
aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine <engine_name> –engine-version <engine_version></engine_version> </engine_name>
For example, to determine the supported features for RDS for PostgreSQL version 13.3 using the CLI, use the following command:
aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine postgres –engine-version 13.3
The supported features are listed under
SupportedFeatureNames
in the output.status(Option<String>)
:The status of the DB engine version, either
available
ordeprecated
.supports_parallel_query(Option<bool>)
:Indicates whether you can use Aurora parallel query with a specific DB engine version.
supports_global_databases(Option<bool>)
:Indicates whether you can use Aurora global databases with a specific DB engine version.
major_engine_version(Option<String>)
:The major engine version of the CEV.
database_installation_files_s3_bucket_name(Option<String>)
:The name of the Amazon S3 bucket that contains your database installation files.
database_installation_files_s3_prefix(Option<String>)
:The Amazon S3 directory that contains the database installation files. If not specified, then no prefix is assumed.
db_engine_version_arn(Option<String>)
:The ARN of the custom engine version.
kms_key_id(Option<String>)
:The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for an encrypted CEV. This parameter is required for RDS Custom, but optional for Amazon RDS.
create_time(Option<DateTime>)
:The creation time of the DB engine version.
tag_list(Option<Vec::<Tag>>)
:A list of tags.
For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide or Tagging Amazon Aurora and Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
supports_babelfish(Option<bool>)
:Indicates whether the engine version supports Babelfish for Aurora PostgreSQL.
custom_db_engine_version_manifest(Option<String>)
:JSON string that lists the installation files and parameters that RDS Custom uses to create a custom engine version (CEV). RDS Custom applies the patches in the order in which they’re listed in the manifest. You can set the Oracle home, Oracle base, and UNIX/Linux user and group using the installation parameters. For more information, see JSON fields in the CEV manifest in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
supports_limitless_database(Option<bool>)
:Indicates whether the DB engine version supports Aurora Limitless Database.
supports_certificate_rotation_without_restart(Option<bool>)
:Indicates whether the engine version supports rotating the server certificate without rebooting the DB instance.
supported_ca_certificate_identifiers(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:A list of the supported CA certificate identifiers.
For more information, see Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB instance in the Amazon RDS User Guide and Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB cluster in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
supports_local_write_forwarding(Option<bool>)
:Indicates whether the DB engine version supports forwarding write operations from reader DB instances to the writer DB instance in the DB cluster. By default, write operations aren’t allowed on reader DB instances.
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
supports_integrations(Option<bool>)
:Indicates whether the DB engine version supports zero-ETL integrations with Amazon Redshift.
serverless_v2_features_support(Option<ServerlessV2FeaturesSupport>)
:Specifies any Aurora Serverless v2 properties or limits that differ between Aurora engine versions. You can test the values of this attribute when deciding which Aurora version to use in a new or upgraded DB cluster. You can also retrieve the version of an existing DB cluster and check whether that version supports certain Aurora Serverless v2 features before you attempt to use those features.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DeleteCustomDBEngineVersionError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn delete_db_cluster(&self) -> DeleteDBClusterFluentBuilder
pub fn delete_db_cluster(&self) -> DeleteDBClusterFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DeleteDBCluster
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe DB cluster identifier for the DB cluster to be deleted. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
Constraints:
-
Must match an existing DBClusterIdentifier.
-
skip_final_snapshot(bool)
/set_skip_final_snapshot(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to skip the creation of a final DB cluster snapshot before RDS deletes the DB cluster. If you set this value to
true
, RDS doesn’t create a final DB cluster snapshot. If you set this value tofalse
or don’t specify it, RDS creates a DB cluster snapshot before it deletes the DB cluster. By default, this parameter is disabled, so RDS creates a final DB cluster snapshot.If
SkipFinalSnapshot
is disabled, you must specify a value for theFinalDBSnapshotIdentifier
parameter.final_db_snapshot_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_final_db_snapshot_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe DB cluster snapshot identifier of the new DB cluster snapshot created when
SkipFinalSnapshot
is disabled.If you specify this parameter and also skip the creation of a final DB cluster snapshot with the
SkipFinalShapshot
parameter, the request results in an error.Constraints:
-
Must be 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens.
-
First character must be a letter
-
Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens
-
delete_automated_backups(bool)
/set_delete_automated_backups(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to remove automated backups immediately after the DB cluster is deleted. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive. The default is to remove automated backups immediately after the DB cluster is deleted, unless the Amazon Web Services Backup policy specifies a point-in-time restore rule.
- On success, responds with
DeleteDbClusterOutput
with field(s):db_cluster(Option<DbCluster>)
:Contains the details of an Amazon Aurora DB cluster or Multi-AZ DB cluster.
For an Amazon Aurora DB cluster, this data type is used as a response element in the operations
CreateDBCluster
,DeleteDBCluster
,DescribeDBClusters
,FailoverDBCluster
,ModifyDBCluster
,PromoteReadReplicaDBCluster
,RestoreDBClusterFromS3
,RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot
,RestoreDBClusterToPointInTime
,StartDBCluster
, andStopDBCluster
.For a Multi-AZ DB cluster, this data type is used as a response element in the operations
CreateDBCluster
,DeleteDBCluster
,DescribeDBClusters
,FailoverDBCluster
,ModifyDBCluster
,RebootDBCluster
,RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot
, andRestoreDBClusterToPointInTime
.For more information on Amazon Aurora DB clusters, see What is Amazon Aurora? in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
For more information on Multi-AZ DB clusters, see Multi-AZ deployments with two readable standby DB instances in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DeleteDBClusterError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn delete_db_cluster_automated_backup(
&self,
) -> DeleteDBClusterAutomatedBackupFluentBuilder
pub fn delete_db_cluster_automated_backup( &self, ) -> DeleteDBClusterAutomatedBackupFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DeleteDBClusterAutomatedBackup
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_cluster_resource_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_resource_id(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe identifier for the source DB cluster, which can’t be changed and which is unique to an Amazon Web Services Region.
- On success, responds with
DeleteDbClusterAutomatedBackupOutput
with field(s):db_cluster_automated_backup(Option<DbClusterAutomatedBackup>)
:An automated backup of a DB cluster. It consists of system backups, transaction logs, and the database cluster properties that existed at the time you deleted the source cluster.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DeleteDBClusterAutomatedBackupError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn delete_db_cluster_endpoint(&self) -> DeleteDBClusterEndpointFluentBuilder
pub fn delete_db_cluster_endpoint(&self) -> DeleteDBClusterEndpointFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DeleteDBClusterEndpoint
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_cluster_endpoint_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_endpoint_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe identifier associated with the custom endpoint. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
- On success, responds with
DeleteDbClusterEndpointOutput
with field(s):db_cluster_endpoint_identifier(Option<String>)
:The identifier associated with the endpoint. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:The DB cluster identifier of the DB cluster associated with the endpoint. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
db_cluster_endpoint_resource_identifier(Option<String>)
:A unique system-generated identifier for an endpoint. It remains the same for the whole life of the endpoint.
endpoint(Option<String>)
:The DNS address of the endpoint.
status(Option<String>)
:The current status of the endpoint. One of:
creating
,available
,deleting
,inactive
,modifying
. Theinactive
state applies to an endpoint that can’t be used for a certain kind of cluster, such as awriter
endpoint for a read-only secondary cluster in a global database.endpoint_type(Option<String>)
:The type of the endpoint. One of:
READER
,WRITER
,CUSTOM
.custom_endpoint_type(Option<String>)
:The type associated with a custom endpoint. One of:
READER
,WRITER
,ANY
.static_members(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:List of DB instance identifiers that are part of the custom endpoint group.
excluded_members(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:List of DB instance identifiers that aren’t part of the custom endpoint group. All other eligible instances are reachable through the custom endpoint. Only relevant if the list of static members is empty.
db_cluster_endpoint_arn(Option<String>)
:The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the endpoint.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DeleteDBClusterEndpointError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn delete_db_cluster_parameter_group(
&self,
) -> DeleteDBClusterParameterGroupFluentBuilder
pub fn delete_db_cluster_parameter_group( &self, ) -> DeleteDBClusterParameterGroupFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DeleteDBClusterParameterGroup
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_cluster_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_parameter_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the DB cluster parameter group.
Constraints:
-
Must be the name of an existing DB cluster parameter group.
-
You can’t delete a default DB cluster parameter group.
-
Can’t be associated with any DB clusters.
-
- On success, responds with
DeleteDbClusterParameterGroupOutput
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DeleteDBClusterParameterGroupError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn delete_db_cluster_snapshot(&self) -> DeleteDBClusterSnapshotFluentBuilder
pub fn delete_db_cluster_snapshot(&self) -> DeleteDBClusterSnapshotFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DeleteDBClusterSnapshot
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_cluster_snapshot_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_snapshot_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe identifier of the DB cluster snapshot to delete.
Constraints: Must be the name of an existing DB cluster snapshot in the
available
state.
- On success, responds with
DeleteDbClusterSnapshotOutput
with field(s):db_cluster_snapshot(Option<DbClusterSnapshot>)
:Contains the details for an Amazon RDS DB cluster snapshot
This data type is used as a response element in the
DescribeDBClusterSnapshots
action.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DeleteDBClusterSnapshotError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn delete_db_instance(&self) -> DeleteDBInstanceFluentBuilder
pub fn delete_db_instance(&self) -> DeleteDBInstanceFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DeleteDBInstance
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe DB instance identifier for the DB instance to be deleted. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
Constraints:
-
Must match the name of an existing DB instance.
-
skip_final_snapshot(bool)
/set_skip_final_snapshot(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to skip the creation of a final DB snapshot before deleting the instance. If you enable this parameter, RDS doesn’t create a DB snapshot. If you don’t enable this parameter, RDS creates a DB snapshot before the DB instance is deleted. By default, skip isn’t enabled, and the DB snapshot is created.
If you don’t enable this parameter, you must specify the
FinalDBSnapshotIdentifier
parameter.When a DB instance is in a failure state and has a status of
failed
,incompatible-restore
, orincompatible-network
, RDS can delete the instance only if you enable this parameter.If you delete a read replica or an RDS Custom instance, you must enable this setting.
This setting is required for RDS Custom.
final_db_snapshot_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_final_db_snapshot_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe
DBSnapshotIdentifier
of the newDBSnapshot
created when theSkipFinalSnapshot
parameter is disabled.If you enable this parameter and also enable SkipFinalShapshot, the command results in an error.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
Constraints:
-
Must be 1 to 255 letters or numbers.
-
First character must be a letter.
-
Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.
-
Can’t be specified when deleting a read replica.
-
delete_automated_backups(bool)
/set_delete_automated_backups(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to remove automated backups immediately after the DB instance is deleted. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive. The default is to remove automated backups immediately after the DB instance is deleted.
- On success, responds with
DeleteDbInstanceOutput
with field(s):db_instance(Option<DbInstance>)
:Contains the details of an Amazon RDS DB instance.
This data type is used as a response element in the operations
CreateDBInstance
,CreateDBInstanceReadReplica
,DeleteDBInstance
,DescribeDBInstances
,ModifyDBInstance
,PromoteReadReplica
,RebootDBInstance
,RestoreDBInstanceFromDBSnapshot
,RestoreDBInstanceFromS3
,RestoreDBInstanceToPointInTime
,StartDBInstance
, andStopDBInstance
.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DeleteDBInstanceError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn delete_db_instance_automated_backup(
&self,
) -> DeleteDBInstanceAutomatedBackupFluentBuilder
pub fn delete_db_instance_automated_backup( &self, ) -> DeleteDBInstanceAutomatedBackupFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DeleteDBInstanceAutomatedBackup
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
dbi_resource_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_dbi_resource_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe identifier for the source DB instance, which can’t be changed and which is unique to an Amazon Web Services Region.
db_instance_automated_backups_arn(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_instance_automated_backups_arn(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the automated backups to delete, for example,
arn:aws:rds:us-east-1:123456789012:auto-backup:ab-L2IJCEXJP7XQ7HOJ4SIEXAMPLE
.This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- On success, responds with
DeleteDbInstanceAutomatedBackupOutput
with field(s):db_instance_automated_backup(Option<DbInstanceAutomatedBackup>)
:An automated backup of a DB instance. It consists of system backups, transaction logs, and the database instance properties that existed at the time you deleted the source instance.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DeleteDBInstanceAutomatedBackupError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn delete_db_parameter_group(&self) -> DeleteDBParameterGroupFluentBuilder
pub fn delete_db_parameter_group(&self) -> DeleteDBParameterGroupFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DeleteDBParameterGroup
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_parameter_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the DB parameter group.
Constraints:
-
Must be the name of an existing DB parameter group
-
You can’t delete a default DB parameter group
-
Can’t be associated with any DB instances
-
- On success, responds with
DeleteDbParameterGroupOutput
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DeleteDBParameterGroupError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn delete_db_proxy(&self) -> DeleteDBProxyFluentBuilder
pub fn delete_db_proxy(&self) -> DeleteDBProxyFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DeleteDBProxy
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_proxy_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_proxy_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the DB proxy to delete.
- On success, responds with
DeleteDbProxyOutput
with field(s):db_proxy(Option<DbProxy>)
:The data structure representing the details of the DB proxy that you delete.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DeleteDBProxyError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn delete_db_proxy_endpoint(&self) -> DeleteDBProxyEndpointFluentBuilder
pub fn delete_db_proxy_endpoint(&self) -> DeleteDBProxyEndpointFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DeleteDBProxyEndpoint
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_proxy_endpoint_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_proxy_endpoint_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the DB proxy endpoint to delete.
- On success, responds with
DeleteDbProxyEndpointOutput
with field(s):db_proxy_endpoint(Option<DbProxyEndpoint>)
:The data structure representing the details of the DB proxy endpoint that you delete.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DeleteDBProxyEndpointError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn delete_db_security_group(&self) -> DeleteDBSecurityGroupFluentBuilder
pub fn delete_db_security_group(&self) -> DeleteDBSecurityGroupFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DeleteDBSecurityGroup
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_security_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_security_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the DB security group to delete.
You can’t delete the default DB security group.
Constraints:
-
Must be 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens.
-
First character must be a letter
-
Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens
-
Must not be “Default”
-
- On success, responds with
DeleteDbSecurityGroupOutput
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DeleteDBSecurityGroupError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn delete_db_shard_group(&self) -> DeleteDBShardGroupFluentBuilder
pub fn delete_db_shard_group(&self) -> DeleteDBShardGroupFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DeleteDBShardGroup
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_shard_group_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_shard_group_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the DB shard group to delete.
- On success, responds with
DeleteDbShardGroupOutput
with field(s):db_shard_group_resource_id(Option<String>)
:The Amazon Web Services Region-unique, immutable identifier for the DB shard group.
db_shard_group_identifier(Option<String>)
:The name of the DB shard group.
db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:The name of the primary DB cluster for the DB shard group.
max_acu(Option<f64>)
:The maximum capacity of the DB shard group in Aurora capacity units (ACUs).
min_acu(Option<f64>)
:The minimum capacity of the DB shard group in Aurora capacity units (ACUs).
compute_redundancy(Option<i32>)
:Specifies whether to create standby DB shard groups for the DB shard group. Valid values are the following:
-
0 - Creates a DB shard group without a standby DB shard group. This is the default value.
-
1 - Creates a DB shard group with a standby DB shard group in a different Availability Zone (AZ).
-
2 - Creates a DB shard group with two standby DB shard groups in two different AZs.
-
status(Option<String>)
:The status of the DB shard group.
publicly_accessible(Option<bool>)
:Indicates whether the DB shard group is publicly accessible.
When the DB shard group is publicly accessible, its Domain Name System (DNS) endpoint resolves to the private IP address from within the DB shard group’s virtual private cloud (VPC). It resolves to the public IP address from outside of the DB shard group’s VPC. Access to the DB shard group is ultimately controlled by the security group it uses. That public access isn’t permitted if the security group assigned to the DB shard group doesn’t permit it.
When the DB shard group isn’t publicly accessible, it is an internal DB shard group with a DNS name that resolves to a private IP address.
For more information, see
CreateDBShardGroup
.This setting is only for Aurora Limitless Database.
endpoint(Option<String>)
:The connection endpoint for the DB shard group.
db_shard_group_arn(Option<String>)
:The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the DB shard group.
tag_list(Option<Vec::<Tag>>)
:A list of tags.
For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide or Tagging Amazon Aurora and Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DeleteDBShardGroupError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn delete_db_snapshot(&self) -> DeleteDBSnapshotFluentBuilder
pub fn delete_db_snapshot(&self) -> DeleteDBSnapshotFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DeleteDBSnapshot
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_snapshot_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_snapshot_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe DB snapshot identifier.
Constraints: Must be the name of an existing DB snapshot in the
available
state.
- On success, responds with
DeleteDbSnapshotOutput
with field(s):db_snapshot(Option<DbSnapshot>)
:Contains the details of an Amazon RDS DB snapshot.
This data type is used as a response element in the
DescribeDBSnapshots
action.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DeleteDBSnapshotError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn delete_db_subnet_group(&self) -> DeleteDBSubnetGroupFluentBuilder
pub fn delete_db_subnet_group(&self) -> DeleteDBSubnetGroupFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DeleteDBSubnetGroup
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_subnet_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_subnet_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the database subnet group to delete.
You can’t delete the default subnet group.
Constraints: Must match the name of an existing DBSubnetGroup. Must not be default.
Example:
mydbsubnetgroup
- On success, responds with
DeleteDbSubnetGroupOutput
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DeleteDBSubnetGroupError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn delete_event_subscription(&self) -> DeleteEventSubscriptionFluentBuilder
pub fn delete_event_subscription(&self) -> DeleteEventSubscriptionFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DeleteEventSubscription
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
subscription_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_subscription_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the RDS event notification subscription you want to delete.
- On success, responds with
DeleteEventSubscriptionOutput
with field(s):event_subscription(Option<EventSubscription>)
:Contains the results of a successful invocation of the
DescribeEventSubscriptions
action.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DeleteEventSubscriptionError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn delete_global_cluster(&self) -> DeleteGlobalClusterFluentBuilder
pub fn delete_global_cluster(&self) -> DeleteGlobalClusterFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DeleteGlobalCluster
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
global_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_global_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe cluster identifier of the global database cluster being deleted.
- On success, responds with
DeleteGlobalClusterOutput
with field(s):global_cluster(Option<GlobalCluster>)
:A data type representing an Aurora global database.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DeleteGlobalClusterError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn delete_integration(&self) -> DeleteIntegrationFluentBuilder
pub fn delete_integration(&self) -> DeleteIntegrationFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DeleteIntegration
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
integration_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_integration_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe unique identifier of the integration.
- On success, responds with
DeleteIntegrationOutput
with field(s):source_arn(Option<String>)
:The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the database used as the source for replication.
target_arn(Option<String>)
:The ARN of the Redshift data warehouse used as the target for replication.
integration_name(Option<String>)
:The name of the integration.
integration_arn(Option<String>)
:The ARN of the integration.
kms_key_id(Option<String>)
:The Amazon Web Services Key Management System (Amazon Web Services KMS) key identifier for the key used to to encrypt the integration.
additional_encryption_context(Option<HashMap::<String, String>>)
:The encryption context for the integration. For more information, see Encryption context in the Amazon Web Services Key Management Service Developer Guide.
status(Option<IntegrationStatus>)
:The current status of the integration.
tags(Option<Vec::<Tag>>)
:A list of tags.
For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide or Tagging Amazon Aurora and Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
create_time(Option<DateTime>)
:The time when the integration was created, in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).
errors(Option<Vec::<IntegrationError>>)
:Any errors associated with the integration.
data_filter(Option<String>)
:Data filters for the integration. These filters determine which tables from the source database are sent to the target Amazon Redshift data warehouse.
description(Option<String>)
:A description of the integration.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DeleteIntegrationError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn delete_option_group(&self) -> DeleteOptionGroupFluentBuilder
pub fn delete_option_group(&self) -> DeleteOptionGroupFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DeleteOptionGroup
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
option_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_option_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the option group to be deleted.
You can’t delete default option groups.
- On success, responds with
DeleteOptionGroupOutput
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DeleteOptionGroupError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn delete_tenant_database(&self) -> DeleteTenantDatabaseFluentBuilder
pub fn delete_tenant_database(&self) -> DeleteTenantDatabaseFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DeleteTenantDatabase
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe user-supplied identifier for the DB instance that contains the tenant database that you want to delete.
tenant_db_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_tenant_db_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe user-supplied name of the tenant database that you want to remove from your DB instance. Amazon RDS deletes the tenant database with this name. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
skip_final_snapshot(bool)
/set_skip_final_snapshot(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to skip the creation of a final DB snapshot before removing the tenant database from your DB instance. If you enable this parameter, RDS doesn’t create a DB snapshot. If you don’t enable this parameter, RDS creates a DB snapshot before it deletes the tenant database. By default, RDS doesn’t skip the final snapshot. If you don’t enable this parameter, you must specify the
FinalDBSnapshotIdentifier
parameter.final_db_snapshot_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_final_db_snapshot_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe
DBSnapshotIdentifier
of the newDBSnapshot
created when theSkipFinalSnapshot
parameter is disabled.If you enable this parameter and also enable
SkipFinalShapshot
, the command results in an error.
- On success, responds with
DeleteTenantDatabaseOutput
with field(s):tenant_database(Option<TenantDatabase>)
:A tenant database in the DB instance. This data type is an element in the response to the
DescribeTenantDatabases
action.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DeleteTenantDatabaseError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn deregister_db_proxy_targets(
&self,
) -> DeregisterDBProxyTargetsFluentBuilder
pub fn deregister_db_proxy_targets( &self, ) -> DeregisterDBProxyTargetsFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DeregisterDBProxyTargets
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_proxy_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_proxy_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe identifier of the
DBProxy
that is associated with theDBProxyTargetGroup
.target_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_target_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe identifier of the
DBProxyTargetGroup
.db_instance_identifiers(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_instance_identifiers(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseOne or more DB instance identifiers.
db_cluster_identifiers(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_identifiers(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseOne or more DB cluster identifiers.
- On success, responds with
DeregisterDbProxyTargetsOutput
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DeregisterDBProxyTargetsError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn describe_account_attributes(
&self,
) -> DescribeAccountAttributesFluentBuilder
pub fn describe_account_attributes( &self, ) -> DescribeAccountAttributesFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeAccountAttributes
operation.
- The fluent builder takes no input, just
send
it. - On success, responds with
DescribeAccountAttributesOutput
with field(s):account_quotas(Option<Vec::<AccountQuota>>)
:A list of
AccountQuota
objects. Within this list, each quota has a name, a count of usage toward the quota maximum, and a maximum value for the quota.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DescribeAccountAttributesError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn describe_blue_green_deployments(
&self,
) -> DescribeBlueGreenDeploymentsFluentBuilder
pub fn describe_blue_green_deployments( &self, ) -> DescribeBlueGreenDeploymentsFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeBlueGreenDeployments
operation.
This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator()
.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
blue_green_deployment_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_blue_green_deployment_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe blue/green deployment identifier. If you specify this parameter, the response only includes information about the specific blue/green deployment. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
Constraints:
-
Must match an existing blue/green deployment identifier.
-
filters(Filter)
/set_filters(Option<Vec::<Filter>>)
:
required: falseA filter that specifies one or more blue/green deployments to describe.
Valid Values:
-
blue-green-deployment-identifier
- Accepts system-generated identifiers for blue/green deployments. The results list only includes information about the blue/green deployments with the specified identifiers. -
blue-green-deployment-name
- Accepts user-supplied names for blue/green deployments. The results list only includes information about the blue/green deployments with the specified names. -
source
- Accepts source databases for a blue/green deployment. The results list only includes information about the blue/green deployments with the specified source databases. -
target
- Accepts target databases for a blue/green deployment. The results list only includes information about the blue/green deployments with the specified target databases.
-
marker(impl Into<String>)
/set_marker(Option<String>)
:
required: falseAn optional pagination token provided by a previous
DescribeBlueGreenDeployments
request. If you specify this parameter, the response only includes records beyond the marker, up to the value specified byMaxRecords
.max_records(i32)
/set_max_records(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified
MaxRecords
value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.Default: 100
Constraints:
-
Must be a minimum of 20.
-
Can’t exceed 100.
-
- On success, responds with
DescribeBlueGreenDeploymentsOutput
with field(s):blue_green_deployments(Option<Vec::<BlueGreenDeployment>>)
:A list of blue/green deployments in the current account and Amazon Web Services Region.
marker(Option<String>)
:A pagination token that can be used in a later
DescribeBlueGreenDeployments
request.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DescribeBlueGreenDeploymentsError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn describe_certificates(&self) -> DescribeCertificatesFluentBuilder
pub fn describe_certificates(&self) -> DescribeCertificatesFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeCertificates
operation.
This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator()
.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
certificate_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_certificate_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe user-supplied certificate identifier. If this parameter is specified, information for only the identified certificate is returned. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
Constraints:
-
Must match an existing CertificateIdentifier.
-
filters(Filter)
/set_filters(Option<Vec::<Filter>>)
:
required: falseThis parameter isn’t currently supported.
max_records(i32)
/set_max_records(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified
MaxRecords
value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.Default: 100
Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
marker(impl Into<String>)
/set_marker(Option<String>)
:
required: falseAn optional pagination token provided by a previous
DescribeCertificates
request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified byMaxRecords
.
- On success, responds with
DescribeCertificatesOutput
with field(s):default_certificate_for_new_launches(Option<String>)
:The default root CA for new databases created by your Amazon Web Services account. This is either the root CA override set on your Amazon Web Services account or the system default CA for the Region if no override exists. To override the default CA, use the
ModifyCertificates
operation.certificates(Option<Vec::<Certificate>>)
:The list of
Certificate
objects for the Amazon Web Services account.marker(Option<String>)
:An optional pagination token provided by a previous
DescribeCertificates
request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified byMaxRecords
.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DescribeCertificatesError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn describe_db_cluster_automated_backups(
&self,
) -> DescribeDBClusterAutomatedBackupsFluentBuilder
pub fn describe_db_cluster_automated_backups( &self, ) -> DescribeDBClusterAutomatedBackupsFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBClusterAutomatedBackups
operation.
This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator()
.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_cluster_resource_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_resource_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe resource ID of the DB cluster that is the source of the automated backup. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: false(Optional) The user-supplied DB cluster identifier. If this parameter is specified, it must match the identifier of an existing DB cluster. It returns information from the specific DB cluster’s automated backup. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
filters(Filter)
/set_filters(Option<Vec::<Filter>>)
:
required: falseA filter that specifies which resources to return based on status.
Supported filters are the following:
-
status
-
retained
- Automated backups for deleted clusters and after backup replication is stopped.
-
-
db-cluster-id
- Accepts DB cluster identifiers and Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). The results list includes only information about the DB cluster automated backups identified by these ARNs. -
db-cluster-resource-id
- Accepts DB resource identifiers and Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). The results list includes only information about the DB cluster resources identified by these ARNs.
Returns all resources by default. The status for each resource is specified in the response.
-
max_records(i32)
/set_max_records(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified
MaxRecords
value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.marker(impl Into<String>)
/set_marker(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe pagination token provided in the previous request. If this parameter is specified the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to
MaxRecords
.
- On success, responds with
DescribeDbClusterAutomatedBackupsOutput
with field(s):marker(Option<String>)
:The pagination token provided in the previous request. If this parameter is specified the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to
MaxRecords
.db_cluster_automated_backups(Option<Vec::<DbClusterAutomatedBackup>>)
:A list of
DBClusterAutomatedBackup
backups.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DescribeDBClusterAutomatedBackupsError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn describe_db_cluster_backtracks(
&self,
) -> DescribeDBClusterBacktracksFluentBuilder
pub fn describe_db_cluster_backtracks( &self, ) -> DescribeDBClusterBacktracksFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBClusterBacktracks
operation.
This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator()
.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe DB cluster identifier of the DB cluster to be described. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
Constraints:
-
Must contain from 1 to 63 alphanumeric characters or hyphens.
-
First character must be a letter.
-
Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.
Example:
my-cluster1
-
backtrack_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_backtrack_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseIf specified, this value is the backtrack identifier of the backtrack to be described.
Constraints:
-
Must contain a valid universally unique identifier (UUID). For more information about UUIDs, see Universally unique identifier.
Example:
123e4567-e89b-12d3-a456-426655440000
-
filters(Filter)
/set_filters(Option<Vec::<Filter>>)
:
required: falseA filter that specifies one or more DB clusters to describe. Supported filters include the following:
-
db-cluster-backtrack-id
- Accepts backtrack identifiers. The results list includes information about only the backtracks identified by these identifiers. -
db-cluster-backtrack-status
- Accepts any of the following backtrack status values:-
applying
-
completed
-
failed
-
pending
The results list includes information about only the backtracks identified by these values.
-
-
max_records(i32)
/set_max_records(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified
MaxRecords
value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.Default: 100
Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
marker(impl Into<String>)
/set_marker(Option<String>)
:
required: falseAn optional pagination token provided by a previous
DescribeDBClusterBacktracks
request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified byMaxRecords
.
- On success, responds with
DescribeDbClusterBacktracksOutput
with field(s):marker(Option<String>)
:A pagination token that can be used in a later
DescribeDBClusterBacktracks
request.db_cluster_backtracks(Option<Vec::<DbClusterBacktrack>>)
:Contains a list of backtracks for the user.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DescribeDBClusterBacktracksError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn describe_db_cluster_endpoints(
&self,
) -> DescribeDBClusterEndpointsFluentBuilder
pub fn describe_db_cluster_endpoints( &self, ) -> DescribeDBClusterEndpointsFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBClusterEndpoints
operation.
This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator()
.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe DB cluster identifier of the DB cluster associated with the endpoint. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
db_cluster_endpoint_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_endpoint_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe identifier of the endpoint to describe. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
filters(Filter)
/set_filters(Option<Vec::<Filter>>)
:
required: falseA set of name-value pairs that define which endpoints to include in the output. The filters are specified as name-value pairs, in the format
Name=endpoint_type,Values=endpoint_type1,endpoint_type2,…
.Name
can be one of:db-cluster-endpoint-type
,db-cluster-endpoint-custom-type
,db-cluster-endpoint-id
,db-cluster-endpoint-status
.Values
for thedb-cluster-endpoint-type
filter can be one or more of:reader
,writer
,custom
.Values
for thedb-cluster-endpoint-custom-type
filter can be one or more of:reader
,any
.Values
for thedb-cluster-endpoint-status
filter can be one or more of:available
,creating
,deleting
,inactive
,modifying
.max_records(i32)
/set_max_records(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified
MaxRecords
value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.Default: 100
Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
marker(impl Into<String>)
/set_marker(Option<String>)
:
required: falseAn optional pagination token provided by a previous
DescribeDBClusterEndpoints
request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified byMaxRecords
.
- On success, responds with
DescribeDbClusterEndpointsOutput
with field(s):marker(Option<String>)
:An optional pagination token provided by a previous
DescribeDBClusterEndpoints
request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified byMaxRecords
.db_cluster_endpoints(Option<Vec::<DbClusterEndpoint>>)
:Contains the details of the endpoints associated with the cluster and matching any filter conditions.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DescribeDBClusterEndpointsError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn describe_db_cluster_parameter_groups(
&self,
) -> DescribeDBClusterParameterGroupsFluentBuilder
pub fn describe_db_cluster_parameter_groups( &self, ) -> DescribeDBClusterParameterGroupsFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBClusterParameterGroups
operation.
This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator()
.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_cluster_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_parameter_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of a specific DB cluster parameter group to return details for.
Constraints:
-
If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBClusterParameterGroup.
-
filters(Filter)
/set_filters(Option<Vec::<Filter>>)
:
required: falseThis parameter isn’t currently supported.
max_records(i32)
/set_max_records(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified
MaxRecords
value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.Default: 100
Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
marker(impl Into<String>)
/set_marker(Option<String>)
:
required: falseAn optional pagination token provided by a previous
DescribeDBClusterParameterGroups
request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified byMaxRecords
.
- On success, responds with
DescribeDbClusterParameterGroupsOutput
with field(s):marker(Option<String>)
:An optional pagination token provided by a previous
DescribeDBClusterParameterGroups
request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified byMaxRecords
.db_cluster_parameter_groups(Option<Vec::<DbClusterParameterGroup>>)
:A list of DB cluster parameter groups.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DescribeDBClusterParameterGroupsError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn describe_db_cluster_parameters(
&self,
) -> DescribeDBClusterParametersFluentBuilder
pub fn describe_db_cluster_parameters( &self, ) -> DescribeDBClusterParametersFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBClusterParameters
operation.
This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator()
.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_cluster_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_parameter_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of a specific DB cluster parameter group to return parameter details for.
Constraints:
-
If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBClusterParameterGroup.
-
source(impl Into<String>)
/set_source(Option<String>)
:
required: falseA specific source to return parameters for.
Valid Values:
-
engine-default
-
system
-
user
-
filters(Filter)
/set_filters(Option<Vec::<Filter>>)
:
required: falseA filter that specifies one or more DB cluster parameters to describe.
The only supported filter is
parameter-name
. The results list only includes information about the DB cluster parameters with these names.max_records(i32)
/set_max_records(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified
MaxRecords
value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.Default: 100
Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
marker(impl Into<String>)
/set_marker(Option<String>)
:
required: falseAn optional pagination token provided by a previous
DescribeDBClusterParameters
request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified byMaxRecords
.
- On success, responds with
DescribeDbClusterParametersOutput
with field(s):parameters(Option<Vec::<Parameter>>)
:Provides a list of parameters for the DB cluster parameter group.
marker(Option<String>)
:An optional pagination token provided by a previous
DescribeDBClusterParameters
request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified byMaxRecords
.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DescribeDBClusterParametersError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn describe_db_cluster_snapshot_attributes(
&self,
) -> DescribeDBClusterSnapshotAttributesFluentBuilder
pub fn describe_db_cluster_snapshot_attributes( &self, ) -> DescribeDBClusterSnapshotAttributesFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBClusterSnapshotAttributes
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_cluster_snapshot_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_snapshot_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe identifier for the DB cluster snapshot to describe the attributes for.
- On success, responds with
DescribeDbClusterSnapshotAttributesOutput
with field(s):db_cluster_snapshot_attributes_result(Option<DbClusterSnapshotAttributesResult>)
:Contains the results of a successful call to the
DescribeDBClusterSnapshotAttributes
API action.Manual DB cluster snapshot attributes are used to authorize other Amazon Web Services accounts to copy or restore a manual DB cluster snapshot. For more information, see the
ModifyDBClusterSnapshotAttribute
API action.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DescribeDBClusterSnapshotAttributesError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn describe_db_cluster_snapshots(
&self,
) -> DescribeDBClusterSnapshotsFluentBuilder
pub fn describe_db_cluster_snapshots( &self, ) -> DescribeDBClusterSnapshotsFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBClusterSnapshots
operation.
This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator()
.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe ID of the DB cluster to retrieve the list of DB cluster snapshots for. This parameter can’t be used in conjunction with the
DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier
parameter. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.Constraints:
-
If supplied, must match the identifier of an existing DBCluster.
-
db_cluster_snapshot_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_snapshot_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseA specific DB cluster snapshot identifier to describe. This parameter can’t be used in conjunction with the
DBClusterIdentifier
parameter. This value is stored as a lowercase string.Constraints:
-
If supplied, must match the identifier of an existing DBClusterSnapshot.
-
If this identifier is for an automated snapshot, the
SnapshotType
parameter must also be specified.
-
snapshot_type(impl Into<String>)
/set_snapshot_type(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe type of DB cluster snapshots to be returned. You can specify one of the following values:
-
automated
- Return all DB cluster snapshots that have been automatically taken by Amazon RDS for my Amazon Web Services account. -
manual
- Return all DB cluster snapshots that have been taken by my Amazon Web Services account. -
shared
- Return all manual DB cluster snapshots that have been shared to my Amazon Web Services account. -
public
- Return all DB cluster snapshots that have been marked as public.
If you don’t specify a
SnapshotType
value, then both automated and manual DB cluster snapshots are returned. You can include shared DB cluster snapshots with these results by enabling theIncludeShared
parameter. You can include public DB cluster snapshots with these results by enabling theIncludePublic
parameter.The
IncludeShared
andIncludePublic
parameters don’t apply forSnapshotType
values ofmanual
orautomated
. TheIncludePublic
parameter doesn’t apply whenSnapshotType
is set toshared
. TheIncludeShared
parameter doesn’t apply whenSnapshotType
is set topublic
.-
filters(Filter)
/set_filters(Option<Vec::<Filter>>)
:
required: falseA filter that specifies one or more DB cluster snapshots to describe.
Supported filters:
-
db-cluster-id
- Accepts DB cluster identifiers and DB cluster Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). -
db-cluster-snapshot-id
- Accepts DB cluster snapshot identifiers. -
snapshot-type
- Accepts types of DB cluster snapshots. -
engine
- Accepts names of database engines.
-
max_records(i32)
/set_max_records(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified
MaxRecords
value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.Default: 100
Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
marker(impl Into<String>)
/set_marker(Option<String>)
:
required: falseAn optional pagination token provided by a previous
DescribeDBClusterSnapshots
request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified byMaxRecords
.include_shared(bool)
/set_include_shared(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to include shared manual DB cluster snapshots from other Amazon Web Services accounts that this Amazon Web Services account has been given permission to copy or restore. By default, these snapshots are not included.
You can give an Amazon Web Services account permission to restore a manual DB cluster snapshot from another Amazon Web Services account by the
ModifyDBClusterSnapshotAttribute
API action.include_public(bool)
/set_include_public(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to include manual DB cluster snapshots that are public and can be copied or restored by any Amazon Web Services account. By default, the public snapshots are not included.
You can share a manual DB cluster snapshot as public by using the
ModifyDBClusterSnapshotAttribute
API action.db_cluster_resource_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_resource_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseA specific DB cluster resource ID to describe.
- On success, responds with
DescribeDbClusterSnapshotsOutput
with field(s):marker(Option<String>)
:An optional pagination token provided by a previous
DescribeDBClusterSnapshots
request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified byMaxRecords
.db_cluster_snapshots(Option<Vec::<DbClusterSnapshot>>)
:Provides a list of DB cluster snapshots for the user.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DescribeDBClusterSnapshotsError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn describe_db_clusters(&self) -> DescribeDBClustersFluentBuilder
pub fn describe_db_clusters(&self) -> DescribeDBClustersFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBClusters
operation.
This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator()
.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe user-supplied DB cluster identifier or the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the DB cluster. If this parameter is specified, information for only the specific DB cluster is returned. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
Constraints:
-
If supplied, must match an existing DB cluster identifier.
-
filters(Filter)
/set_filters(Option<Vec::<Filter>>)
:
required: falseA filter that specifies one or more DB clusters to describe.
Supported Filters:
-
clone-group-id
- Accepts clone group identifiers. The results list only includes information about the DB clusters associated with these clone groups. -
db-cluster-id
- Accepts DB cluster identifiers and DB cluster Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). The results list only includes information about the DB clusters identified by these ARNs. -
db-cluster-resource-id
- Accepts DB cluster resource identifiers. The results list will only include information about the DB clusters identified by these DB cluster resource identifiers. -
domain
- Accepts Active Directory directory IDs. The results list only includes information about the DB clusters associated with these domains. -
engine
- Accepts engine names. The results list only includes information about the DB clusters for these engines.
-
max_records(i32)
/set_max_records(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified
MaxRecords
value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.Default: 100
Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100
marker(impl Into<String>)
/set_marker(Option<String>)
:
required: falseAn optional pagination token provided by a previous
DescribeDBClusters
request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified byMaxRecords
.include_shared(bool)
/set_include_shared(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether the output includes information about clusters shared from other Amazon Web Services accounts.
- On success, responds with
DescribeDbClustersOutput
with field(s):marker(Option<String>)
:A pagination token that can be used in a later
DescribeDBClusters
request.db_clusters(Option<Vec::<DbCluster>>)
:Contains a list of DB clusters for the user.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DescribeDBClustersError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn describe_db_engine_versions(
&self,
) -> DescribeDBEngineVersionsFluentBuilder
pub fn describe_db_engine_versions( &self, ) -> DescribeDBEngineVersionsFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBEngineVersions
operation.
This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator()
.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
engine(impl Into<String>)
/set_engine(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe database engine to return version details for.
Valid Values:
-
aurora-mysql
-
aurora-postgresql
-
custom-oracle-ee
-
custom-oracle-ee-cdb
-
custom-oracle-se2
-
custom-oracle-se2-cdb
-
db2-ae
-
db2-se
-
mariadb
-
mysql
-
oracle-ee
-
oracle-ee-cdb
-
oracle-se2
-
oracle-se2-cdb
-
postgres
-
sqlserver-ee
-
sqlserver-se
-
sqlserver-ex
-
sqlserver-web
-
engine_version(impl Into<String>)
/set_engine_version(Option<String>)
:
required: falseA specific database engine version to return details for.
Example:
5.1.49
db_parameter_group_family(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_parameter_group_family(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of a specific DB parameter group family to return details for.
Constraints:
-
If supplied, must match an existing DB parameter group family.
-
filters(Filter)
/set_filters(Option<Vec::<Filter>>)
:
required: falseA filter that specifies one or more DB engine versions to describe.
Supported filters:
-
db-parameter-group-family
- Accepts parameter groups family names. The results list only includes information about the DB engine versions for these parameter group families. -
engine
- Accepts engine names. The results list only includes information about the DB engine versions for these engines. -
engine-mode
- Accepts DB engine modes. The results list only includes information about the DB engine versions for these engine modes. Valid DB engine modes are the following:-
global
-
multimaster
-
parallelquery
-
provisioned
-
serverless
-
-
engine-version
- Accepts engine versions. The results list only includes information about the DB engine versions for these engine versions. -
status
- Accepts engine version statuses. The results list only includes information about the DB engine versions for these statuses. Valid statuses are the following:-
available
-
deprecated
-
-
max_records(i32)
/set_max_records(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe maximum number of records to include in the response. If more than the
MaxRecords
value is available, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.Default: 100
Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
marker(impl Into<String>)
/set_marker(Option<String>)
:
required: falseAn optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by
MaxRecords
.default_only(bool)
/set_default_only(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to return only the default version of the specified engine or the engine and major version combination.
list_supported_character_sets(bool)
/set_list_supported_character_sets(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to list the supported character sets for each engine version.
If this parameter is enabled and the requested engine supports the
CharacterSetName
parameter forCreateDBInstance
, the response includes a list of supported character sets for each engine version.For RDS Custom, the default is not to list supported character sets. If you enable this parameter, RDS Custom returns no results.
list_supported_timezones(bool)
/set_list_supported_timezones(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to list the supported time zones for each engine version.
If this parameter is enabled and the requested engine supports the
TimeZone
parameter forCreateDBInstance
, the response includes a list of supported time zones for each engine version.For RDS Custom, the default is not to list supported time zones. If you enable this parameter, RDS Custom returns no results.
include_all(bool)
/set_include_all(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to also list the engine versions that aren’t available. The default is to list only available engine versions.
- On success, responds with
DescribeDbEngineVersionsOutput
with field(s):marker(Option<String>)
:An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by
MaxRecords
.db_engine_versions(Option<Vec::<DbEngineVersion>>)
:A list of
DBEngineVersion
elements.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DescribeDBEngineVersionsError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn describe_db_instance_automated_backups(
&self,
) -> DescribeDBInstanceAutomatedBackupsFluentBuilder
pub fn describe_db_instance_automated_backups( &self, ) -> DescribeDBInstanceAutomatedBackupsFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBInstanceAutomatedBackups
operation.
This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator()
.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
dbi_resource_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_dbi_resource_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe resource ID of the DB instance that is the source of the automated backup. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: false(Optional) The user-supplied instance identifier. If this parameter is specified, it must match the identifier of an existing DB instance. It returns information from the specific DB instance’s automated backup. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
filters(Filter)
/set_filters(Option<Vec::<Filter>>)
:
required: falseA filter that specifies which resources to return based on status.
Supported filters are the following:
-
status
-
active
- Automated backups for current instances. -
creating
- Automated backups that are waiting for the first automated snapshot to be available. -
retained
- Automated backups for deleted instances and after backup replication is stopped.
-
-
db-instance-id
- Accepts DB instance identifiers and Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). The results list includes only information about the DB instance automated backups identified by these ARNs. -
dbi-resource-id
- Accepts DB resource identifiers and Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). The results list includes only information about the DB instance resources identified by these ARNs.
Returns all resources by default. The status for each resource is specified in the response.
-
max_records(i32)
/set_max_records(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified
MaxRecords
value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.marker(impl Into<String>)
/set_marker(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe pagination token provided in the previous request. If this parameter is specified the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to
MaxRecords
.db_instance_automated_backups_arn(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_instance_automated_backups_arn(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the replicated automated backups, for example,
arn:aws:rds:us-east-1:123456789012:auto-backup:ab-L2IJCEXJP7XQ7HOJ4SIEXAMPLE
.This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- On success, responds with
DescribeDbInstanceAutomatedBackupsOutput
with field(s):marker(Option<String>)
:An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by
MaxRecords
.db_instance_automated_backups(Option<Vec::<DbInstanceAutomatedBackup>>)
:A list of
DBInstanceAutomatedBackup
instances.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DescribeDBInstanceAutomatedBackupsError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn describe_db_instances(&self) -> DescribeDBInstancesFluentBuilder
pub fn describe_db_instances(&self) -> DescribeDBInstancesFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBInstances
operation.
This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator()
.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe user-supplied instance identifier or the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the DB instance. If this parameter is specified, information from only the specific DB instance is returned. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
Constraints:
-
If supplied, must match the identifier of an existing DB instance.
-
filters(Filter)
/set_filters(Option<Vec::<Filter>>)
:
required: falseA filter that specifies one or more DB instances to describe.
Supported Filters:
-
db-cluster-id
- Accepts DB cluster identifiers and DB cluster Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). The results list only includes information about the DB instances associated with the DB clusters identified by these ARNs. -
db-instance-id
- Accepts DB instance identifiers and DB instance Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). The results list only includes information about the DB instances identified by these ARNs. -
dbi-resource-id
- Accepts DB instance resource identifiers. The results list only includes information about the DB instances identified by these DB instance resource identifiers. -
domain
- Accepts Active Directory directory IDs. The results list only includes information about the DB instances associated with these domains. -
engine
- Accepts engine names. The results list only includes information about the DB instances for these engines.
-
max_records(i32)
/set_max_records(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified
MaxRecords
value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.Default: 100
Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
marker(impl Into<String>)
/set_marker(Option<String>)
:
required: falseAn optional pagination token provided by a previous
DescribeDBInstances
request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified byMaxRecords
.
- On success, responds with
DescribeDbInstancesOutput
with field(s):marker(Option<String>)
:An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by
MaxRecords
.db_instances(Option<Vec::<DbInstance>>)
:A list of
DBInstance
instances.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DescribeDBInstancesError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn describe_db_log_files(&self) -> DescribeDBLogFilesFluentBuilder
pub fn describe_db_log_files(&self) -> DescribeDBLogFilesFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBLogFiles
operation.
This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator()
.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe customer-assigned name of the DB instance that contains the log files you want to list.
Constraints:
-
Must match the identifier of an existing DBInstance.
-
filename_contains(impl Into<String>)
/set_filename_contains(Option<String>)
:
required: falseFilters the available log files for log file names that contain the specified string.
file_last_written(i64)
/set_file_last_written(Option<i64>)
:
required: falseFilters the available log files for files written since the specified date, in POSIX timestamp format with milliseconds.
file_size(i64)
/set_file_size(Option<i64>)
:
required: falseFilters the available log files for files larger than the specified size.
filters(Filter)
/set_filters(Option<Vec::<Filter>>)
:
required: falseThis parameter isn’t currently supported.
max_records(i32)
/set_max_records(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.
marker(impl Into<String>)
/set_marker(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe pagination token provided in the previous request. If this parameter is specified the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to MaxRecords.
- On success, responds with
DescribeDbLogFilesOutput
with field(s):describe_db_log_files(Option<Vec::<DescribeDbLogFilesDetails>>)
:The DB log files returned.
marker(Option<String>)
:A pagination token that can be used in a later
DescribeDBLogFiles
request.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DescribeDBLogFilesError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn describe_db_parameter_groups(
&self,
) -> DescribeDBParameterGroupsFluentBuilder
pub fn describe_db_parameter_groups( &self, ) -> DescribeDBParameterGroupsFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBParameterGroups
operation.
This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator()
.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_parameter_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of a specific DB parameter group to return details for.
Constraints:
-
If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBClusterParameterGroup.
-
filters(Filter)
/set_filters(Option<Vec::<Filter>>)
:
required: falseThis parameter isn’t currently supported.
max_records(i32)
/set_max_records(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified
MaxRecords
value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.Default: 100
Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
marker(impl Into<String>)
/set_marker(Option<String>)
:
required: falseAn optional pagination token provided by a previous
DescribeDBParameterGroups
request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified byMaxRecords
.
- On success, responds with
DescribeDbParameterGroupsOutput
with field(s):marker(Option<String>)
:An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by
MaxRecords
.db_parameter_groups(Option<Vec::<DbParameterGroup>>)
:A list of
DBParameterGroup
instances.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DescribeDBParameterGroupsError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn describe_db_parameters(&self) -> DescribeDBParametersFluentBuilder
pub fn describe_db_parameters(&self) -> DescribeDBParametersFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBParameters
operation.
This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator()
.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_parameter_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of a specific DB parameter group to return details for.
Constraints:
-
If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBParameterGroup.
-
source(impl Into<String>)
/set_source(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe parameter types to return.
Default: All parameter types returned
Valid Values:
user | system | engine-default
filters(Filter)
/set_filters(Option<Vec::<Filter>>)
:
required: falseA filter that specifies one or more DB parameters to describe.
The only supported filter is
parameter-name
. The results list only includes information about the DB parameters with these names.max_records(i32)
/set_max_records(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified
MaxRecords
value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.Default: 100
Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
marker(impl Into<String>)
/set_marker(Option<String>)
:
required: falseAn optional pagination token provided by a previous
DescribeDBParameters
request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified byMaxRecords
.
- On success, responds with
DescribeDbParametersOutput
with field(s):parameters(Option<Vec::<Parameter>>)
:A list of
Parameter
values.marker(Option<String>)
:An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by
MaxRecords
.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DescribeDBParametersError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn describe_db_proxies(&self) -> DescribeDBProxiesFluentBuilder
pub fn describe_db_proxies(&self) -> DescribeDBProxiesFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBProxies
operation.
This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator()
.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_proxy_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_proxy_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of the DB proxy. If you omit this parameter, the output includes information about all DB proxies owned by your Amazon Web Services account ID.
filters(Filter)
/set_filters(Option<Vec::<Filter>>)
:
required: falseThis parameter is not currently supported.
marker(impl Into<String>)
/set_marker(Option<String>)
:
required: falseAn optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by
MaxRecords
.max_records(i32)
/set_max_records(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified
MaxRecords
value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.Default: 100
Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
- On success, responds with
DescribeDbProxiesOutput
with field(s):db_proxies(Option<Vec::<DbProxy>>)
:A return value representing an arbitrary number of
DBProxy
data structures.marker(Option<String>)
:An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by
MaxRecords
.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DescribeDBProxiesError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn describe_db_proxy_endpoints(
&self,
) -> DescribeDBProxyEndpointsFluentBuilder
pub fn describe_db_proxy_endpoints( &self, ) -> DescribeDBProxyEndpointsFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBProxyEndpoints
operation.
This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator()
.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_proxy_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_proxy_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of the DB proxy whose endpoints you want to describe. If you omit this parameter, the output includes information about all DB proxy endpoints associated with all your DB proxies.
db_proxy_endpoint_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_proxy_endpoint_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of a DB proxy endpoint to describe. If you omit this parameter, the output includes information about all DB proxy endpoints associated with the specified proxy.
filters(Filter)
/set_filters(Option<Vec::<Filter>>)
:
required: falseThis parameter is not currently supported.
marker(impl Into<String>)
/set_marker(Option<String>)
:
required: falseAn optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by
MaxRecords
.max_records(i32)
/set_max_records(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified
MaxRecords
value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.Default: 100
Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
- On success, responds with
DescribeDbProxyEndpointsOutput
with field(s):db_proxy_endpoints(Option<Vec::<DbProxyEndpoint>>)
:The list of
ProxyEndpoint
objects returned by the API operation.marker(Option<String>)
:An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by
MaxRecords
.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DescribeDBProxyEndpointsError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn describe_db_proxy_target_groups(
&self,
) -> DescribeDBProxyTargetGroupsFluentBuilder
pub fn describe_db_proxy_target_groups( &self, ) -> DescribeDBProxyTargetGroupsFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBProxyTargetGroups
operation.
This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator()
.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_proxy_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_proxy_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe identifier of the
DBProxy
associated with the target group.target_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_target_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe identifier of the
DBProxyTargetGroup
to describe.filters(Filter)
/set_filters(Option<Vec::<Filter>>)
:
required: falseThis parameter is not currently supported.
marker(impl Into<String>)
/set_marker(Option<String>)
:
required: falseAn optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by
MaxRecords
.max_records(i32)
/set_max_records(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified
MaxRecords
value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.Default: 100
Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
- On success, responds with
DescribeDbProxyTargetGroupsOutput
with field(s):target_groups(Option<Vec::<DbProxyTargetGroup>>)
:An arbitrary number of
DBProxyTargetGroup
objects, containing details of the corresponding target groups.marker(Option<String>)
:An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by
MaxRecords
.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DescribeDBProxyTargetGroupsError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn describe_db_proxy_targets(&self) -> DescribeDBProxyTargetsFluentBuilder
pub fn describe_db_proxy_targets(&self) -> DescribeDBProxyTargetsFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBProxyTargets
operation.
This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator()
.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_proxy_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_proxy_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe identifier of the
DBProxyTarget
to describe.target_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_target_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe identifier of the
DBProxyTargetGroup
to describe.filters(Filter)
/set_filters(Option<Vec::<Filter>>)
:
required: falseThis parameter is not currently supported.
marker(impl Into<String>)
/set_marker(Option<String>)
:
required: falseAn optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by
MaxRecords
.max_records(i32)
/set_max_records(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified
MaxRecords
value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.Default: 100
Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
- On success, responds with
DescribeDbProxyTargetsOutput
with field(s):targets(Option<Vec::<DbProxyTarget>>)
:An arbitrary number of
DBProxyTarget
objects, containing details of the corresponding targets.marker(Option<String>)
:An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by
MaxRecords
.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DescribeDBProxyTargetsError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn describe_db_recommendations(
&self,
) -> DescribeDBRecommendationsFluentBuilder
pub fn describe_db_recommendations( &self, ) -> DescribeDBRecommendationsFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBRecommendations
operation.
This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator()
.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
last_updated_after(DateTime)
/set_last_updated_after(Option<DateTime>)
:
required: falseA filter to include only the recommendations that were updated after this specified time.
last_updated_before(DateTime)
/set_last_updated_before(Option<DateTime>)
:
required: falseA filter to include only the recommendations that were updated before this specified time.
locale(impl Into<String>)
/set_locale(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe language that you choose to return the list of recommendations.
Valid values:
-
en
-
en_UK
-
de
-
es
-
fr
-
id
-
it
-
ja
-
ko
-
pt_BR
-
zh_TW
-
zh_CN
-
filters(Filter)
/set_filters(Option<Vec::<Filter>>)
:
required: falseA filter that specifies one or more recommendations to describe.
Supported Filters:
-
recommendation-id
- Accepts a list of recommendation identifiers. The results list only includes the recommendations whose identifier is one of the specified filter values. -
status
- Accepts a list of recommendation statuses.Valid values:
-
active
- The recommendations which are ready for you to apply. -
pending
- The applied or scheduled recommendations which are in progress. -
resolved
- The recommendations which are completed. -
dismissed
- The recommendations that you dismissed.
The results list only includes the recommendations whose status is one of the specified filter values.
-
-
severity
- Accepts a list of recommendation severities. The results list only includes the recommendations whose severity is one of the specified filter values.Valid values:
-
high
-
medium
-
low
-
informational
-
-
type-id
- Accepts a list of recommendation type identifiers. The results list only includes the recommendations whose type is one of the specified filter values. -
dbi-resource-id
- Accepts a list of database resource identifiers. The results list only includes the recommendations that generated for the specified databases. -
cluster-resource-id
- Accepts a list of cluster resource identifiers. The results list only includes the recommendations that generated for the specified clusters. -
pg-arn
- Accepts a list of parameter group ARNs. The results list only includes the recommendations that generated for the specified parameter groups. -
cluster-pg-arn
- Accepts a list of cluster parameter group ARNs. The results list only includes the recommendations that generated for the specified cluster parameter groups.
-
max_records(i32)
/set_max_records(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe maximum number of recommendations to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified
MaxRecords
value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.marker(impl Into<String>)
/set_marker(Option<String>)
:
required: falseAn optional pagination token provided by a previous
DescribeDBRecommendations
request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified byMaxRecords
.
- On success, responds with
DescribeDbRecommendationsOutput
with field(s):db_recommendations(Option<Vec::<DbRecommendation>>)
:A list of recommendations which is returned from
DescribeDBRecommendations
API request.marker(Option<String>)
:An optional pagination token provided by a previous
DBRecommendationsMessage
request. This token can be used later in aDescribeDBRecomendations
request.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DescribeDBRecommendationsError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn describe_db_security_groups(
&self,
) -> DescribeDBSecurityGroupsFluentBuilder
pub fn describe_db_security_groups( &self, ) -> DescribeDBSecurityGroupsFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBSecurityGroups
operation.
This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator()
.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_security_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_security_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of the DB security group to return details for.
filters(Filter)
/set_filters(Option<Vec::<Filter>>)
:
required: falseThis parameter isn’t currently supported.
max_records(i32)
/set_max_records(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified
MaxRecords
value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.Default: 100
Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
marker(impl Into<String>)
/set_marker(Option<String>)
:
required: falseAn optional pagination token provided by a previous
DescribeDBSecurityGroups
request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified byMaxRecords
.
- On success, responds with
DescribeDbSecurityGroupsOutput
with field(s):marker(Option<String>)
:An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by
MaxRecords
.db_security_groups(Option<Vec::<DbSecurityGroup>>)
:A list of
DBSecurityGroup
instances.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DescribeDBSecurityGroupsError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn describe_db_shard_groups(&self) -> DescribeDBShardGroupsFluentBuilder
pub fn describe_db_shard_groups(&self) -> DescribeDBShardGroupsFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBShardGroups
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_shard_group_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_shard_group_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe user-supplied DB shard group identifier. If this parameter is specified, information for only the specific DB shard group is returned. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
Constraints:
-
If supplied, must match an existing DB shard group identifier.
-
filters(Filter)
/set_filters(Option<Vec::<Filter>>)
:
required: falseA filter that specifies one or more DB shard groups to describe.
marker(impl Into<String>)
/set_marker(Option<String>)
:
required: falseAn optional pagination token provided by a previous
DescribeDBShardGroups
request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified byMaxRecords
.max_records(i32)
/set_max_records(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified
MaxRecords
value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.Default: 100
Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100
- On success, responds with
DescribeDbShardGroupsOutput
with field(s):db_shard_groups(Option<Vec::<DbShardGroup>>)
:Contains a list of DB shard groups for the user.
marker(Option<String>)
:A pagination token that can be used in a later
DescribeDBClusters
request.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DescribeDBShardGroupsError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn describe_db_snapshot_attributes(
&self,
) -> DescribeDBSnapshotAttributesFluentBuilder
pub fn describe_db_snapshot_attributes( &self, ) -> DescribeDBSnapshotAttributesFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBSnapshotAttributes
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_snapshot_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_snapshot_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe identifier for the DB snapshot to describe the attributes for.
- On success, responds with
DescribeDbSnapshotAttributesOutput
with field(s):db_snapshot_attributes_result(Option<DbSnapshotAttributesResult>)
:Contains the results of a successful call to the
DescribeDBSnapshotAttributes
API action.Manual DB snapshot attributes are used to authorize other Amazon Web Services accounts to copy or restore a manual DB snapshot. For more information, see the
ModifyDBSnapshotAttribute
API action.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DescribeDBSnapshotAttributesError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn describe_db_snapshot_tenant_databases(
&self,
) -> DescribeDBSnapshotTenantDatabasesFluentBuilder
pub fn describe_db_snapshot_tenant_databases( &self, ) -> DescribeDBSnapshotTenantDatabasesFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBSnapshotTenantDatabases
operation.
This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator()
.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe ID of the DB instance used to create the DB snapshots. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
Constraints:
-
If supplied, must match the identifier of an existing
DBInstance
.
-
db_snapshot_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_snapshot_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe ID of a DB snapshot that contains the tenant databases to describe. This value is stored as a lowercase string.
Constraints:
-
If you specify this parameter, the value must match the ID of an existing DB snapshot.
-
If you specify an automatic snapshot, you must also specify
SnapshotType
.
-
snapshot_type(impl Into<String>)
/set_snapshot_type(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe type of DB snapshots to be returned. You can specify one of the following values:
-
automated
– All DB snapshots that have been automatically taken by Amazon RDS for my Amazon Web Services account. -
manual
– All DB snapshots that have been taken by my Amazon Web Services account. -
shared
– All manual DB snapshots that have been shared to my Amazon Web Services account. -
public
– All DB snapshots that have been marked as public. -
awsbackup
– All DB snapshots managed by the Amazon Web Services Backup service.
-
filters(Filter)
/set_filters(Option<Vec::<Filter>>)
:
required: falseA filter that specifies one or more tenant databases to describe.
Supported filters:
-
tenant-db-name
- Tenant database names. The results list only includes information about the tenant databases that match these tenant DB names. -
tenant-database-resource-id
- Tenant database resource identifiers. The results list only includes information about the tenant databases contained within the DB snapshots. -
dbi-resource-id
- DB instance resource identifiers. The results list only includes information about snapshots containing tenant databases contained within the DB instances identified by these resource identifiers. -
db-instance-id
- Accepts DB instance identifiers and DB instance Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). -
db-snapshot-id
- Accepts DB snapshot identifiers. -
snapshot-type
- Accepts types of DB snapshots.
-
max_records(i32)
/set_max_records(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified
MaxRecords
value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.marker(impl Into<String>)
/set_marker(Option<String>)
:
required: falseAn optional pagination token provided by a previous
DescribeDBSnapshotTenantDatabases
request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified byMaxRecords
.dbi_resource_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_dbi_resource_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseA specific DB resource identifier to describe.
- On success, responds with
DescribeDbSnapshotTenantDatabasesOutput
with field(s):marker(Option<String>)
:An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by
MaxRecords
.db_snapshot_tenant_databases(Option<Vec::<DbSnapshotTenantDatabase>>)
:A list of DB snapshot tenant databases.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DescribeDBSnapshotTenantDatabasesError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn describe_db_snapshots(&self) -> DescribeDBSnapshotsFluentBuilder
pub fn describe_db_snapshots(&self) -> DescribeDBSnapshotsFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBSnapshots
operation.
This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator()
.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe ID of the DB instance to retrieve the list of DB snapshots for. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
Constraints:
-
If supplied, must match the identifier of an existing DBInstance.
-
db_snapshot_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_snapshot_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseA specific DB snapshot identifier to describe. This value is stored as a lowercase string.
Constraints:
-
If supplied, must match the identifier of an existing DBSnapshot.
-
If this identifier is for an automated snapshot, the
SnapshotType
parameter must also be specified.
-
snapshot_type(impl Into<String>)
/set_snapshot_type(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe type of snapshots to be returned. You can specify one of the following values:
-
automated
- Return all DB snapshots that have been automatically taken by Amazon RDS for my Amazon Web Services account. -
manual
- Return all DB snapshots that have been taken by my Amazon Web Services account. -
shared
- Return all manual DB snapshots that have been shared to my Amazon Web Services account. -
public
- Return all DB snapshots that have been marked as public. -
awsbackup
- Return the DB snapshots managed by the Amazon Web Services Backup service.For information about Amazon Web Services Backup, see the Amazon Web Services Backup Developer Guide.
The
awsbackup
type does not apply to Aurora.
If you don’t specify a
SnapshotType
value, then both automated and manual snapshots are returned. Shared and public DB snapshots are not included in the returned results by default. You can include shared snapshots with these results by enabling theIncludeShared
parameter. You can include public snapshots with these results by enabling theIncludePublic
parameter.The
IncludeShared
andIncludePublic
parameters don’t apply forSnapshotType
values ofmanual
orautomated
. TheIncludePublic
parameter doesn’t apply whenSnapshotType
is set toshared
. TheIncludeShared
parameter doesn’t apply whenSnapshotType
is set topublic
.-
filters(Filter)
/set_filters(Option<Vec::<Filter>>)
:
required: falseA filter that specifies one or more DB snapshots to describe.
Supported filters:
-
db-instance-id
- Accepts DB instance identifiers and DB instance Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). -
db-snapshot-id
- Accepts DB snapshot identifiers. -
dbi-resource-id
- Accepts identifiers of source DB instances. -
snapshot-type
- Accepts types of DB snapshots. -
engine
- Accepts names of database engines.
-
max_records(i32)
/set_max_records(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified
MaxRecords
value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.Default: 100
Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
marker(impl Into<String>)
/set_marker(Option<String>)
:
required: falseAn optional pagination token provided by a previous
DescribeDBSnapshots
request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified byMaxRecords
.include_shared(bool)
/set_include_shared(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to include shared manual DB cluster snapshots from other Amazon Web Services accounts that this Amazon Web Services account has been given permission to copy or restore. By default, these snapshots are not included.
You can give an Amazon Web Services account permission to restore a manual DB snapshot from another Amazon Web Services account by using the
ModifyDBSnapshotAttribute
API action.This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
include_public(bool)
/set_include_public(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to include manual DB cluster snapshots that are public and can be copied or restored by any Amazon Web Services account. By default, the public snapshots are not included.
You can share a manual DB snapshot as public by using the
ModifyDBSnapshotAttribute
API.This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
dbi_resource_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_dbi_resource_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseA specific DB resource ID to describe.
- On success, responds with
DescribeDbSnapshotsOutput
with field(s):marker(Option<String>)
:An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by
MaxRecords
.db_snapshots(Option<Vec::<DbSnapshot>>)
:A list of
DBSnapshot
instances.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DescribeDBSnapshotsError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn describe_db_subnet_groups(&self) -> DescribeDBSubnetGroupsFluentBuilder
pub fn describe_db_subnet_groups(&self) -> DescribeDBSubnetGroupsFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBSubnetGroups
operation.
This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator()
.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_subnet_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_subnet_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of the DB subnet group to return details for.
filters(Filter)
/set_filters(Option<Vec::<Filter>>)
:
required: falseThis parameter isn’t currently supported.
max_records(i32)
/set_max_records(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified
MaxRecords
value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.Default: 100
Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
marker(impl Into<String>)
/set_marker(Option<String>)
:
required: falseAn optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeDBSubnetGroups request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by
MaxRecords
.
- On success, responds with
DescribeDbSubnetGroupsOutput
with field(s):marker(Option<String>)
:An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by
MaxRecords
.db_subnet_groups(Option<Vec::<DbSubnetGroup>>)
:A list of
DBSubnetGroup
instances.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DescribeDBSubnetGroupsError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn describe_engine_default_cluster_parameters(
&self,
) -> DescribeEngineDefaultClusterParametersFluentBuilder
pub fn describe_engine_default_cluster_parameters( &self, ) -> DescribeEngineDefaultClusterParametersFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeEngineDefaultClusterParameters
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_parameter_group_family(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_parameter_group_family(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the DB cluster parameter group family to return engine parameter information for.
filters(Filter)
/set_filters(Option<Vec::<Filter>>)
:
required: falseThis parameter isn’t currently supported.
max_records(i32)
/set_max_records(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified
MaxRecords
value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.Default: 100
Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
marker(impl Into<String>)
/set_marker(Option<String>)
:
required: falseAn optional pagination token provided by a previous
DescribeEngineDefaultClusterParameters
request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified byMaxRecords
.
- On success, responds with
DescribeEngineDefaultClusterParametersOutput
with field(s):engine_defaults(Option<EngineDefaults>)
:Contains the result of a successful invocation of the
DescribeEngineDefaultParameters
action.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DescribeEngineDefaultClusterParametersError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn describe_engine_default_parameters(
&self,
) -> DescribeEngineDefaultParametersFluentBuilder
pub fn describe_engine_default_parameters( &self, ) -> DescribeEngineDefaultParametersFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeEngineDefaultParameters
operation.
This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator()
.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_parameter_group_family(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_parameter_group_family(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the DB parameter group family.
Valid Values:
-
aurora-mysql5.7
-
aurora-mysql8.0
-
aurora-postgresql10
-
aurora-postgresql11
-
aurora-postgresql12
-
aurora-postgresql13
-
aurora-postgresql14
-
custom-oracle-ee-19
-
custom-oracle-ee-cdb-19
-
db2-ae
-
db2-se
-
mariadb10.2
-
mariadb10.3
-
mariadb10.4
-
mariadb10.5
-
mariadb10.6
-
mysql5.7
-
mysql8.0
-
oracle-ee-19
-
oracle-ee-cdb-19
-
oracle-ee-cdb-21
-
oracle-se2-19
-
oracle-se2-cdb-19
-
oracle-se2-cdb-21
-
postgres10
-
postgres11
-
postgres12
-
postgres13
-
postgres14
-
sqlserver-ee-11.0
-
sqlserver-ee-12.0
-
sqlserver-ee-13.0
-
sqlserver-ee-14.0
-
sqlserver-ee-15.0
-
sqlserver-ex-11.0
-
sqlserver-ex-12.0
-
sqlserver-ex-13.0
-
sqlserver-ex-14.0
-
sqlserver-ex-15.0
-
sqlserver-se-11.0
-
sqlserver-se-12.0
-
sqlserver-se-13.0
-
sqlserver-se-14.0
-
sqlserver-se-15.0
-
sqlserver-web-11.0
-
sqlserver-web-12.0
-
sqlserver-web-13.0
-
sqlserver-web-14.0
-
sqlserver-web-15.0
-
filters(Filter)
/set_filters(Option<Vec::<Filter>>)
:
required: falseA filter that specifies one or more parameters to describe.
The only supported filter is
parameter-name
. The results list only includes information about the parameters with these names.max_records(i32)
/set_max_records(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified
MaxRecords
value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.Default: 100
Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
marker(impl Into<String>)
/set_marker(Option<String>)
:
required: falseAn optional pagination token provided by a previous
DescribeEngineDefaultParameters
request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified byMaxRecords
.
- On success, responds with
DescribeEngineDefaultParametersOutput
with field(s):engine_defaults(Option<EngineDefaults>)
:Contains the result of a successful invocation of the
DescribeEngineDefaultParameters
action.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DescribeEngineDefaultParametersError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn describe_event_categories(&self) -> DescribeEventCategoriesFluentBuilder
pub fn describe_event_categories(&self) -> DescribeEventCategoriesFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeEventCategories
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
source_type(impl Into<String>)
/set_source_type(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe type of source that is generating the events. For RDS Proxy events, specify
db-proxy
.Valid Values:
db-instance
|db-cluster
|db-parameter-group
|db-security-group
|db-snapshot
|db-cluster-snapshot
|db-proxy
filters(Filter)
/set_filters(Option<Vec::<Filter>>)
:
required: falseThis parameter isn’t currently supported.
- On success, responds with
DescribeEventCategoriesOutput
with field(s):event_categories_map_list(Option<Vec::<EventCategoriesMap>>)
:A list of
EventCategoriesMap
data types.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DescribeEventCategoriesError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn describe_event_subscriptions(
&self,
) -> DescribeEventSubscriptionsFluentBuilder
pub fn describe_event_subscriptions( &self, ) -> DescribeEventSubscriptionsFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeEventSubscriptions
operation.
This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator()
.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
subscription_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_subscription_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of the RDS event notification subscription you want to describe.
filters(Filter)
/set_filters(Option<Vec::<Filter>>)
:
required: falseThis parameter isn’t currently supported.
max_records(i32)
/set_max_records(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified
MaxRecords
value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.Default: 100
Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
marker(impl Into<String>)
/set_marker(Option<String>)
:
required: falseAn optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeOrderableDBInstanceOptions request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by
MaxRecords
.
- On success, responds with
DescribeEventSubscriptionsOutput
with field(s):marker(Option<String>)
:An optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeOrderableDBInstanceOptions request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by
MaxRecords
.event_subscriptions_list(Option<Vec::<EventSubscription>>)
:A list of EventSubscriptions data types.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DescribeEventSubscriptionsError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn describe_events(&self) -> DescribeEventsFluentBuilder
pub fn describe_events(&self) -> DescribeEventsFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeEvents
operation.
This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator()
.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
source_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_source_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe identifier of the event source for which events are returned. If not specified, then all sources are included in the response.
Constraints:
-
If
SourceIdentifier
is supplied,SourceType
must also be provided. -
If the source type is a DB instance, a
DBInstanceIdentifier
value must be supplied. -
If the source type is a DB cluster, a
DBClusterIdentifier
value must be supplied. -
If the source type is a DB parameter group, a
DBParameterGroupName
value must be supplied. -
If the source type is a DB security group, a
DBSecurityGroupName
value must be supplied. -
If the source type is a DB snapshot, a
DBSnapshotIdentifier
value must be supplied. -
If the source type is a DB cluster snapshot, a
DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier
value must be supplied. -
If the source type is an RDS Proxy, a
DBProxyName
value must be supplied. -
Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.
-
source_type(SourceType)
/set_source_type(Option<SourceType>)
:
required: falseThe event source to retrieve events for. If no value is specified, all events are returned.
start_time(DateTime)
/set_start_time(Option<DateTime>)
:
required: falseThe beginning of the time interval to retrieve events for, specified in ISO 8601 format. For more information about ISO 8601, go to the ISO8601 Wikipedia page.
Example: 2009-07-08T18:00Z
end_time(DateTime)
/set_end_time(Option<DateTime>)
:
required: falseThe end of the time interval for which to retrieve events, specified in ISO 8601 format. For more information about ISO 8601, go to the ISO8601 Wikipedia page.
Example: 2009-07-08T18:00Z
duration(i32)
/set_duration(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe number of minutes to retrieve events for.
Default: 60
event_categories(impl Into<String>)
/set_event_categories(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseA list of event categories that trigger notifications for a event notification subscription.
filters(Filter)
/set_filters(Option<Vec::<Filter>>)
:
required: falseThis parameter isn’t currently supported.
max_records(i32)
/set_max_records(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified
MaxRecords
value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.Default: 100
Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
marker(impl Into<String>)
/set_marker(Option<String>)
:
required: falseAn optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeEvents request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by
MaxRecords
.
- On success, responds with
DescribeEventsOutput
with field(s):marker(Option<String>)
:An optional pagination token provided by a previous Events request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by
MaxRecords
.events(Option<Vec::<Event>>)
:A list of
Event
instances.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DescribeEventsError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn describe_export_tasks(&self) -> DescribeExportTasksFluentBuilder
pub fn describe_export_tasks(&self) -> DescribeExportTasksFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeExportTasks
operation.
This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator()
.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
export_task_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_export_task_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe identifier of the snapshot or cluster export task to be described.
source_arn(impl Into<String>)
/set_source_arn(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the snapshot or cluster exported to Amazon S3.
filters(Filter)
/set_filters(Option<Vec::<Filter>>)
:
required: falseFilters specify one or more snapshot or cluster exports to describe. The filters are specified as name-value pairs that define what to include in the output. Filter names and values are case-sensitive.
Supported filters include the following:
-
export-task-identifier
- An identifier for the snapshot or cluster export task. -
s3-bucket
- The Amazon S3 bucket the data is exported to. -
source-arn
- The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the snapshot or cluster exported to Amazon S3. -
status
- The status of the export task. Must be lowercase. Valid statuses are the following:-
canceled
-
canceling
-
complete
-
failed
-
in_progress
-
starting
-
-
marker(impl Into<String>)
/set_marker(Option<String>)
:
required: falseAn optional pagination token provided by a previous
DescribeExportTasks
request. If you specify this parameter, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by theMaxRecords
parameter.max_records(i32)
/set_max_records(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response. You can use the marker in a later
DescribeExportTasks
request to retrieve the remaining results.Default: 100
Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
source_type(ExportSourceType)
/set_source_type(Option<ExportSourceType>)
:
required: falseThe type of source for the export.
- On success, responds with
DescribeExportTasksOutput
with field(s):marker(Option<String>)
:A pagination token that can be used in a later
DescribeExportTasks
request. A marker is used for pagination to identify the location to begin output for the next response ofDescribeExportTasks
.export_tasks(Option<Vec::<ExportTask>>)
:Information about an export of a snapshot or cluster to Amazon S3.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DescribeExportTasksError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn describe_global_clusters(&self) -> DescribeGlobalClustersFluentBuilder
pub fn describe_global_clusters(&self) -> DescribeGlobalClustersFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeGlobalClusters
operation.
This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator()
.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
global_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_global_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe user-supplied DB cluster identifier. If this parameter is specified, information from only the specific DB cluster is returned. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
Constraints:
-
If supplied, must match an existing DBClusterIdentifier.
-
filters(Filter)
/set_filters(Option<Vec::<Filter>>)
:
required: falseA filter that specifies one or more global database clusters to describe. This parameter is case-sensitive.
Currently, the only supported filter is
region
.If used, the request returns information about any global cluster with at least one member (primary or secondary) in the specified Amazon Web Services Regions.
max_records(i32)
/set_max_records(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified
MaxRecords
value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.Default: 100
Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
marker(impl Into<String>)
/set_marker(Option<String>)
:
required: falseAn optional pagination token provided by a previous
DescribeGlobalClusters
request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified byMaxRecords
.
- On success, responds with
DescribeGlobalClustersOutput
with field(s):marker(Option<String>)
:An optional pagination token provided by a previous
DescribeGlobalClusters
request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified byMaxRecords
.global_clusters(Option<Vec::<GlobalCluster>>)
:The list of global clusters returned by this request.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DescribeGlobalClustersError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn describe_integrations(&self) -> DescribeIntegrationsFluentBuilder
pub fn describe_integrations(&self) -> DescribeIntegrationsFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeIntegrations
operation.
This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator()
.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
integration_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_integration_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe unique identifier of the integration.
filters(Filter)
/set_filters(Option<Vec::<Filter>>)
:
required: falseA filter that specifies one or more resources to return.
max_records(i32)
/set_max_records(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified
MaxRecords
value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.Default: 100
Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
marker(impl Into<String>)
/set_marker(Option<String>)
:
required: falseAn optional pagination token provided by a previous
DescribeIntegrations
request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified byMaxRecords
.
- On success, responds with
DescribeIntegrationsOutput
with field(s):marker(Option<String>)
:A pagination token that can be used in a later
DescribeIntegrations
request.integrations(Option<Vec::<Integration>>)
:A list of integrations.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DescribeIntegrationsError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn describe_option_group_options(
&self,
) -> DescribeOptionGroupOptionsFluentBuilder
pub fn describe_option_group_options( &self, ) -> DescribeOptionGroupOptionsFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeOptionGroupOptions
operation.
This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator()
.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
engine_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_engine_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the engine to describe options for.
Valid Values:
-
db2-ae
-
db2-se
-
mariadb
-
mysql
-
oracle-ee
-
oracle-ee-cdb
-
oracle-se2
-
oracle-se2-cdb
-
postgres
-
sqlserver-ee
-
sqlserver-se
-
sqlserver-ex
-
sqlserver-web
-
major_engine_version(impl Into<String>)
/set_major_engine_version(Option<String>)
:
required: falseIf specified, filters the results to include only options for the specified major engine version.
filters(Filter)
/set_filters(Option<Vec::<Filter>>)
:
required: falseThis parameter isn’t currently supported.
max_records(i32)
/set_max_records(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified
MaxRecords
value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.Default: 100
Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
marker(impl Into<String>)
/set_marker(Option<String>)
:
required: falseAn optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by
MaxRecords
.
- On success, responds with
DescribeOptionGroupOptionsOutput
with field(s):option_group_options(Option<Vec::<OptionGroupOption>>)
:List of available option group options.
marker(Option<String>)
:An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by
MaxRecords
.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DescribeOptionGroupOptionsError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn describe_option_groups(&self) -> DescribeOptionGroupsFluentBuilder
pub fn describe_option_groups(&self) -> DescribeOptionGroupsFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeOptionGroups
operation.
This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator()
.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
option_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_option_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of the option group to describe. Can’t be supplied together with EngineName or MajorEngineVersion.
filters(Filter)
/set_filters(Option<Vec::<Filter>>)
:
required: falseThis parameter isn’t currently supported.
marker(impl Into<String>)
/set_marker(Option<String>)
:
required: falseAn optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeOptionGroups request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by
MaxRecords
.max_records(i32)
/set_max_records(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified
MaxRecords
value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.Default: 100
Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
engine_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_engine_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseA filter to only include option groups associated with this database engine.
Valid Values:
-
db2-ae
-
db2-se
-
mariadb
-
mysql
-
oracle-ee
-
oracle-ee-cdb
-
oracle-se2
-
oracle-se2-cdb
-
postgres
-
sqlserver-ee
-
sqlserver-se
-
sqlserver-ex
-
sqlserver-web
-
major_engine_version(impl Into<String>)
/set_major_engine_version(Option<String>)
:
required: falseFilters the list of option groups to only include groups associated with a specific database engine version. If specified, then EngineName must also be specified.
- On success, responds with
DescribeOptionGroupsOutput
with field(s):option_groups_list(Option<Vec::<OptionGroup>>)
:List of option groups.
marker(Option<String>)
:An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by
MaxRecords
.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DescribeOptionGroupsError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn describe_orderable_db_instance_options(
&self,
) -> DescribeOrderableDBInstanceOptionsFluentBuilder
pub fn describe_orderable_db_instance_options( &self, ) -> DescribeOrderableDBInstanceOptionsFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeOrderableDBInstanceOptions
operation.
This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator()
.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
engine(impl Into<String>)
/set_engine(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the database engine to describe DB instance options for.
Valid Values:
-
aurora-mysql
-
aurora-postgresql
-
custom-oracle-ee
-
custom-oracle-ee-cdb
-
custom-oracle-se2
-
custom-oracle-se2-cdb
-
db2-ae
-
db2-se
-
mariadb
-
mysql
-
oracle-ee
-
oracle-ee-cdb
-
oracle-se2
-
oracle-se2-cdb
-
postgres
-
sqlserver-ee
-
sqlserver-se
-
sqlserver-ex
-
sqlserver-web
-
engine_version(impl Into<String>)
/set_engine_version(Option<String>)
:
required: falseA filter to include only the available options for the specified engine version.
db_instance_class(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_instance_class(Option<String>)
:
required: falseA filter to include only the available options for the specified DB instance class.
license_model(impl Into<String>)
/set_license_model(Option<String>)
:
required: falseA filter to include only the available options for the specified license model.
RDS Custom supports only the BYOL licensing model.
availability_zone_group(impl Into<String>)
/set_availability_zone_group(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Availability Zone group associated with a Local Zone. Specify this parameter to retrieve available options for the Local Zones in the group.
Omit this parameter to show the available options in the specified Amazon Web Services Region.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
vpc(bool)
/set_vpc(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to show only VPC or non-VPC offerings. RDS Custom supports only VPC offerings.
RDS Custom supports only VPC offerings. If you describe non-VPC offerings for RDS Custom, the output shows VPC offerings.
filters(Filter)
/set_filters(Option<Vec::<Filter>>)
:
required: falseThis parameter isn’t currently supported.
max_records(i32)
/set_max_records(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified
MaxRecords
value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.Default: 100
Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 1000.
marker(impl Into<String>)
/set_marker(Option<String>)
:
required: falseAn optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeOrderableDBInstanceOptions request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by
MaxRecords
.
- On success, responds with
DescribeOrderableDbInstanceOptionsOutput
with field(s):orderable_db_instance_options(Option<Vec::<OrderableDbInstanceOption>>)
:An
OrderableDBInstanceOption
structure containing information about orderable options for the DB instance.marker(Option<String>)
:An optional pagination token provided by a previous OrderableDBInstanceOptions request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by
MaxRecords
.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DescribeOrderableDBInstanceOptionsError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn describe_pending_maintenance_actions(
&self,
) -> DescribePendingMaintenanceActionsFluentBuilder
pub fn describe_pending_maintenance_actions( &self, ) -> DescribePendingMaintenanceActionsFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribePendingMaintenanceActions
operation.
This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator()
.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
resource_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_resource_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe ARN of a resource to return pending maintenance actions for.
filters(Filter)
/set_filters(Option<Vec::<Filter>>)
:
required: falseA filter that specifies one or more resources to return pending maintenance actions for.
Supported filters:
-
db-cluster-id
- Accepts DB cluster identifiers and DB cluster Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). The results list only includes pending maintenance actions for the DB clusters identified by these ARNs. -
db-instance-id
- Accepts DB instance identifiers and DB instance ARNs. The results list only includes pending maintenance actions for the DB instances identified by these ARNs.
-
marker(impl Into<String>)
/set_marker(Option<String>)
:
required: falseAn optional pagination token provided by a previous
DescribePendingMaintenanceActions
request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to a number of records specified byMaxRecords
.max_records(i32)
/set_max_records(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified
MaxRecords
value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.Default: 100
Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
- On success, responds with
DescribePendingMaintenanceActionsOutput
with field(s):pending_maintenance_actions(Option<Vec::<ResourcePendingMaintenanceActions>>)
:A list of the pending maintenance actions for the resource.
marker(Option<String>)
:An optional pagination token provided by a previous
DescribePendingMaintenanceActions
request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to a number of records specified byMaxRecords
.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DescribePendingMaintenanceActionsError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn describe_reserved_db_instances(
&self,
) -> DescribeReservedDBInstancesFluentBuilder
pub fn describe_reserved_db_instances( &self, ) -> DescribeReservedDBInstancesFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeReservedDBInstances
operation.
This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator()
.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
reserved_db_instance_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_reserved_db_instance_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe reserved DB instance identifier filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the reservation that matches the specified reservation ID.
reserved_db_instances_offering_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_reserved_db_instances_offering_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe offering identifier filter value. Specify this parameter to show only purchased reservations matching the specified offering identifier.
db_instance_class(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_instance_class(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe DB instance class filter value. Specify this parameter to show only those reservations matching the specified DB instances class.
duration(impl Into<String>)
/set_duration(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe duration filter value, specified in years or seconds. Specify this parameter to show only reservations for this duration.
Valid Values:
1 | 3 | 31536000 | 94608000
product_description(impl Into<String>)
/set_product_description(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe product description filter value. Specify this parameter to show only those reservations matching the specified product description.
offering_type(impl Into<String>)
/set_offering_type(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe offering type filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the available offerings matching the specified offering type.
Valid Values:
“Partial Upfront” | “All Upfront” | “No Upfront”
multi_az(bool)
/set_multi_az(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to show only those reservations that support Multi-AZ.
lease_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_lease_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe lease identifier filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the reservation that matches the specified lease ID.
Amazon Web Services Support might request the lease ID for an issue related to a reserved DB instance.
filters(Filter)
/set_filters(Option<Vec::<Filter>>)
:
required: falseThis parameter isn’t currently supported.
max_records(i32)
/set_max_records(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe maximum number of records to include in the response. If more than the
MaxRecords
value is available, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.Default: 100
Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
marker(impl Into<String>)
/set_marker(Option<String>)
:
required: falseAn optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by
MaxRecords
.
- On success, responds with
DescribeReservedDbInstancesOutput
with field(s):marker(Option<String>)
:An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by
MaxRecords
.reserved_db_instances(Option<Vec::<ReservedDbInstance>>)
:A list of reserved DB instances.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DescribeReservedDBInstancesError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn describe_reserved_db_instances_offerings(
&self,
) -> DescribeReservedDBInstancesOfferingsFluentBuilder
pub fn describe_reserved_db_instances_offerings( &self, ) -> DescribeReservedDBInstancesOfferingsFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeReservedDBInstancesOfferings
operation.
This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator()
.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
reserved_db_instances_offering_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_reserved_db_instances_offering_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe offering identifier filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the available offering that matches the specified reservation identifier.
Example:
438012d3-4052-4cc7-b2e3-8d3372e0e706
db_instance_class(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_instance_class(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe DB instance class filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the available offerings matching the specified DB instance class.
duration(impl Into<String>)
/set_duration(Option<String>)
:
required: falseDuration filter value, specified in years or seconds. Specify this parameter to show only reservations for this duration.
Valid Values:
1 | 3 | 31536000 | 94608000
product_description(impl Into<String>)
/set_product_description(Option<String>)
:
required: falseProduct description filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the available offerings that contain the specified product description.
The results show offerings that partially match the filter value.
offering_type(impl Into<String>)
/set_offering_type(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe offering type filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the available offerings matching the specified offering type.
Valid Values:
“Partial Upfront” | “All Upfront” | “No Upfront”
multi_az(bool)
/set_multi_az(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to show only those reservations that support Multi-AZ.
filters(Filter)
/set_filters(Option<Vec::<Filter>>)
:
required: falseThis parameter isn’t currently supported.
max_records(i32)
/set_max_records(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe maximum number of records to include in the response. If more than the
MaxRecords
value is available, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.Default: 100
Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
marker(impl Into<String>)
/set_marker(Option<String>)
:
required: falseAn optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by
MaxRecords
.
- On success, responds with
DescribeReservedDbInstancesOfferingsOutput
with field(s):marker(Option<String>)
:An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by
MaxRecords
.reserved_db_instances_offerings(Option<Vec::<ReservedDbInstancesOffering>>)
:A list of reserved DB instance offerings.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DescribeReservedDBInstancesOfferingsError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn describe_source_regions(&self) -> DescribeSourceRegionsFluentBuilder
pub fn describe_source_regions(&self) -> DescribeSourceRegionsFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeSourceRegions
operation.
This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator()
.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
region_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_region_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe source Amazon Web Services Region name. For example,
us-east-1
.Constraints:
-
Must specify a valid Amazon Web Services Region name.
-
max_records(i32)
/set_max_records(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified
MaxRecords
value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.Default: 100
Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
marker(impl Into<String>)
/set_marker(Option<String>)
:
required: falseAn optional pagination token provided by a previous
DescribeSourceRegions
request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified byMaxRecords
.filters(Filter)
/set_filters(Option<Vec::<Filter>>)
:
required: falseThis parameter isn’t currently supported.
- On success, responds with
DescribeSourceRegionsOutput
with field(s):marker(Option<String>)
:An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by
MaxRecords
.source_regions(Option<Vec::<SourceRegion>>)
:A list of
SourceRegion
instances that contains each source Amazon Web Services Region that the current Amazon Web Services Region can get a read replica or a DB snapshot from.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DescribeSourceRegionsError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn describe_tenant_databases(&self) -> DescribeTenantDatabasesFluentBuilder
pub fn describe_tenant_databases(&self) -> DescribeTenantDatabasesFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeTenantDatabases
operation.
This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator()
.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe user-supplied DB instance identifier, which must match the identifier of an existing instance owned by the Amazon Web Services account. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
tenant_db_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_tenant_db_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe user-supplied tenant database name, which must match the name of an existing tenant database on the specified DB instance owned by your Amazon Web Services account. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
filters(Filter)
/set_filters(Option<Vec::<Filter>>)
:
required: falseA filter that specifies one or more database tenants to describe.
Supported filters:
-
tenant-db-name
- Tenant database names. The results list only includes information about the tenant databases that match these tenant DB names. -
tenant-database-resource-id
- Tenant database resource identifiers. -
dbi-resource-id
- DB instance resource identifiers. The results list only includes information about the tenants contained within the DB instances identified by these resource identifiers.
-
marker(impl Into<String>)
/set_marker(Option<String>)
:
required: falseAn optional pagination token provided by a previous
DescribeTenantDatabases
request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified byMaxRecords
.max_records(i32)
/set_max_records(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified
MaxRecords
value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.
- On success, responds with
DescribeTenantDatabasesOutput
with field(s):marker(Option<String>)
:An optional pagination token provided by a previous
DescribeTenantDatabases
request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified byMaxRecords
.tenant_databases(Option<Vec::<TenantDatabase>>)
:An array of the tenant databases requested by the
DescribeTenantDatabases
operation.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DescribeTenantDatabasesError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn describe_valid_db_instance_modifications(
&self,
) -> DescribeValidDBInstanceModificationsFluentBuilder
pub fn describe_valid_db_instance_modifications( &self, ) -> DescribeValidDBInstanceModificationsFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeValidDBInstanceModifications
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe customer identifier or the ARN of your DB instance.
- On success, responds with
DescribeValidDbInstanceModificationsOutput
with field(s):valid_db_instance_modifications_message(Option<ValidDbInstanceModificationsMessage>)
:Information about valid modifications that you can make to your DB instance. Contains the result of a successful call to the
DescribeValidDBInstanceModifications
action. You can use this information when you callModifyDBInstance
.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DescribeValidDBInstanceModificationsError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn disable_http_endpoint(&self) -> DisableHttpEndpointFluentBuilder
pub fn disable_http_endpoint(&self) -> DisableHttpEndpointFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DisableHttpEndpoint
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
resource_arn(impl Into<String>)
/set_resource_arn(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the DB cluster.
- On success, responds with
DisableHttpEndpointOutput
with field(s):resource_arn(Option<String>)
:The ARN of the DB cluster.
http_endpoint_enabled(Option<bool>)
:Indicates whether the HTTP endpoint is enabled or disabled for the DB cluster.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DisableHttpEndpointError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn download_db_log_file_portion(
&self,
) -> DownloadDBLogFilePortionFluentBuilder
pub fn download_db_log_file_portion( &self, ) -> DownloadDBLogFilePortionFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the DownloadDBLogFilePortion
operation.
This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator()
.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe customer-assigned name of the DB instance that contains the log files you want to list.
Constraints:
-
Must match the identifier of an existing DBInstance.
-
log_file_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_log_file_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the log file to be downloaded.
marker(impl Into<String>)
/set_marker(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe pagination token provided in the previous request or “0”. If the Marker parameter is specified the response includes only records beyond the marker until the end of the file or up to NumberOfLines.
number_of_lines(i32)
/set_number_of_lines(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe number of lines to download. If the number of lines specified results in a file over 1 MB in size, the file is truncated at 1 MB in size.
If the NumberOfLines parameter is specified, then the block of lines returned can be from the beginning or the end of the log file, depending on the value of the Marker parameter.
-
If neither Marker or NumberOfLines are specified, the entire log file is returned up to a maximum of 10000 lines, starting with the most recent log entries first.
-
If NumberOfLines is specified and Marker isn’t specified, then the most recent lines from the end of the log file are returned.
-
If Marker is specified as “0”, then the specified number of lines from the beginning of the log file are returned.
-
You can download the log file in blocks of lines by specifying the size of the block using the NumberOfLines parameter, and by specifying a value of “0” for the Marker parameter in your first request. Include the Marker value returned in the response as the Marker value for the next request, continuing until the AdditionalDataPending response element returns false.
-
- On success, responds with
DownloadDbLogFilePortionOutput
with field(s):log_file_data(Option<String>)
:Entries from the specified log file.
marker(Option<String>)
:A pagination token that can be used in a later
DownloadDBLogFilePortion
request.additional_data_pending(Option<bool>)
:A Boolean value that, if true, indicates there is more data to be downloaded.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<DownloadDBLogFilePortionError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn enable_http_endpoint(&self) -> EnableHttpEndpointFluentBuilder
pub fn enable_http_endpoint(&self) -> EnableHttpEndpointFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the EnableHttpEndpoint
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
resource_arn(impl Into<String>)
/set_resource_arn(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the DB cluster.
- On success, responds with
EnableHttpEndpointOutput
with field(s):resource_arn(Option<String>)
:The ARN of the DB cluster.
http_endpoint_enabled(Option<bool>)
:Indicates whether the HTTP endpoint is enabled or disabled for the DB cluster.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<EnableHttpEndpointError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn failover_db_cluster(&self) -> FailoverDBClusterFluentBuilder
pub fn failover_db_cluster(&self) -> FailoverDBClusterFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the FailoverDBCluster
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe identifier of the DB cluster to force a failover for. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
Constraints:
-
Must match the identifier of an existing DB cluster.
-
target_db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_target_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of the DB instance to promote to the primary DB instance.
Specify the DB instance identifier for an Aurora Replica or a Multi-AZ readable standby in the DB cluster, for example
mydbcluster-replica1
.This setting isn’t supported for RDS for MySQL Multi-AZ DB clusters.
- On success, responds with
FailoverDbClusterOutput
with field(s):db_cluster(Option<DbCluster>)
:Contains the details of an Amazon Aurora DB cluster or Multi-AZ DB cluster.
For an Amazon Aurora DB cluster, this data type is used as a response element in the operations
CreateDBCluster
,DeleteDBCluster
,DescribeDBClusters
,FailoverDBCluster
,ModifyDBCluster
,PromoteReadReplicaDBCluster
,RestoreDBClusterFromS3
,RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot
,RestoreDBClusterToPointInTime
,StartDBCluster
, andStopDBCluster
.For a Multi-AZ DB cluster, this data type is used as a response element in the operations
CreateDBCluster
,DeleteDBCluster
,DescribeDBClusters
,FailoverDBCluster
,ModifyDBCluster
,RebootDBCluster
,RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot
, andRestoreDBClusterToPointInTime
.For more information on Amazon Aurora DB clusters, see What is Amazon Aurora? in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
For more information on Multi-AZ DB clusters, see Multi-AZ deployments with two readable standby DB instances in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<FailoverDBClusterError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn failover_global_cluster(&self) -> FailoverGlobalClusterFluentBuilder
pub fn failover_global_cluster(&self) -> FailoverGlobalClusterFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the FailoverGlobalCluster
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
global_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_global_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe identifier of the global database cluster (Aurora global database) this operation should apply to. The identifier is the unique key assigned by the user when the Aurora global database is created. In other words, it’s the name of the Aurora global database.
Constraints:
-
Must match the identifier of an existing global database cluster.
-
target_db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_target_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe identifier of the secondary Aurora DB cluster that you want to promote to the primary for the global database cluster. Use the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the identifier so that Aurora can locate the cluster in its Amazon Web Services Region.
allow_data_loss(bool)
/set_allow_data_loss(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to allow data loss for this global database cluster operation. Allowing data loss triggers a global failover operation.
If you don’t specify
AllowDataLoss
, the global database cluster operation defaults to a switchover.Constraints:
-
Can’t be specified together with the
Switchover
parameter.
-
switchover(bool)
/set_switchover(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to switch over this global database cluster.
Constraints:
-
Can’t be specified together with the
AllowDataLoss
parameter.
-
- On success, responds with
FailoverGlobalClusterOutput
with field(s):global_cluster(Option<GlobalCluster>)
:A data type representing an Aurora global database.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<FailoverGlobalClusterError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Constructs a fluent builder for the ListTagsForResource
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
resource_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_resource_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe Amazon RDS resource with tags to be listed. This value is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN). For information about creating an ARN, see Constructing an ARN for Amazon RDS in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
filters(Filter)
/set_filters(Option<Vec::<Filter>>)
:
required: falseThis parameter isn’t currently supported.
- On success, responds with
ListTagsForResourceOutput
with field(s):tag_list(Option<Vec::<Tag>>)
:List of tags returned by the
ListTagsForResource
operation.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<ListTagsForResourceError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn modify_activity_stream(&self) -> ModifyActivityStreamFluentBuilder
pub fn modify_activity_stream(&self) -> ModifyActivityStreamFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the ModifyActivityStream
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
resource_arn(impl Into<String>)
/set_resource_arn(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the RDS for Oracle or Microsoft SQL Server DB instance. For example,
arn:aws:rds:us-east-1:12345667890:db:my-orcl-db
.audit_policy_state(AuditPolicyState)
/set_audit_policy_state(Option<AuditPolicyState>)
:
required: falseThe audit policy state. When a policy is unlocked, it is read/write. When it is locked, it is read-only. You can edit your audit policy only when the activity stream is unlocked or stopped.
- On success, responds with
ModifyActivityStreamOutput
with field(s):kms_key_id(Option<String>)
:The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for encryption of messages in the database activity stream.
kinesis_stream_name(Option<String>)
:The name of the Amazon Kinesis data stream to be used for the database activity stream.
status(Option<ActivityStreamStatus>)
:The status of the modification to the database activity stream.
mode(Option<ActivityStreamMode>)
:The mode of the database activity stream.
engine_native_audit_fields_included(Option<bool>)
:Indicates whether engine-native audit fields are included in the database activity stream.
policy_status(Option<ActivityStreamPolicyStatus>)
:The status of the modification to the policy state of the database activity stream.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<ModifyActivityStreamError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn modify_certificates(&self) -> ModifyCertificatesFluentBuilder
pub fn modify_certificates(&self) -> ModifyCertificatesFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the ModifyCertificates
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
certificate_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_certificate_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe new default certificate identifier to override the current one with.
To determine the valid values, use the
describe-certificates
CLI command or theDescribeCertificates
API operation.remove_customer_override(bool)
/set_remove_customer_override(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to remove the override for the default certificate. If the override is removed, the default certificate is the system default.
- On success, responds with
ModifyCertificatesOutput
with field(s):certificate(Option<Certificate>)
:A CA certificate for an Amazon Web Services account.
For more information, see Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB instance in the Amazon RDS User Guide and Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB cluster in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<ModifyCertificatesError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn modify_current_db_cluster_capacity(
&self,
) -> ModifyCurrentDBClusterCapacityFluentBuilder
pub fn modify_current_db_cluster_capacity( &self, ) -> ModifyCurrentDBClusterCapacityFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the ModifyCurrentDBClusterCapacity
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe DB cluster identifier for the cluster being modified. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
Constraints:
-
Must match the identifier of an existing DB cluster.
-
capacity(i32)
/set_capacity(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe DB cluster capacity.
When you change the capacity of a paused Aurora Serverless v1 DB cluster, it automatically resumes.
Constraints:
-
For Aurora MySQL, valid capacity values are
1
,2
,4
,8
,16
,32
,64
,128
, and256
. -
For Aurora PostgreSQL, valid capacity values are
2
,4
,8
,16
,32
,64
,192
, and384
.
-
seconds_before_timeout(i32)
/set_seconds_before_timeout(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe amount of time, in seconds, that Aurora Serverless v1 tries to find a scaling point to perform seamless scaling before enforcing the timeout action. The default is 300.
Specify a value between 10 and 600 seconds.
timeout_action(impl Into<String>)
/set_timeout_action(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe action to take when the timeout is reached, either
ForceApplyCapacityChange
orRollbackCapacityChange
.ForceApplyCapacityChange
, the default, sets the capacity to the specified value as soon as possible.RollbackCapacityChange
ignores the capacity change if a scaling point isn’t found in the timeout period.
- On success, responds with
ModifyCurrentDbClusterCapacityOutput
with field(s):db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:A user-supplied DB cluster identifier. This identifier is the unique key that identifies a DB cluster.
pending_capacity(Option<i32>)
:A value that specifies the capacity that the DB cluster scales to next.
current_capacity(Option<i32>)
:The current capacity of the DB cluster.
seconds_before_timeout(Option<i32>)
:The number of seconds before a call to
ModifyCurrentDBClusterCapacity
times out.timeout_action(Option<String>)
:The timeout action of a call to
ModifyCurrentDBClusterCapacity
, eitherForceApplyCapacityChange
orRollbackCapacityChange
.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<ModifyCurrentDBClusterCapacityError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn modify_custom_db_engine_version(
&self,
) -> ModifyCustomDBEngineVersionFluentBuilder
pub fn modify_custom_db_engine_version( &self, ) -> ModifyCustomDBEngineVersionFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the ModifyCustomDBEngineVersion
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
engine(impl Into<String>)
/set_engine(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe database engine. RDS Custom for Oracle supports the following values:
-
custom-oracle-ee
-
custom-oracle-ee-cdb
-
custom-oracle-se2
-
custom-oracle-se2-cdb
-
engine_version(impl Into<String>)
/set_engine_version(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe custom engine version (CEV) that you want to modify. This option is required for RDS Custom for Oracle, but optional for Amazon RDS. The combination of
Engine
andEngineVersion
is unique per customer per Amazon Web Services Region.description(impl Into<String>)
/set_description(Option<String>)
:
required: falseAn optional description of your CEV.
status(CustomEngineVersionStatus)
/set_status(Option<CustomEngineVersionStatus>)
:
required: falseThe availability status to be assigned to the CEV. Valid values are as follows:
- available
-
You can use this CEV to create a new RDS Custom DB instance.
- inactive
-
You can create a new RDS Custom instance by restoring a DB snapshot with this CEV. You can’t patch or create new instances with this CEV.
You can change any status to any status. A typical reason to change status is to prevent the accidental use of a CEV, or to make a deprecated CEV eligible for use again. For example, you might change the status of your CEV from
available
toinactive
, and frominactive
back toavailable
. To change the availability status of the CEV, it must not currently be in use by an RDS Custom instance, snapshot, or automated backup.
- On success, responds with
ModifyCustomDbEngineVersionOutput
with field(s):engine(Option<String>)
:The name of the database engine.
engine_version(Option<String>)
:The version number of the database engine.
db_parameter_group_family(Option<String>)
:The name of the DB parameter group family for the database engine.
db_engine_description(Option<String>)
:The description of the database engine.
db_engine_version_description(Option<String>)
:The description of the database engine version.
default_character_set(Option<CharacterSet>)
:The default character set for new instances of this engine version, if the
CharacterSetName
parameter of the CreateDBInstance API isn’t specified.image(Option<CustomDbEngineVersionAmi>)
:The EC2 image
db_engine_media_type(Option<String>)
:A value that indicates the source media provider of the AMI based on the usage operation. Applicable for RDS Custom for SQL Server.
supported_character_sets(Option<Vec::<CharacterSet>>)
:A list of the character sets supported by this engine for the
CharacterSetName
parameter of theCreateDBInstance
operation.supported_nchar_character_sets(Option<Vec::<CharacterSet>>)
:A list of the character sets supported by the Oracle DB engine for the
NcharCharacterSetName
parameter of theCreateDBInstance
operation.valid_upgrade_target(Option<Vec::<UpgradeTarget>>)
:A list of engine versions that this database engine version can be upgraded to.
supported_timezones(Option<Vec::<Timezone>>)
:A list of the time zones supported by this engine for the
Timezone
parameter of theCreateDBInstance
action.exportable_log_types(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:The types of logs that the database engine has available for export to CloudWatch Logs.
supports_log_exports_to_cloudwatch_logs(Option<bool>)
:Indicates whether the engine version supports exporting the log types specified by ExportableLogTypes to CloudWatch Logs.
supports_read_replica(Option<bool>)
:Indicates whether the database engine version supports read replicas.
supported_engine_modes(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:A list of the supported DB engine modes.
supported_feature_names(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:A list of features supported by the DB engine.
The supported features vary by DB engine and DB engine version.
To determine the supported features for a specific DB engine and DB engine version using the CLI, use the following command:
aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine <engine_name> –engine-version <engine_version></engine_version> </engine_name>
For example, to determine the supported features for RDS for PostgreSQL version 13.3 using the CLI, use the following command:
aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine postgres –engine-version 13.3
The supported features are listed under
SupportedFeatureNames
in the output.status(Option<String>)
:The status of the DB engine version, either
available
ordeprecated
.supports_parallel_query(Option<bool>)
:Indicates whether you can use Aurora parallel query with a specific DB engine version.
supports_global_databases(Option<bool>)
:Indicates whether you can use Aurora global databases with a specific DB engine version.
major_engine_version(Option<String>)
:The major engine version of the CEV.
database_installation_files_s3_bucket_name(Option<String>)
:The name of the Amazon S3 bucket that contains your database installation files.
database_installation_files_s3_prefix(Option<String>)
:The Amazon S3 directory that contains the database installation files. If not specified, then no prefix is assumed.
db_engine_version_arn(Option<String>)
:The ARN of the custom engine version.
kms_key_id(Option<String>)
:The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for an encrypted CEV. This parameter is required for RDS Custom, but optional for Amazon RDS.
create_time(Option<DateTime>)
:The creation time of the DB engine version.
tag_list(Option<Vec::<Tag>>)
:A list of tags.
For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide or Tagging Amazon Aurora and Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
supports_babelfish(Option<bool>)
:Indicates whether the engine version supports Babelfish for Aurora PostgreSQL.
custom_db_engine_version_manifest(Option<String>)
:JSON string that lists the installation files and parameters that RDS Custom uses to create a custom engine version (CEV). RDS Custom applies the patches in the order in which they’re listed in the manifest. You can set the Oracle home, Oracle base, and UNIX/Linux user and group using the installation parameters. For more information, see JSON fields in the CEV manifest in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
supports_limitless_database(Option<bool>)
:Indicates whether the DB engine version supports Aurora Limitless Database.
supports_certificate_rotation_without_restart(Option<bool>)
:Indicates whether the engine version supports rotating the server certificate without rebooting the DB instance.
supported_ca_certificate_identifiers(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:A list of the supported CA certificate identifiers.
For more information, see Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB instance in the Amazon RDS User Guide and Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB cluster in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
supports_local_write_forwarding(Option<bool>)
:Indicates whether the DB engine version supports forwarding write operations from reader DB instances to the writer DB instance in the DB cluster. By default, write operations aren’t allowed on reader DB instances.
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
supports_integrations(Option<bool>)
:Indicates whether the DB engine version supports zero-ETL integrations with Amazon Redshift.
serverless_v2_features_support(Option<ServerlessV2FeaturesSupport>)
:Specifies any Aurora Serverless v2 properties or limits that differ between Aurora engine versions. You can test the values of this attribute when deciding which Aurora version to use in a new or upgraded DB cluster. You can also retrieve the version of an existing DB cluster and check whether that version supports certain Aurora Serverless v2 features before you attempt to use those features.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<ModifyCustomDBEngineVersionError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn modify_db_cluster(&self) -> ModifyDBClusterFluentBuilder
pub fn modify_db_cluster(&self) -> ModifyDBClusterFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the ModifyDBCluster
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe DB cluster identifier for the cluster being modified. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
Constraints:
-
Must match the identifier of an existing DB cluster.
-
new_db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_new_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe new DB cluster identifier for the DB cluster when renaming a DB cluster. This value is stored as a lowercase string.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
Constraints:
-
Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens.
-
The first character must be a letter.
-
Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.
Example:
my-cluster2
-
apply_immediately(bool)
/set_apply_immediately(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether the modifications in this request are asynchronously applied as soon as possible, regardless of the
PreferredMaintenanceWindow
setting for the DB cluster. If this parameter is disabled, changes to the DB cluster are applied during the next maintenance window.Most modifications can be applied immediately or during the next scheduled maintenance window. Some modifications, such as turning on deletion protection and changing the master password, are applied immediately—regardless of when you choose to apply them.
By default, this parameter is disabled.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
backup_retention_period(i32)
/set_backup_retention_period(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe number of days for which automated backups are retained. Specify a minimum value of
1
.Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
Default:
1
Constraints:
-
Must be a value from 1 to 35.
-
db_cluster_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_parameter_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of the DB cluster parameter group to use for the DB cluster.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
vpc_security_group_ids(impl Into<String>)
/set_vpc_security_group_ids(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseA list of EC2 VPC security groups to associate with this DB cluster.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
port(i32)
/set_port(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe port number on which the DB cluster accepts connections.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only
Valid Values:
1150-65535
Default: The same port as the original DB cluster.
master_user_password(impl Into<String>)
/set_master_user_password(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe new password for the master database user.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
Constraints:
-
Must contain from 8 to 41 characters.
-
Can contain any printable ASCII character except “/”, “”“, or “@”.
-
Can’t be specified if
ManageMasterUserPassword
is turned on.
-
option_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_option_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe option group to associate the DB cluster with.
DB clusters are associated with a default option group that can’t be modified.
preferred_backup_window(impl Into<String>)
/set_preferred_backup_window(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe daily time range during which automated backups are created if automated backups are enabled, using the
BackupRetentionPeriod
parameter.The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region. To view the time blocks available, see Backup window in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
Constraints:
-
Must be in the format
hh24:mi-hh24:mi
. -
Must be in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).
-
Must not conflict with the preferred maintenance window.
-
Must be at least 30 minutes.
-
preferred_maintenance_window(impl Into<String>)
/set_preferred_maintenance_window(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe weekly time range during which system maintenance can occur, in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region, occurring on a random day of the week. To see the time blocks available, see Adjusting the Preferred DB Cluster Maintenance Window in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
Constraints:
-
Must be in the format
ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi
. -
Days must be one of
Mon | Tue | Wed | Thu | Fri | Sat | Sun
. -
Must be in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).
-
Must be at least 30 minutes.
-
enable_iam_database_authentication(bool)
/set_enable_iam_database_authentication(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to enable mapping of Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts. By default, mapping isn’t enabled.
For more information, see IAM Database Authentication in the Amazon Aurora User Guide or IAM database authentication for MariaDB, MySQL, and PostgreSQL in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
backtrack_window(i64)
/set_backtrack_window(Option<i64>)
:
required: falseThe target backtrack window, in seconds. To disable backtracking, set this value to
0
.Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora MySQL DB clusters only
Default:
0
Constraints:
-
If specified, this value must be set to a number from 0 to 259,200 (72 hours).
-
cloudwatch_logs_export_configuration(CloudwatchLogsExportConfiguration)
/set_cloudwatch_logs_export_configuration(Option<CloudwatchLogsExportConfiguration>)
:
required: falseThe configuration setting for the log types to be enabled for export to CloudWatch Logs for a specific DB cluster.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
The following values are valid for each DB engine:
-
Aurora MySQL -
audit | error | general | instance | slowquery | iam-db-auth-error
-
Aurora PostgreSQL -
instance | postgresql | iam-db-auth-error
-
RDS for MySQL -
error | general | slowquery | iam-db-auth-error
-
RDS for PostgreSQL -
postgresql | upgrade | iam-db-auth-error
For more information about exporting CloudWatch Logs for Amazon RDS, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
For more information about exporting CloudWatch Logs for Amazon Aurora, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
-
engine_version(impl Into<String>)
/set_engine_version(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe version number of the database engine to which you want to upgrade. Changing this parameter results in an outage. The change is applied during the next maintenance window unless
ApplyImmediately
is enabled.If the cluster that you’re modifying has one or more read replicas, all replicas must be running an engine version that’s the same or later than the version you specify.
To list all of the available engine versions for Aurora MySQL, use the following command:
aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine aurora-mysql –query “DBEngineVersions[].EngineVersion”
To list all of the available engine versions for Aurora PostgreSQL, use the following command:
aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine aurora-postgresql –query “DBEngineVersions[].EngineVersion”
To list all of the available engine versions for RDS for MySQL, use the following command:
aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine mysql –query “DBEngineVersions[].EngineVersion”
To list all of the available engine versions for RDS for PostgreSQL, use the following command:
aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine postgres –query “DBEngineVersions[].EngineVersion”
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
allow_major_version_upgrade(bool)
/set_allow_major_version_upgrade(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether major version upgrades are allowed.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
Constraints:
-
You must allow major version upgrades when specifying a value for the
EngineVersion
parameter that is a different major version than the DB cluster’s current version.
-
db_instance_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_instance_parameter_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of the DB parameter group to apply to all instances of the DB cluster.
When you apply a parameter group using the
DBInstanceParameterGroupName
parameter, the DB cluster isn’t rebooted automatically. Also, parameter changes are applied immediately rather than during the next maintenance window.Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only
Default: The existing name setting
Constraints:
-
The DB parameter group must be in the same DB parameter group family as this DB cluster.
-
The
DBInstanceParameterGroupName
parameter is valid in combination with theAllowMajorVersionUpgrade
parameter for a major version upgrade only.
-
domain(impl Into<String>)
/set_domain(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Active Directory directory ID to move the DB cluster to. Specify
none
to remove the cluster from its current domain. The domain must be created prior to this operation.For more information, see Kerberos Authentication in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only
domain_iam_role_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_domain_iam_role_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of the IAM role to use when making API calls to the Directory Service.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only
scaling_configuration(ScalingConfiguration)
/set_scaling_configuration(Option<ScalingConfiguration>)
:
required: falseThe scaling properties of the DB cluster. You can only modify scaling properties for DB clusters in
serverless
DB engine mode.Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only
deletion_protection(bool)
/set_deletion_protection(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether the DB cluster has deletion protection enabled. The database can’t be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection isn’t enabled.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
enable_http_endpoint(bool)
/set_enable_http_endpoint(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to enable the HTTP endpoint for an Aurora Serverless v1 DB cluster. By default, the HTTP endpoint isn’t enabled.
When enabled, the HTTP endpoint provides a connectionless web service API (RDS Data API) for running SQL queries on the Aurora Serverless v1 DB cluster. You can also query your database from inside the RDS console with the RDS query editor.
For more information, see Using RDS Data API in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
This parameter applies only to Aurora Serverless v1 DB clusters. To enable or disable the HTTP endpoint for an Aurora Serverless v2 or provisioned DB cluster, use the
EnableHttpEndpoint
andDisableHttpEndpoint
operations.Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only
copy_tags_to_snapshot(bool)
/set_copy_tags_to_snapshot(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to copy all tags from the DB cluster to snapshots of the DB cluster. The default is not to copy them.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
enable_global_write_forwarding(bool)
/set_enable_global_write_forwarding(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to enable this DB cluster to forward write operations to the primary cluster of a global cluster (Aurora global database). By default, write operations are not allowed on Aurora DB clusters that are secondary clusters in an Aurora global database.
You can set this value only on Aurora DB clusters that are members of an Aurora global database. With this parameter enabled, a secondary cluster can forward writes to the current primary cluster, and the resulting changes are replicated back to this cluster. For the primary DB cluster of an Aurora global database, this value is used immediately if the primary is demoted by a global cluster API operation, but it does nothing until then.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only
db_cluster_instance_class(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_instance_class(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe compute and memory capacity of each DB instance in the Multi-AZ DB cluster, for example
db.m6gd.xlarge
. Not all DB instance classes are available in all Amazon Web Services Regions, or for all database engines.For the full list of DB instance classes and availability for your engine, see DB Instance Class in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
Valid for Cluster Type: Multi-AZ DB clusters only
allocated_storage(i32)
/set_allocated_storage(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe amount of storage in gibibytes (GiB) to allocate to each DB instance in the Multi-AZ DB cluster.
Valid for Cluster Type: Multi-AZ DB clusters only
storage_type(impl Into<String>)
/set_storage_type(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe storage type to associate with the DB cluster.
For information on storage types for Aurora DB clusters, see Storage configurations for Amazon Aurora DB clusters. For information on storage types for Multi-AZ DB clusters, see Settings for creating Multi-AZ DB clusters.
When specified for a Multi-AZ DB cluster, a value for the
Iops
parameter is required.Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
Valid Values:
-
Aurora DB clusters -
aurora | aurora-iopt1
-
Multi-AZ DB clusters -
io1 | io2 | gp3
Default:
-
Aurora DB clusters -
aurora
-
Multi-AZ DB clusters -
io1
-
iops(i32)
/set_iops(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe amount of Provisioned IOPS (input/output operations per second) to be initially allocated for each DB instance in the Multi-AZ DB cluster.
For information about valid IOPS values, see Amazon RDS Provisioned IOPS storage in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
Valid for Cluster Type: Multi-AZ DB clusters only
Constraints:
-
Must be a multiple between .5 and 50 of the storage amount for the DB cluster.
-
auto_minor_version_upgrade(bool)
/set_auto_minor_version_upgrade(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether minor engine upgrades are applied automatically to the DB cluster during the maintenance window. By default, minor engine upgrades are applied automatically.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters.
For more information about automatic minor version upgrades, see Automatically upgrading the minor engine version.
monitoring_interval(i32)
/set_monitoring_interval(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe interval, in seconds, between points when Enhanced Monitoring metrics are collected for the DB cluster. To turn off collecting Enhanced Monitoring metrics, specify
0
.If
MonitoringRoleArn
is specified, also setMonitoringInterval
to a value other than0
.Valid for Cluster Type: Multi-AZ DB clusters only
Valid Values:
0 | 1 | 5 | 10 | 15 | 30 | 60
Default:
0
monitoring_role_arn(impl Into<String>)
/set_monitoring_role_arn(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the IAM role that permits RDS to send Enhanced Monitoring metrics to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. An example is
arn:aws:iam:123456789012:role/emaccess
. For information on creating a monitoring role, see To create an IAM role for Amazon RDS Enhanced Monitoring in the Amazon RDS User Guide.If
MonitoringInterval
is set to a value other than0
, supply aMonitoringRoleArn
value.Valid for Cluster Type: Multi-AZ DB clusters only
database_insights_mode(DatabaseInsightsMode)
/set_database_insights_mode(Option<DatabaseInsightsMode>)
:
required: falseSpecifies the mode of Database Insights to enable for the DB cluster.
If you change the value from
standard
toadvanced
, you must set thePerformanceInsightsEnabled
parameter totrue
and thePerformanceInsightsRetentionPeriod
parameter to 465.If you change the value from
advanced
tostandard
, you must set thePerformanceInsightsEnabled
parameter tofalse
.Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
enable_performance_insights(bool)
/set_enable_performance_insights(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to turn on Performance Insights for the DB cluster.
For more information, see Using Amazon Performance Insights in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
performance_insights_kms_key_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_performance_insights_kms_key_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for encryption of Performance Insights data.
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key.
If you don’t specify a value for
PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId
, then Amazon RDS uses your default KMS key. There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
performance_insights_retention_period(i32)
/set_performance_insights_retention_period(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe number of days to retain Performance Insights data.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
Valid Values:
-
7
-
month * 31, where month is a number of months from 1-23. Examples:
93
(3 months * 31),341
(11 months * 31),589
(19 months * 31) -
731
Default:
7
daysIf you specify a retention period that isn’t valid, such as
94
, Amazon RDS issues an error.-
serverless_v2_scaling_configuration(ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration)
/set_serverless_v2_scaling_configuration(Option<ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration>)
:
required: falseContains the scaling configuration of an Aurora Serverless v2 DB cluster.
For more information, see Using Amazon Aurora Serverless v2 in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
network_type(impl Into<String>)
/set_network_type(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe network type of the DB cluster.
The network type is determined by the
DBSubnetGroup
specified for the DB cluster. ADBSubnetGroup
can support only the IPv4 protocol or the IPv4 and the IPv6 protocols (DUAL
).For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only
Valid Values:
IPV4 | DUAL
manage_master_user_password(bool)
/set_manage_master_user_password(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to manage the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.
If the DB cluster doesn’t manage the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager, you can turn on this management. In this case, you can’t specify
MasterUserPassword
.If the DB cluster already manages the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager, and you specify that the master user password is not managed with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager, then you must specify
MasterUserPassword
. In this case, RDS deletes the secret and uses the new password for the master user specified byMasterUserPassword
.For more information, see Password management with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager in the Amazon RDS User Guide and Password management with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
rotate_master_user_password(bool)
/set_rotate_master_user_password(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to rotate the secret managed by Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager for the master user password.
This setting is valid only if the master user password is managed by RDS in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager for the DB cluster. The secret value contains the updated password.
For more information, see Password management with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager in the Amazon RDS User Guide and Password management with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
Constraints:
-
You must apply the change immediately when rotating the master user password.
-
master_user_secret_kms_key_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_master_user_secret_kms_key_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier to encrypt a secret that is automatically generated and managed in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.
This setting is valid only if both of the following conditions are met:
-
The DB cluster doesn’t manage the master user password in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.
If the DB cluster already manages the master user password in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager, you can’t change the KMS key that is used to encrypt the secret.
-
You are turning on
ManageMasterUserPassword
to manage the master user password in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.If you are turning on
ManageMasterUserPassword
and don’t specifyMasterUserSecretKmsKeyId
, then theaws/secretsmanager
KMS key is used to encrypt the secret. If the secret is in a different Amazon Web Services account, then you can’t use theaws/secretsmanager
KMS key to encrypt the secret, and you must use a customer managed KMS key.
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN.
There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
-
engine_mode(impl Into<String>)
/set_engine_mode(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe DB engine mode of the DB cluster, either
provisioned
orserverless
.The DB engine mode can be modified only from
serverless
toprovisioned
.For more information, see CreateDBCluster.
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only
allow_engine_mode_change(bool)
/set_allow_engine_mode_change(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether engine mode changes from
serverless
toprovisioned
are allowed.Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora Serverless v1 DB clusters only
Constraints:
-
You must allow engine mode changes when specifying a different value for the
EngineMode
parameter from the DB cluster’s current engine mode.
-
enable_local_write_forwarding(bool)
/set_enable_local_write_forwarding(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether read replicas can forward write operations to the writer DB instance in the DB cluster. By default, write operations aren’t allowed on reader DB instances.
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
aws_backup_recovery_point_arn(impl Into<String>)
/set_aws_backup_recovery_point_arn(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the recovery point in Amazon Web Services Backup.
enable_limitless_database(bool)
/set_enable_limitless_database(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to enable Aurora Limitless Database. You must enable Aurora Limitless Database to create a DB shard group.
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
This setting is no longer used. Instead use the
ClusterScalabilityType
setting when you create your Aurora Limitless Database DB cluster.ca_certificate_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_ca_certificate_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe CA certificate identifier to use for the DB cluster’s server certificate.
For more information, see Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB instance in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
Valid for Cluster Type: Multi-AZ DB clusters
- On success, responds with
ModifyDbClusterOutput
with field(s):db_cluster(Option<DbCluster>)
:Contains the details of an Amazon Aurora DB cluster or Multi-AZ DB cluster.
For an Amazon Aurora DB cluster, this data type is used as a response element in the operations
CreateDBCluster
,DeleteDBCluster
,DescribeDBClusters
,FailoverDBCluster
,ModifyDBCluster
,PromoteReadReplicaDBCluster
,RestoreDBClusterFromS3
,RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot
,RestoreDBClusterToPointInTime
,StartDBCluster
, andStopDBCluster
.For a Multi-AZ DB cluster, this data type is used as a response element in the operations
CreateDBCluster
,DeleteDBCluster
,DescribeDBClusters
,FailoverDBCluster
,ModifyDBCluster
,RebootDBCluster
,RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot
, andRestoreDBClusterToPointInTime
.For more information on Amazon Aurora DB clusters, see What is Amazon Aurora? in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
For more information on Multi-AZ DB clusters, see Multi-AZ deployments with two readable standby DB instances in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<ModifyDBClusterError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn modify_db_cluster_endpoint(&self) -> ModifyDBClusterEndpointFluentBuilder
pub fn modify_db_cluster_endpoint(&self) -> ModifyDBClusterEndpointFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the ModifyDBClusterEndpoint
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_cluster_endpoint_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_endpoint_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe identifier of the endpoint to modify. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
endpoint_type(impl Into<String>)
/set_endpoint_type(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe type of the endpoint. One of:
READER
,WRITER
,ANY
.static_members(impl Into<String>)
/set_static_members(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseList of DB instance identifiers that are part of the custom endpoint group.
excluded_members(impl Into<String>)
/set_excluded_members(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseList of DB instance identifiers that aren’t part of the custom endpoint group. All other eligible instances are reachable through the custom endpoint. Only relevant if the list of static members is empty.
- On success, responds with
ModifyDbClusterEndpointOutput
with field(s):db_cluster_endpoint_identifier(Option<String>)
:The identifier associated with the endpoint. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:The DB cluster identifier of the DB cluster associated with the endpoint. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
db_cluster_endpoint_resource_identifier(Option<String>)
:A unique system-generated identifier for an endpoint. It remains the same for the whole life of the endpoint.
endpoint(Option<String>)
:The DNS address of the endpoint.
status(Option<String>)
:The current status of the endpoint. One of:
creating
,available
,deleting
,inactive
,modifying
. Theinactive
state applies to an endpoint that can’t be used for a certain kind of cluster, such as awriter
endpoint for a read-only secondary cluster in a global database.endpoint_type(Option<String>)
:The type of the endpoint. One of:
READER
,WRITER
,CUSTOM
.custom_endpoint_type(Option<String>)
:The type associated with a custom endpoint. One of:
READER
,WRITER
,ANY
.static_members(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:List of DB instance identifiers that are part of the custom endpoint group.
excluded_members(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:List of DB instance identifiers that aren’t part of the custom endpoint group. All other eligible instances are reachable through the custom endpoint. Only relevant if the list of static members is empty.
db_cluster_endpoint_arn(Option<String>)
:The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the endpoint.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<ModifyDBClusterEndpointError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn modify_db_cluster_parameter_group(
&self,
) -> ModifyDBClusterParameterGroupFluentBuilder
pub fn modify_db_cluster_parameter_group( &self, ) -> ModifyDBClusterParameterGroupFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the ModifyDBClusterParameterGroup
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_cluster_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_parameter_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the DB cluster parameter group to modify.
parameters(Parameter)
/set_parameters(Option<Vec::<Parameter>>)
:
required: trueA list of parameters in the DB cluster parameter group to modify.
Valid Values (for the application method):
immediate | pending-reboot
You can use the
immediate
value with dynamic parameters only. You can use thepending-reboot
value for both dynamic and static parameters.When the application method is
immediate
, changes to dynamic parameters are applied immediately to the DB clusters associated with the parameter group. When the application method ispending-reboot
, changes to dynamic and static parameters are applied after a reboot without failover to the DB clusters associated with the parameter group.
- On success, responds with
ModifyDbClusterParameterGroupOutput
with field(s):db_cluster_parameter_group_name(Option<String>)
:The name of the DB cluster parameter group.
Constraints:
-
Must be 1 to 255 letters or numbers.
-
First character must be a letter
-
Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens
This value is stored as a lowercase string.
-
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<ModifyDBClusterParameterGroupError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn modify_db_cluster_snapshot_attribute(
&self,
) -> ModifyDBClusterSnapshotAttributeFluentBuilder
pub fn modify_db_cluster_snapshot_attribute( &self, ) -> ModifyDBClusterSnapshotAttributeFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the ModifyDBClusterSnapshotAttribute
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_cluster_snapshot_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_snapshot_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe identifier for the DB cluster snapshot to modify the attributes for.
attribute_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_attribute_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the DB cluster snapshot attribute to modify.
To manage authorization for other Amazon Web Services accounts to copy or restore a manual DB cluster snapshot, set this value to
restore
.To view the list of attributes available to modify, use the
DescribeDBClusterSnapshotAttributes
API operation.values_to_add(impl Into<String>)
/set_values_to_add(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseA list of DB cluster snapshot attributes to add to the attribute specified by
AttributeName
.To authorize other Amazon Web Services accounts to copy or restore a manual DB cluster snapshot, set this list to include one or more Amazon Web Services account IDs, or
all
to make the manual DB cluster snapshot restorable by any Amazon Web Services account. Do not add theall
value for any manual DB cluster snapshots that contain private information that you don’t want available to all Amazon Web Services accounts.values_to_remove(impl Into<String>)
/set_values_to_remove(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseA list of DB cluster snapshot attributes to remove from the attribute specified by
AttributeName
.To remove authorization for other Amazon Web Services accounts to copy or restore a manual DB cluster snapshot, set this list to include one or more Amazon Web Services account identifiers, or
all
to remove authorization for any Amazon Web Services account to copy or restore the DB cluster snapshot. If you specifyall
, an Amazon Web Services account whose account ID is explicitly added to therestore
attribute can still copy or restore a manual DB cluster snapshot.
- On success, responds with
ModifyDbClusterSnapshotAttributeOutput
with field(s):db_cluster_snapshot_attributes_result(Option<DbClusterSnapshotAttributesResult>)
:Contains the results of a successful call to the
DescribeDBClusterSnapshotAttributes
API action.Manual DB cluster snapshot attributes are used to authorize other Amazon Web Services accounts to copy or restore a manual DB cluster snapshot. For more information, see the
ModifyDBClusterSnapshotAttribute
API action.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<ModifyDBClusterSnapshotAttributeError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn modify_db_instance(&self) -> ModifyDBInstanceFluentBuilder
pub fn modify_db_instance(&self) -> ModifyDBInstanceFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the ModifyDBInstance
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe identifier of DB instance to modify. This value is stored as a lowercase string.
Constraints:
-
Must match the identifier of an existing DB instance.
-
allocated_storage(i32)
/set_allocated_storage(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe new amount of storage in gibibytes (GiB) to allocate for the DB instance.
For RDS for Db2, MariaDB, RDS for MySQL, RDS for Oracle, and RDS for PostgreSQL, the value supplied must be at least 10% greater than the current value. Values that are not at least 10% greater than the existing value are rounded up so that they are 10% greater than the current value.
For the valid values for allocated storage for each engine, see
CreateDBInstance
.Constraints:
-
When you increase the allocated storage for a DB instance that uses Provisioned IOPS (
gp3
,io1
, orio2
storage type), you must also specify theIops
parameter. You can use the current value forIops
.
-
db_instance_class(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_instance_class(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe new compute and memory capacity of the DB instance, for example
db.m4.large
. Not all DB instance classes are available in all Amazon Web Services Regions, or for all database engines. For the full list of DB instance classes, and availability for your engine, see DB Instance Class in the Amazon RDS User Guide or Aurora DB instance classes in the Amazon Aurora User Guide. For RDS Custom, see DB instance class support for RDS Custom for Oracle and DB instance class support for RDS Custom for SQL Server.If you modify the DB instance class, an outage occurs during the change. The change is applied during the next maintenance window, unless you specify
ApplyImmediately
in your request.Default: Uses existing setting
Constraints:
-
If you are modifying the DB instance class and upgrading the engine version at the same time, the currently running engine version must be supported on the specified DB instance class. Otherwise, the operation returns an error. In this case, first run the operation to upgrade the engine version, and then run it again to modify the DB instance class.
-
db_subnet_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_subnet_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe new DB subnet group for the DB instance. You can use this parameter to move your DB instance to a different VPC. If your DB instance isn’t in a VPC, you can also use this parameter to move your DB instance into a VPC. For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
Changing the subnet group causes an outage during the change. The change is applied during the next maintenance window, unless you enable
ApplyImmediately
.This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
Constraints:
-
If supplied, must match existing DB subnet group.
Example:
mydbsubnetgroup
-
db_security_groups(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_security_groups(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseA list of DB security groups to authorize on this DB instance. Changing this setting doesn’t result in an outage and the change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
Constraints:
-
If supplied, must match existing DB security groups.
-
vpc_security_group_ids(impl Into<String>)
/set_vpc_security_group_ids(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseA list of Amazon EC2 VPC security groups to associate with this DB instance. This change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible.
This setting doesn’t apply to the following DB instances:
-
Amazon Aurora (The associated list of EC2 VPC security groups is managed by the DB cluster. For more information, see
ModifyDBCluster
.) -
RDS Custom
Constraints:
-
If supplied, must match existing VPC security group IDs.
-
apply_immediately(bool)
/set_apply_immediately(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether the modifications in this request and any pending modifications are asynchronously applied as soon as possible, regardless of the
PreferredMaintenanceWindow
setting for the DB instance. By default, this parameter is disabled.If this parameter is disabled, changes to the DB instance are applied during the next maintenance window. Some parameter changes can cause an outage and are applied on the next call to
RebootDBInstance
, or the next failure reboot. Review the table of parameters in Modifying a DB Instance in the Amazon RDS User Guide to see the impact of enabling or disablingApplyImmediately
for each modified parameter and to determine when the changes are applied.master_user_password(impl Into<String>)
/set_master_user_password(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe new password for the master user.
Changing this parameter doesn’t result in an outage and the change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible. Between the time of the request and the completion of the request, the
MasterUserPassword
element exists in thePendingModifiedValues
element of the operation response.Amazon RDS API operations never return the password, so this operation provides a way to regain access to a primary instance user if the password is lost. This includes restoring privileges that might have been accidentally revoked.
This setting doesn’t apply to the following DB instances:
-
Amazon Aurora
The password for the master user is managed by the DB cluster. For more information, see
ModifyDBCluster
. -
RDS Custom
-
RDS for Oracle CDBs in the multi-tenant configuration
Specify the master password in
ModifyTenantDatabase
instead.
Default: Uses existing setting
Constraints:
-
Can’t be specified if
ManageMasterUserPassword
is turned on. -
Can include any printable ASCII character except “/”, “”“, or “@”. For RDS for Oracle, can’t include the “&” (ampersand) or the “’” (single quotes) character.
Length Constraints:
-
RDS for Db2 - Must contain from 8 to 255 characters.
-
RDS for MariaDB - Must contain from 8 to 41 characters.
-
RDS for Microsoft SQL Server - Must contain from 8 to 128 characters.
-
RDS for MySQL - Must contain from 8 to 41 characters.
-
RDS for Oracle - Must contain from 8 to 30 characters.
-
RDS for PostgreSQL - Must contain from 8 to 128 characters.
-
db_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_parameter_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of the DB parameter group to apply to the DB instance.
Changing this setting doesn’t result in an outage. The parameter group name itself is changed immediately, but the actual parameter changes are not applied until you reboot the instance without failover. In this case, the DB instance isn’t rebooted automatically, and the parameter changes aren’t applied during the next maintenance window. However, if you modify dynamic parameters in the newly associated DB parameter group, these changes are applied immediately without a reboot.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
Default: Uses existing setting
Constraints:
-
Must be in the same DB parameter group family as the DB instance.
-
backup_retention_period(i32)
/set_backup_retention_period(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe number of days to retain automated backups. Setting this parameter to a positive number enables backups. Setting this parameter to 0 disables automated backups.
Enabling and disabling backups can result in a brief I/O suspension that lasts from a few seconds to a few minutes, depending on the size and class of your DB instance.
These changes are applied during the next maintenance window unless the
ApplyImmediately
parameter is enabled for this request. If you change the parameter from one non-zero value to another non-zero value, the change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible.This setting doesn’t apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. The retention period for automated backups is managed by the DB cluster. For more information, see
ModifyDBCluster
.Default: Uses existing setting
Constraints:
-
Must be a value from 0 to 35.
-
Can’t be set to 0 if the DB instance is a source to read replicas.
-
Can’t be set to 0 for an RDS Custom for Oracle DB instance.
-
preferred_backup_window(impl Into<String>)
/set_preferred_backup_window(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe daily time range during which automated backups are created if automated backups are enabled, as determined by the
BackupRetentionPeriod
parameter. Changing this parameter doesn’t result in an outage and the change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible. The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region. For more information, see Backup window in the Amazon RDS User Guide.This setting doesn’t apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. The daily time range for creating automated backups is managed by the DB cluster. For more information, see
ModifyDBCluster
.Constraints:
-
Must be in the format
hh24:mi-hh24:mi
. -
Must be in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).
-
Must not conflict with the preferred maintenance window.
-
Must be at least 30 minutes.
-
preferred_maintenance_window(impl Into<String>)
/set_preferred_maintenance_window(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe weekly time range during which system maintenance can occur, which might result in an outage. Changing this parameter doesn’t result in an outage, except in the following situation, and the change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible. If there are pending actions that cause a reboot, and the maintenance window is changed to include the current time, then changing this parameter causes a reboot of the DB instance. If you change this window to the current time, there must be at least 30 minutes between the current time and end of the window to ensure pending changes are applied.
For more information, see Amazon RDS Maintenance Window in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
Default: Uses existing setting
Constraints:
-
Must be in the format
ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi
. -
The day values must be
mon | tue | wed | thu | fri | sat | sun
. -
Must be in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).
-
Must not conflict with the preferred backup window.
-
Must be at least 30 minutes.
-
multi_az(bool)
/set_multi_az(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment. Changing this parameter doesn’t result in an outage. The change is applied during the next maintenance window unless the
ApplyImmediately
parameter is enabled for this request.This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
engine_version(impl Into<String>)
/set_engine_version(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe version number of the database engine to upgrade to. Changing this parameter results in an outage and the change is applied during the next maintenance window unless the
ApplyImmediately
parameter is enabled for this request.For major version upgrades, if a nondefault DB parameter group is currently in use, a new DB parameter group in the DB parameter group family for the new engine version must be specified. The new DB parameter group can be the default for that DB parameter group family.
If you specify only a major version, Amazon RDS updates the DB instance to the default minor version if the current minor version is lower. For information about valid engine versions, see
CreateDBInstance
, or callDescribeDBEngineVersions
.If the instance that you’re modifying is acting as a read replica, the engine version that you specify must be the same or higher than the version that the source DB instance or cluster is running.
In RDS Custom for Oracle, this parameter is supported for read replicas only if they are in the
PATCH_DB_FAILURE
lifecycle.Constraints:
-
If you are upgrading the engine version and modifying the DB instance class at the same time, the currently running engine version must be supported on the specified DB instance class. Otherwise, the operation returns an error. In this case, first run the operation to upgrade the engine version, and then run it again to modify the DB instance class.
-
allow_major_version_upgrade(bool)
/set_allow_major_version_upgrade(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether major version upgrades are allowed. Changing this parameter doesn’t result in an outage and the change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
Constraints:
-
Major version upgrades must be allowed when specifying a value for the
EngineVersion
parameter that’s a different major version than the DB instance’s current version.
-
auto_minor_version_upgrade(bool)
/set_auto_minor_version_upgrade(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether minor version upgrades are applied automatically to the DB instance during the maintenance window. An outage occurs when all the following conditions are met:
-
The automatic upgrade is enabled for the maintenance window.
-
A newer minor version is available.
-
RDS has enabled automatic patching for the engine version.
If any of the preceding conditions isn’t met, Amazon RDS applies the change as soon as possible and doesn’t cause an outage.
For an RDS Custom DB instance, don’t enable this setting. Otherwise, the operation returns an error.
For more information about automatic minor version upgrades, see Automatically upgrading the minor engine version.
-
license_model(impl Into<String>)
/set_license_model(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe license model for the DB instance.
This setting doesn’t apply to Amazon Aurora or RDS Custom DB instances.
Valid Values:
-
RDS for Db2 -
bring-your-own-license
-
RDS for MariaDB -
general-public-license
-
RDS for Microsoft SQL Server -
license-included
-
RDS for MySQL -
general-public-license
-
RDS for Oracle -
bring-your-own-license | license-included
-
RDS for PostgreSQL -
postgresql-license
-
iops(i32)
/set_iops(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe new Provisioned IOPS (I/O operations per second) value for the RDS instance.
Changing this setting doesn’t result in an outage and the change is applied during the next maintenance window unless the
ApplyImmediately
parameter is enabled for this request. If you are migrating from Provisioned IOPS to standard storage, set this value to 0. The DB instance will require a reboot for the change in storage type to take effect.If you choose to migrate your DB instance from using standard storage to Provisioned IOPS (io1), or from Provisioned IOPS to standard storage, the process can take time. The duration of the migration depends on several factors such as database load, storage size, storage type (standard or Provisioned IOPS), amount of IOPS provisioned (if any), and the number of prior scale storage operations. Typical migration times are under 24 hours, but the process can take up to several days in some cases. During the migration, the DB instance is available for use, but might experience performance degradation. While the migration takes place, nightly backups for the instance are suspended. No other Amazon RDS operations can take place for the instance, including modifying the instance, rebooting the instance, deleting the instance, creating a read replica for the instance, and creating a DB snapshot of the instance.
Constraints:
-
For RDS for MariaDB, RDS for MySQL, RDS for Oracle, and RDS for PostgreSQL - The value supplied must be at least 10% greater than the current value. Values that are not at least 10% greater than the existing value are rounded up so that they are 10% greater than the current value.
-
When you increase the Provisioned IOPS, you must also specify the
AllocatedStorage
parameter. You can use the current value forAllocatedStorage
.
Default: Uses existing setting
-
option_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_option_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe option group to associate the DB instance with.
Changing this parameter doesn’t result in an outage, with one exception. If the parameter change results in an option group that enables OEM, it can cause a brief period, lasting less than a second, during which new connections are rejected but existing connections aren’t interrupted.
The change is applied during the next maintenance window unless the
ApplyImmediately
parameter is enabled for this request.Permanent options, such as the TDE option for Oracle Advanced Security TDE, can’t be removed from an option group, and that option group can’t be removed from a DB instance after it is associated with a DB instance.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
new_db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_new_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe new identifier for the DB instance when renaming a DB instance. When you change the DB instance identifier, an instance reboot occurs immediately if you enable
ApplyImmediately
, or will occur during the next maintenance window if you disableApplyImmediately
. This value is stored as a lowercase string.This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
Constraints:
-
Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens.
-
The first character must be a letter.
-
Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.
Example:
mydbinstance
-
storage_type(impl Into<String>)
/set_storage_type(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe storage type to associate with the DB instance.
If you specify
io1
,io2
, orgp3
you must also include a value for theIops
parameter.If you choose to migrate your DB instance from using standard storage to gp2 (General Purpose SSD), gp3, or Provisioned IOPS (io1), or from these storage types to standard storage, the process can take time. The duration of the migration depends on several factors such as database load, storage size, storage type (standard or Provisioned IOPS), amount of IOPS provisioned (if any), and the number of prior scale storage operations. Typical migration times are under 24 hours, but the process can take up to several days in some cases. During the migration, the DB instance is available for use, but might experience performance degradation. While the migration takes place, nightly backups for the instance are suspended. No other Amazon RDS operations can take place for the instance, including modifying the instance, rebooting the instance, deleting the instance, creating a read replica for the instance, and creating a DB snapshot of the instance.
Valid Values:
gp2 | gp3 | io1 | io2 | standard
Default:
io1
, if theIops
parameter is specified. Otherwise,gp2
.tde_credential_arn(impl Into<String>)
/set_tde_credential_arn(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe ARN from the key store with which to associate the instance for TDE encryption.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
tde_credential_password(impl Into<String>)
/set_tde_credential_password(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe password for the given ARN from the key store in order to access the device.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
ca_certificate_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_ca_certificate_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe CA certificate identifier to use for the DB instance’s server certificate.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
For more information, see Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB instance in the Amazon RDS User Guide and Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB cluster in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
domain(impl Into<String>)
/set_domain(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Active Directory directory ID to move the DB instance to. Specify
none
to remove the instance from its current domain. You must create the domain before this operation. Currently, you can create only Db2, MySQL, Microsoft SQL Server, Oracle, and PostgreSQL DB instances in an Active Directory Domain.For more information, see Kerberos Authentication in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
domain_fqdn(impl Into<String>)
/set_domain_fqdn(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of an Active Directory domain.
Constraints:
-
Can’t be longer than 64 characters.
Example:
mymanagedADtest.mymanagedAD.mydomain
-
domain_ou(impl Into<String>)
/set_domain_ou(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Active Directory organizational unit for your DB instance to join.
Constraints:
-
Must be in the distinguished name format.
-
Can’t be longer than 64 characters.
Example:
OU=mymanagedADtestOU,DC=mymanagedADtest,DC=mymanagedAD,DC=mydomain
-
domain_auth_secret_arn(impl Into<String>)
/set_domain_auth_secret_arn(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe ARN for the Secrets Manager secret with the credentials for the user joining the domain.
Example:
arn:aws:secretsmanager:region:account-number:secret:myselfmanagedADtestsecret-123456
domain_dns_ips(impl Into<String>)
/set_domain_dns_ips(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseThe IPv4 DNS IP addresses of your primary and secondary Active Directory domain controllers.
Constraints:
-
Two IP addresses must be provided. If there isn’t a secondary domain controller, use the IP address of the primary domain controller for both entries in the list.
Example:
123.124.125.126,234.235.236.237
-
copy_tags_to_snapshot(bool)
/set_copy_tags_to_snapshot(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to copy all tags from the DB instance to snapshots of the DB instance. By default, tags aren’t copied.
This setting doesn’t apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. Copying tags to snapshots is managed by the DB cluster. Setting this value for an Aurora DB instance has no effect on the DB cluster setting. For more information, see
ModifyDBCluster
.monitoring_interval(i32)
/set_monitoring_interval(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe interval, in seconds, between points when Enhanced Monitoring metrics are collected for the DB instance. To disable collection of Enhanced Monitoring metrics, specify
0
.If
MonitoringRoleArn
is specified, setMonitoringInterval
to a value other than0
.This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
Valid Values:
0 | 1 | 5 | 10 | 15 | 30 | 60
Default:
0
db_port_number(i32)
/set_db_port_number(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe port number on which the database accepts connections.
The value of the
DBPortNumber
parameter must not match any of the port values specified for options in the option group for the DB instance.If you change the
DBPortNumber
value, your database restarts regardless of the value of theApplyImmediately
parameter.This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
Valid Values:
1150-65535
Default:
-
Amazon Aurora -
3306
-
RDS for Db2 -
50000
-
RDS for MariaDB -
3306
-
RDS for Microsoft SQL Server -
1433
-
RDS for MySQL -
3306
-
RDS for Oracle -
1521
-
RDS for PostgreSQL -
5432
Constraints:
-
For RDS for Microsoft SQL Server, the value can’t be
1234
,1434
,3260
,3343
,3389
,47001
, or49152-49156
.
-
publicly_accessible(bool)
/set_publicly_accessible(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether the DB instance is publicly accessible.
When the DB instance is publicly accessible and you connect from outside of the DB instance’s virtual private cloud (VPC), its Domain Name System (DNS) endpoint resolves to the public IP address. When you connect from within the same VPC as the DB instance, the endpoint resolves to the private IP address. Access to the DB instance is ultimately controlled by the security group it uses. That public access isn’t permitted if the security group assigned to the DB instance doesn’t permit it.
When the DB instance isn’t publicly accessible, it is an internal DB instance with a DNS name that resolves to a private IP address.
PubliclyAccessible
only applies to DB instances in a VPC. The DB instance must be part of a public subnet andPubliclyAccessible
must be enabled for it to be publicly accessible.Changes to the
PubliclyAccessible
parameter are applied immediately regardless of the value of theApplyImmediately
parameter.monitoring_role_arn(impl Into<String>)
/set_monitoring_role_arn(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe ARN for the IAM role that permits RDS to send enhanced monitoring metrics to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. For example,
arn:aws:iam:123456789012:role/emaccess
. For information on creating a monitoring role, see To create an IAM role for Amazon RDS Enhanced Monitoring in the Amazon RDS User Guide.If
MonitoringInterval
is set to a value other than0
, supply aMonitoringRoleArn
value.This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
domain_iam_role_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_domain_iam_role_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of the IAM role to use when making API calls to the Directory Service.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
disable_domain(bool)
/set_disable_domain(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to remove the DB instance from the Active Directory domain.
promotion_tier(i32)
/set_promotion_tier(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe order of priority in which an Aurora Replica is promoted to the primary instance after a failure of the existing primary instance. For more information, see Fault Tolerance for an Aurora DB Cluster in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
Default:
1
Valid Values:
0 - 15
enable_iam_database_authentication(bool)
/set_enable_iam_database_authentication(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to enable mapping of Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts. By default, mapping isn’t enabled.
This setting doesn’t apply to Amazon Aurora. Mapping Amazon Web Services IAM accounts to database accounts is managed by the DB cluster.
For more information about IAM database authentication, see IAM Database Authentication for MySQL and PostgreSQL in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
database_insights_mode(DatabaseInsightsMode)
/set_database_insights_mode(Option<DatabaseInsightsMode>)
:
required: falseSpecifies the mode of Database Insights to enable for the DB instance.
Aurora DB instances inherit this value from the DB cluster, so you can’t change this value.
enable_performance_insights(bool)
/set_enable_performance_insights(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to enable Performance Insights for the DB instance.
For more information, see Using Amazon Performance Insights in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
performance_insights_kms_key_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_performance_insights_kms_key_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for encryption of Performance Insights data.
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key.
If you don’t specify a value for
PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId
, then Amazon RDS uses your default KMS key. There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
performance_insights_retention_period(i32)
/set_performance_insights_retention_period(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe number of days to retain Performance Insights data.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
Valid Values:
-
7
-
month * 31, where month is a number of months from 1-23. Examples:
93
(3 months * 31),341
(11 months * 31),589
(19 months * 31) -
731
Default:
7
daysIf you specify a retention period that isn’t valid, such as
94
, Amazon RDS returns an error.-
cloudwatch_logs_export_configuration(CloudwatchLogsExportConfiguration)
/set_cloudwatch_logs_export_configuration(Option<CloudwatchLogsExportConfiguration>)
:
required: falseThe log types to be enabled for export to CloudWatch Logs for a specific DB instance.
A change to the
CloudwatchLogsExportConfiguration
parameter is always applied to the DB instance immediately. Therefore, theApplyImmediately
parameter has no effect.This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
The following values are valid for each DB engine:
-
Aurora MySQL -
audit | error | general | slowquery | iam-db-auth-error
-
Aurora PostgreSQL -
postgresql | iam-db-auth-error
-
RDS for MySQL -
error | general | slowquery | iam-db-auth-error
-
RDS for PostgreSQL -
postgresql | upgrade | iam-db-auth-error
For more information about exporting CloudWatch Logs for Amazon RDS, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
For more information about exporting CloudWatch Logs for Amazon Aurora, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
-
processor_features(ProcessorFeature)
/set_processor_features(Option<Vec::<ProcessorFeature>>)
:
required: falseThe number of CPU cores and the number of threads per core for the DB instance class of the DB instance.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
use_default_processor_features(bool)
/set_use_default_processor_features(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether the DB instance class of the DB instance uses its default processor features.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
deletion_protection(bool)
/set_deletion_protection(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether the DB instance has deletion protection enabled. The database can’t be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection isn’t enabled. For more information, see Deleting a DB Instance.
This setting doesn’t apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. You can enable or disable deletion protection for the DB cluster. For more information, see
ModifyDBCluster
. DB instances in a DB cluster can be deleted even when deletion protection is enabled for the DB cluster.max_allocated_storage(i32)
/set_max_allocated_storage(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe upper limit in gibibytes (GiB) to which Amazon RDS can automatically scale the storage of the DB instance.
For more information about this setting, including limitations that apply to it, see Managing capacity automatically with Amazon RDS storage autoscaling in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
certificate_rotation_restart(bool)
/set_certificate_rotation_restart(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether the DB instance is restarted when you rotate your SSL/TLS certificate.
By default, the DB instance is restarted when you rotate your SSL/TLS certificate. The certificate is not updated until the DB instance is restarted.
Set this parameter only if you are not using SSL/TLS to connect to the DB instance.
If you are using SSL/TLS to connect to the DB instance, follow the appropriate instructions for your DB engine to rotate your SSL/TLS certificate:
-
For more information about rotating your SSL/TLS certificate for RDS DB engines, see Rotating Your SSL/TLS Certificate. in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
-
For more information about rotating your SSL/TLS certificate for Aurora DB engines, see Rotating Your SSL/TLS Certificate in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
-
replica_mode(ReplicaMode)
/set_replica_mode(Option<ReplicaMode>)
:
required: falseA value that sets the open mode of a replica database to either mounted or read-only.
Currently, this parameter is only supported for Oracle DB instances.
Mounted DB replicas are included in Oracle Enterprise Edition. The main use case for mounted replicas is cross-Region disaster recovery. The primary database doesn’t use Active Data Guard to transmit information to the mounted replica. Because it doesn’t accept user connections, a mounted replica can’t serve a read-only workload. For more information, see Working with Oracle Read Replicas for Amazon RDS in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
enable_customer_owned_ip(bool)
/set_enable_customer_owned_ip(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to enable a customer-owned IP address (CoIP) for an RDS on Outposts DB instance.
A CoIP provides local or external connectivity to resources in your Outpost subnets through your on-premises network. For some use cases, a CoIP can provide lower latency for connections to the DB instance from outside of its virtual private cloud (VPC) on your local network.
For more information about RDS on Outposts, see Working with Amazon RDS on Amazon Web Services Outposts in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
For more information about CoIPs, see Customer-owned IP addresses in the Amazon Web Services Outposts User Guide.
aws_backup_recovery_point_arn(impl Into<String>)
/set_aws_backup_recovery_point_arn(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the recovery point in Amazon Web Services Backup.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
automation_mode(AutomationMode)
/set_automation_mode(Option<AutomationMode>)
:
required: falseThe automation mode of the RDS Custom DB instance. If
full
, the DB instance automates monitoring and instance recovery. Ifall paused
, the instance pauses automation for the duration set byResumeFullAutomationModeMinutes
.resume_full_automation_mode_minutes(i32)
/set_resume_full_automation_mode_minutes(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe number of minutes to pause the automation. When the time period ends, RDS Custom resumes full automation.
Default:
60
Constraints:
-
Must be at least 60.
-
Must be no more than 1,440.
-
network_type(impl Into<String>)
/set_network_type(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe network type of the DB instance.
The network type is determined by the
DBSubnetGroup
specified for the DB instance. ADBSubnetGroup
can support only the IPv4 protocol or the IPv4 and the IPv6 protocols (DUAL
).For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
Valid Values:
IPV4 | DUAL
storage_throughput(i32)
/set_storage_throughput(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe storage throughput value for the DB instance.
This setting applies only to the
gp3
storage type.This setting doesn’t apply to Amazon Aurora or RDS Custom DB instances.
manage_master_user_password(bool)
/set_manage_master_user_password(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to manage the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.
If the DB instance doesn’t manage the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager, you can turn on this management. In this case, you can’t specify
MasterUserPassword
.If the DB instance already manages the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager, and you specify that the master user password is not managed with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager, then you must specify
MasterUserPassword
. In this case, Amazon RDS deletes the secret and uses the new password for the master user specified byMasterUserPassword
.For more information, see Password management with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
Constraints:
-
Can’t manage the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager if
MasterUserPassword
is specified. -
Can’t specify for RDS for Oracle CDB instances in the multi-tenant configuration. Use
ModifyTenantDatabase
instead. -
Can’t specify the parameters
ManageMasterUserPassword
andMultiTenant
in the same operation.
-
rotate_master_user_password(bool)
/set_rotate_master_user_password(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to rotate the secret managed by Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager for the master user password.
This setting is valid only if the master user password is managed by RDS in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager for the DB instance. The secret value contains the updated password.
For more information, see Password management with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
Constraints:
-
You must apply the change immediately when rotating the master user password.
-
master_user_secret_kms_key_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_master_user_secret_kms_key_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier to encrypt a secret that is automatically generated and managed in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.
This setting is valid only if both of the following conditions are met:
-
The DB instance doesn’t manage the master user password in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.
If the DB instance already manages the master user password in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager, you can’t change the KMS key used to encrypt the secret.
-
You are turning on
ManageMasterUserPassword
to manage the master user password in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.If you are turning on
ManageMasterUserPassword
and don’t specifyMasterUserSecretKmsKeyId
, then theaws/secretsmanager
KMS key is used to encrypt the secret. If the secret is in a different Amazon Web Services account, then you can’t use theaws/secretsmanager
KMS key to encrypt the secret, and you must use a customer managed KMS key.
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN.
There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.
-
engine(impl Into<String>)
/set_engine(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe target Oracle DB engine when you convert a non-CDB to a CDB. This intermediate step is necessary to upgrade an Oracle Database 19c non-CDB to an Oracle Database 21c CDB.
Note the following requirements:
-
Make sure that you specify
oracle-ee-cdb
ororacle-se2-cdb
. -
Make sure that your DB engine runs Oracle Database 19c with an April 2021 or later RU.
Note the following limitations:
-
You can’t convert a CDB to a non-CDB.
-
You can’t convert a replica database.
-
You can’t convert a non-CDB to a CDB and upgrade the engine version in the same command.
-
You can’t convert the existing custom parameter or option group when it has options or parameters that are permanent or persistent. In this situation, the DB instance reverts to the default option and parameter group. To avoid reverting to the default, specify a new parameter group with
–db-parameter-group-name
and a new option group with–option-group-name
.
-
dedicated_log_volume(bool)
/set_dedicated_log_volume(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseIndicates whether the DB instance has a dedicated log volume (DLV) enabled.
multi_tenant(bool)
/set_multi_tenant(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether the to convert your DB instance from the single-tenant configuration to the multi-tenant configuration. This parameter is supported only for RDS for Oracle CDB instances.
During the conversion, RDS creates an initial tenant database and associates the DB name, master user name, character set, and national character set metadata with this database. The tags associated with the instance also propagate to the initial tenant database. You can add more tenant databases to your DB instance by using the
CreateTenantDatabase
operation.The conversion to the multi-tenant configuration is permanent and irreversible, so you can’t later convert back to the single-tenant configuration. When you specify this parameter, you must also specify
ApplyImmediately
.
- On success, responds with
ModifyDbInstanceOutput
with field(s):db_instance(Option<DbInstance>)
:Contains the details of an Amazon RDS DB instance.
This data type is used as a response element in the operations
CreateDBInstance
,CreateDBInstanceReadReplica
,DeleteDBInstance
,DescribeDBInstances
,ModifyDBInstance
,PromoteReadReplica
,RebootDBInstance
,RestoreDBInstanceFromDBSnapshot
,RestoreDBInstanceFromS3
,RestoreDBInstanceToPointInTime
,StartDBInstance
, andStopDBInstance
.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<ModifyDBInstanceError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn modify_db_parameter_group(&self) -> ModifyDBParameterGroupFluentBuilder
pub fn modify_db_parameter_group(&self) -> ModifyDBParameterGroupFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the ModifyDBParameterGroup
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_parameter_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the DB parameter group.
Constraints:
-
If supplied, must match the name of an existing
DBParameterGroup
.
-
parameters(Parameter)
/set_parameters(Option<Vec::<Parameter>>)
:
required: trueAn array of parameter names, values, and the application methods for the parameter update. At least one parameter name, value, and application method must be supplied; later arguments are optional. A maximum of 20 parameters can be modified in a single request.
Valid Values (for the application method):
immediate | pending-reboot
You can use the
immediate
value with dynamic parameters only. You can use thepending-reboot
value for both dynamic and static parameters.When the application method is
immediate
, changes to dynamic parameters are applied immediately to the DB instances associated with the parameter group.When the application method is
pending-reboot
, changes to dynamic and static parameters are applied after a reboot without failover to the DB instances associated with the parameter group.You can’t use
pending-reboot
with dynamic parameters on RDS for SQL Server DB instances. Useimmediate
.For more information on modifying DB parameters, see Working with DB parameter groups in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- On success, responds with
ModifyDbParameterGroupOutput
with field(s):db_parameter_group_name(Option<String>)
:The name of the DB parameter group.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<ModifyDBParameterGroupError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn modify_db_proxy(&self) -> ModifyDBProxyFluentBuilder
pub fn modify_db_proxy(&self) -> ModifyDBProxyFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the ModifyDBProxy
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_proxy_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_proxy_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe identifier for the
DBProxy
to modify.new_db_proxy_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_new_db_proxy_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe new identifier for the
DBProxy
. An identifier must begin with a letter and must contain only ASCII letters, digits, and hyphens; it can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.auth(UserAuthConfig)
/set_auth(Option<Vec::<UserAuthConfig>>)
:
required: falseThe new authentication settings for the
DBProxy
.require_tls(bool)
/set_require_tls(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseWhether Transport Layer Security (TLS) encryption is required for connections to the proxy. By enabling this setting, you can enforce encrypted TLS connections to the proxy, even if the associated database doesn’t use TLS.
idle_client_timeout(i32)
/set_idle_client_timeout(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe number of seconds that a connection to the proxy can be inactive before the proxy disconnects it. You can set this value higher or lower than the connection timeout limit for the associated database.
debug_logging(bool)
/set_debug_logging(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseWhether the proxy includes detailed information about SQL statements in its logs. This information helps you to debug issues involving SQL behavior or the performance and scalability of the proxy connections. The debug information includes the text of SQL statements that you submit through the proxy. Thus, only enable this setting when needed for debugging, and only when you have security measures in place to safeguard any sensitive information that appears in the logs.
role_arn(impl Into<String>)
/set_role_arn(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role that the proxy uses to access secrets in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.
security_groups(impl Into<String>)
/set_security_groups(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseThe new list of security groups for the
DBProxy
.
- On success, responds with
ModifyDbProxyOutput
with field(s):db_proxy(Option<DbProxy>)
:The
DBProxy
object representing the new settings for the proxy.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<ModifyDBProxyError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn modify_db_proxy_endpoint(&self) -> ModifyDBProxyEndpointFluentBuilder
pub fn modify_db_proxy_endpoint(&self) -> ModifyDBProxyEndpointFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the ModifyDBProxyEndpoint
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_proxy_endpoint_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_proxy_endpoint_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the DB proxy sociated with the DB proxy endpoint that you want to modify.
new_db_proxy_endpoint_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_new_db_proxy_endpoint_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe new identifier for the
DBProxyEndpoint
. An identifier must begin with a letter and must contain only ASCII letters, digits, and hyphens; it can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.vpc_security_group_ids(impl Into<String>)
/set_vpc_security_group_ids(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseThe VPC security group IDs for the DB proxy endpoint. When the DB proxy endpoint uses a different VPC than the original proxy, you also specify a different set of security group IDs than for the original proxy.
- On success, responds with
ModifyDbProxyEndpointOutput
with field(s):db_proxy_endpoint(Option<DbProxyEndpoint>)
:The
DBProxyEndpoint
object representing the new settings for the DB proxy endpoint.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<ModifyDBProxyEndpointError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn modify_db_proxy_target_group(
&self,
) -> ModifyDBProxyTargetGroupFluentBuilder
pub fn modify_db_proxy_target_group( &self, ) -> ModifyDBProxyTargetGroupFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the ModifyDBProxyTargetGroup
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
target_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_target_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the target group to modify.
db_proxy_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_proxy_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the proxy.
connection_pool_config(ConnectionPoolConfiguration)
/set_connection_pool_config(Option<ConnectionPoolConfiguration>)
:
required: falseThe settings that determine the size and behavior of the connection pool for the target group.
new_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_new_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe new name for the modified
DBProxyTarget
. An identifier must begin with a letter and must contain only ASCII letters, digits, and hyphens; it can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.You can’t rename the
default
target group.
- On success, responds with
ModifyDbProxyTargetGroupOutput
with field(s):db_proxy_target_group(Option<DbProxyTargetGroup>)
:The settings of the modified
DBProxyTarget
.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<ModifyDBProxyTargetGroupError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn modify_db_recommendation(&self) -> ModifyDBRecommendationFluentBuilder
pub fn modify_db_recommendation(&self) -> ModifyDBRecommendationFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the ModifyDBRecommendation
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
recommendation_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_recommendation_id(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe identifier of the recommendation to update.
locale(impl Into<String>)
/set_locale(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe language of the modified recommendation.
status(impl Into<String>)
/set_status(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe recommendation status to update.
Valid values:
-
active
-
dismissed
-
recommended_action_updates(RecommendedActionUpdate)
/set_recommended_action_updates(Option<Vec::<RecommendedActionUpdate>>)
:
required: falseThe list of recommended action status to update. You can update multiple recommended actions at one time.
- On success, responds with
ModifyDbRecommendationOutput
with field(s):db_recommendation(Option<DbRecommendation>)
:The recommendation for your DB instances, DB clusters, and DB parameter groups.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<ModifyDBRecommendationError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn modify_db_shard_group(&self) -> ModifyDBShardGroupFluentBuilder
pub fn modify_db_shard_group(&self) -> ModifyDBShardGroupFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the ModifyDBShardGroup
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_shard_group_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_shard_group_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the DB shard group to modify.
max_acu(f64)
/set_max_acu(Option<f64>)
:
required: falseThe maximum capacity of the DB shard group in Aurora capacity units (ACUs).
min_acu(f64)
/set_min_acu(Option<f64>)
:
required: falseThe minimum capacity of the DB shard group in Aurora capacity units (ACUs).
compute_redundancy(i32)
/set_compute_redundancy(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to create standby DB shard groups for the DB shard group. Valid values are the following:
-
0 - Creates a DB shard group without a standby DB shard group. This is the default value.
-
1 - Creates a DB shard group with a standby DB shard group in a different Availability Zone (AZ).
-
2 - Creates a DB shard group with two standby DB shard groups in two different AZs.
-
- On success, responds with
ModifyDbShardGroupOutput
with field(s):db_shard_group_resource_id(Option<String>)
:The Amazon Web Services Region-unique, immutable identifier for the DB shard group.
db_shard_group_identifier(Option<String>)
:The name of the DB shard group.
db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:The name of the primary DB cluster for the DB shard group.
max_acu(Option<f64>)
:The maximum capacity of the DB shard group in Aurora capacity units (ACUs).
min_acu(Option<f64>)
:The minimum capacity of the DB shard group in Aurora capacity units (ACUs).
compute_redundancy(Option<i32>)
:Specifies whether to create standby DB shard groups for the DB shard group. Valid values are the following:
-
0 - Creates a DB shard group without a standby DB shard group. This is the default value.
-
1 - Creates a DB shard group with a standby DB shard group in a different Availability Zone (AZ).
-
2 - Creates a DB shard group with two standby DB shard groups in two different AZs.
-
status(Option<String>)
:The status of the DB shard group.
publicly_accessible(Option<bool>)
:Indicates whether the DB shard group is publicly accessible.
When the DB shard group is publicly accessible, its Domain Name System (DNS) endpoint resolves to the private IP address from within the DB shard group’s virtual private cloud (VPC). It resolves to the public IP address from outside of the DB shard group’s VPC. Access to the DB shard group is ultimately controlled by the security group it uses. That public access isn’t permitted if the security group assigned to the DB shard group doesn’t permit it.
When the DB shard group isn’t publicly accessible, it is an internal DB shard group with a DNS name that resolves to a private IP address.
For more information, see
CreateDBShardGroup
.This setting is only for Aurora Limitless Database.
endpoint(Option<String>)
:The connection endpoint for the DB shard group.
db_shard_group_arn(Option<String>)
:The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the DB shard group.
tag_list(Option<Vec::<Tag>>)
:A list of tags.
For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide or Tagging Amazon Aurora and Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<ModifyDBShardGroupError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn modify_db_snapshot(&self) -> ModifyDBSnapshotFluentBuilder
pub fn modify_db_snapshot(&self) -> ModifyDBSnapshotFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the ModifyDBSnapshot
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_snapshot_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_snapshot_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe identifier of the DB snapshot to modify.
engine_version(impl Into<String>)
/set_engine_version(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe engine version to upgrade the DB snapshot to.
The following are the database engines and engine versions that are available when you upgrade a DB snapshot.
MySQL
For the list of engine versions that are available for upgrading a DB snapshot, see Upgrading a MySQL DB snapshot engine version in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
Oracle
-
19.0.0.0.ru-2022-01.rur-2022-01.r1
(supported for 12.2.0.1 DB snapshots) -
19.0.0.0.ru-2022-07.rur-2022-07.r1
(supported for 12.1.0.2 DB snapshots) -
12.1.0.2.v8
(supported for 12.1.0.1 DB snapshots) -
11.2.0.4.v12
(supported for 11.2.0.2 DB snapshots) -
11.2.0.4.v11
(supported for 11.2.0.3 DB snapshots)
PostgreSQL
For the list of engine versions that are available for upgrading a DB snapshot, see Upgrading a PostgreSQL DB snapshot engine version in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
-
option_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_option_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe option group to identify with the upgraded DB snapshot.
You can specify this parameter when you upgrade an Oracle DB snapshot. The same option group considerations apply when upgrading a DB snapshot as when upgrading a DB instance. For more information, see Option group considerations in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- On success, responds with
ModifyDbSnapshotOutput
with field(s):db_snapshot(Option<DbSnapshot>)
:Contains the details of an Amazon RDS DB snapshot.
This data type is used as a response element in the
DescribeDBSnapshots
action.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<ModifyDBSnapshotError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn modify_db_snapshot_attribute(
&self,
) -> ModifyDBSnapshotAttributeFluentBuilder
pub fn modify_db_snapshot_attribute( &self, ) -> ModifyDBSnapshotAttributeFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the ModifyDBSnapshotAttribute
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_snapshot_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_snapshot_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe identifier for the DB snapshot to modify the attributes for.
attribute_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_attribute_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the DB snapshot attribute to modify.
To manage authorization for other Amazon Web Services accounts to copy or restore a manual DB snapshot, set this value to
restore
.To view the list of attributes available to modify, use the
DescribeDBSnapshotAttributes
API operation.values_to_add(impl Into<String>)
/set_values_to_add(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseA list of DB snapshot attributes to add to the attribute specified by
AttributeName
.To authorize other Amazon Web Services accounts to copy or restore a manual snapshot, set this list to include one or more Amazon Web Services account IDs, or
all
to make the manual DB snapshot restorable by any Amazon Web Services account. Do not add theall
value for any manual DB snapshots that contain private information that you don’t want available to all Amazon Web Services accounts.values_to_remove(impl Into<String>)
/set_values_to_remove(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseA list of DB snapshot attributes to remove from the attribute specified by
AttributeName
.To remove authorization for other Amazon Web Services accounts to copy or restore a manual snapshot, set this list to include one or more Amazon Web Services account identifiers, or
all
to remove authorization for any Amazon Web Services account to copy or restore the DB snapshot. If you specifyall
, an Amazon Web Services account whose account ID is explicitly added to therestore
attribute can still copy or restore the manual DB snapshot.
- On success, responds with
ModifyDbSnapshotAttributeOutput
with field(s):db_snapshot_attributes_result(Option<DbSnapshotAttributesResult>)
:Contains the results of a successful call to the
DescribeDBSnapshotAttributes
API action.Manual DB snapshot attributes are used to authorize other Amazon Web Services accounts to copy or restore a manual DB snapshot. For more information, see the
ModifyDBSnapshotAttribute
API action.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<ModifyDBSnapshotAttributeError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn modify_db_subnet_group(&self) -> ModifyDBSubnetGroupFluentBuilder
pub fn modify_db_subnet_group(&self) -> ModifyDBSubnetGroupFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the ModifyDBSubnetGroup
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_subnet_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_subnet_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name for the DB subnet group. This value is stored as a lowercase string. You can’t modify the default subnet group.
Constraints: Must match the name of an existing DBSubnetGroup. Must not be default.
Example:
mydbsubnetgroup
db_subnet_group_description(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_subnet_group_description(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe description for the DB subnet group.
subnet_ids(impl Into<String>)
/set_subnet_ids(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: trueThe EC2 subnet IDs for the DB subnet group.
- On success, responds with
ModifyDbSubnetGroupOutput
with field(s):db_subnet_group(Option<DbSubnetGroup>)
:Contains the details of an Amazon RDS DB subnet group.
This data type is used as a response element in the
DescribeDBSubnetGroups
action.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<ModifyDBSubnetGroupError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn modify_event_subscription(&self) -> ModifyEventSubscriptionFluentBuilder
pub fn modify_event_subscription(&self) -> ModifyEventSubscriptionFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the ModifyEventSubscription
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
subscription_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_subscription_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the RDS event notification subscription.
sns_topic_arn(impl Into<String>)
/set_sns_topic_arn(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the SNS topic created for event notification. The ARN is created by Amazon SNS when you create a topic and subscribe to it.
source_type(impl Into<String>)
/set_source_type(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe type of source that is generating the events. For example, if you want to be notified of events generated by a DB instance, you would set this parameter to db-instance. For RDS Proxy events, specify
db-proxy
. If this value isn’t specified, all events are returned.Valid Values:
db-instance | db-cluster | db-parameter-group | db-security-group | db-snapshot | db-cluster-snapshot | db-proxy | zero-etl | custom-engine-version | blue-green-deployment
event_categories(impl Into<String>)
/set_event_categories(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseA list of event categories for a source type (
SourceType
) that you want to subscribe to. You can see a list of the categories for a given source type in Events in the Amazon RDS User Guide or by using theDescribeEventCategories
operation.enabled(bool)
/set_enabled(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to activate the subscription.
- On success, responds with
ModifyEventSubscriptionOutput
with field(s):event_subscription(Option<EventSubscription>)
:Contains the results of a successful invocation of the
DescribeEventSubscriptions
action.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<ModifyEventSubscriptionError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn modify_global_cluster(&self) -> ModifyGlobalClusterFluentBuilder
pub fn modify_global_cluster(&self) -> ModifyGlobalClusterFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the ModifyGlobalCluster
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
global_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_global_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe cluster identifier for the global cluster to modify. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
Constraints:
-
Must match the identifier of an existing global database cluster.
-
new_global_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_new_global_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe new cluster identifier for the global database cluster. This value is stored as a lowercase string.
Constraints:
-
Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens.
-
The first character must be a letter.
-
Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.
Example:
my-cluster2
-
deletion_protection(bool)
/set_deletion_protection(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to enable deletion protection for the global database cluster. The global database cluster can’t be deleted when deletion protection is enabled.
engine_version(impl Into<String>)
/set_engine_version(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe version number of the database engine to which you want to upgrade.
To list all of the available engine versions for
aurora-mysql
(for MySQL-based Aurora global databases), use the following command:aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine aurora-mysql –query ‘[]|[?SupportsGlobalDatabases ==
true
].[EngineVersion]’To list all of the available engine versions for
aurora-postgresql
(for PostgreSQL-based Aurora global databases), use the following command:aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine aurora-postgresql –query ‘[]|[?SupportsGlobalDatabases ==
true
].[EngineVersion]’allow_major_version_upgrade(bool)
/set_allow_major_version_upgrade(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to allow major version upgrades.
Constraints: Must be enabled if you specify a value for the
EngineVersion
parameter that’s a different major version than the global cluster’s current version.If you upgrade the major version of a global database, the cluster and DB instance parameter groups are set to the default parameter groups for the new version. Apply any custom parameter groups after completing the upgrade.
- On success, responds with
ModifyGlobalClusterOutput
with field(s):global_cluster(Option<GlobalCluster>)
:A data type representing an Aurora global database.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<ModifyGlobalClusterError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn modify_integration(&self) -> ModifyIntegrationFluentBuilder
pub fn modify_integration(&self) -> ModifyIntegrationFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the ModifyIntegration
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
integration_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_integration_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe unique identifier of the integration to modify.
integration_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_integration_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseA new name for the integration.
data_filter(impl Into<String>)
/set_data_filter(Option<String>)
:
required: falseA new data filter for the integration. For more information, see Data filtering for Aurora zero-ETL integrations with Amazon Redshift or Data filtering for Amazon RDS zero-ETL integrations with Amazon Redshift.
description(impl Into<String>)
/set_description(Option<String>)
:
required: falseA new description for the integration.
- On success, responds with
ModifyIntegrationOutput
with field(s):source_arn(Option<String>)
:The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the database used as the source for replication.
target_arn(Option<String>)
:The ARN of the Redshift data warehouse used as the target for replication.
integration_name(Option<String>)
:The name of the integration.
integration_arn(Option<String>)
:The ARN of the integration.
kms_key_id(Option<String>)
:The Amazon Web Services Key Management System (Amazon Web Services KMS) key identifier for the key used to to encrypt the integration.
additional_encryption_context(Option<HashMap::<String, String>>)
:The encryption context for the integration. For more information, see Encryption context in the Amazon Web Services Key Management Service Developer Guide.
status(Option<IntegrationStatus>)
:The current status of the integration.
tags(Option<Vec::<Tag>>)
:A list of tags.
For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide or Tagging Amazon Aurora and Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
create_time(Option<DateTime>)
:The time when the integration was created, in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).
errors(Option<Vec::<IntegrationError>>)
:Any errors associated with the integration.
data_filter(Option<String>)
:Data filters for the integration. These filters determine which tables from the source database are sent to the target Amazon Redshift data warehouse.
description(Option<String>)
:A description of the integration.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<ModifyIntegrationError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn modify_option_group(&self) -> ModifyOptionGroupFluentBuilder
pub fn modify_option_group(&self) -> ModifyOptionGroupFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the ModifyOptionGroup
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
option_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_option_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the option group to be modified.
Permanent options, such as the TDE option for Oracle Advanced Security TDE, can’t be removed from an option group, and that option group can’t be removed from a DB instance once it is associated with a DB instance
options_to_include(OptionConfiguration)
/set_options_to_include(Option<Vec::<OptionConfiguration>>)
:
required: falseOptions in this list are added to the option group or, if already present, the specified configuration is used to update the existing configuration.
options_to_remove(impl Into<String>)
/set_options_to_remove(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseOptions in this list are removed from the option group.
apply_immediately(bool)
/set_apply_immediately(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to apply the change immediately or during the next maintenance window for each instance associated with the option group.
- On success, responds with
ModifyOptionGroupOutput
with field(s): - On failure, responds with
SdkError<ModifyOptionGroupError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn modify_tenant_database(&self) -> ModifyTenantDatabaseFluentBuilder
pub fn modify_tenant_database(&self) -> ModifyTenantDatabaseFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the ModifyTenantDatabase
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe identifier of the DB instance that contains the tenant database that you are modifying. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
Constraints:
-
Must match the identifier of an existing DB instance.
-
tenant_db_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_tenant_db_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe user-supplied name of the tenant database that you want to modify. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
Constraints:
-
Must match the identifier of an existing tenant database.
-
master_user_password(impl Into<String>)
/set_master_user_password(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe new password for the master user of the specified tenant database in your DB instance.
Amazon RDS operations never return the password, so this action provides a way to regain access to a tenant database user if the password is lost. This includes restoring privileges that might have been accidentally revoked.
Constraints:
-
Can include any printable ASCII character except
/
,“
(double quote),@
,&
(ampersand), and’
(single quote).
Length constraints:
-
Must contain between 8 and 30 characters.
-
new_tenant_db_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_new_tenant_db_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe new name of the tenant database when renaming a tenant database. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
Constraints:
-
Can’t be the string null or any other reserved word.
-
Can’t be longer than 8 characters.
-
manage_master_user_password(bool)
/set_manage_master_user_password(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to manage the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.
If the tenant database doesn’t manage the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager, you can turn on this management. In this case, you can’t specify
MasterUserPassword
.If the tenant database already manages the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager, and you specify that the master user password is not managed with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager, then you must specify
MasterUserPassword
. In this case, Amazon RDS deletes the secret and uses the new password for the master user specified byMasterUserPassword
.For more information, see Password management with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
Constraints:
-
Can’t manage the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager if
MasterUserPassword
is specified.
-
rotate_master_user_password(bool)
/set_rotate_master_user_password(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to rotate the secret managed by Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager for the master user password.
This setting is valid only if the master user password is managed by RDS in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager for the DB instance. The secret value contains the updated password.
For more information, see Password management with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
Constraints:
-
You must apply the change immediately when rotating the master user password.
-
master_user_secret_kms_key_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_master_user_secret_kms_key_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier to encrypt a secret that is automatically generated and managed in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.
This setting is valid only if both of the following conditions are met:
-
The tenant database doesn’t manage the master user password in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.
If the tenant database already manages the master user password in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager, you can’t change the KMS key used to encrypt the secret.
-
You’re turning on
ManageMasterUserPassword
to manage the master user password in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.If you’re turning on
ManageMasterUserPassword
and don’t specifyMasterUserSecretKmsKeyId
, then theaws/secretsmanager
KMS key is used to encrypt the secret. If the secret is in a different Amazon Web Services account, then you can’t use theaws/secretsmanager
KMS key to encrypt the secret, and you must use a self-managed KMS key.
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is any of the following:
-
Key ARN
-
Key ID
-
Alias ARN
-
Alias name for the KMS key
To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN.
A default KMS key exists for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.
-
- On success, responds with
ModifyTenantDatabaseOutput
with field(s):tenant_database(Option<TenantDatabase>)
:A tenant database in the DB instance. This data type is an element in the response to the
DescribeTenantDatabases
action.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<ModifyTenantDatabaseError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn promote_read_replica(&self) -> PromoteReadReplicaFluentBuilder
pub fn promote_read_replica(&self) -> PromoteReadReplicaFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the PromoteReadReplica
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe DB instance identifier. This value is stored as a lowercase string.
Constraints:
-
Must match the identifier of an existing read replica DB instance.
Example:
mydbinstance
-
backup_retention_period(i32)
/set_backup_retention_period(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe number of days for which automated backups are retained. Setting this parameter to a positive number enables backups. Setting this parameter to 0 disables automated backups.
Default: 1
Constraints:
-
Must be a value from 0 to 35.
-
Can’t be set to 0 if the DB instance is a source to read replicas.
-
preferred_backup_window(impl Into<String>)
/set_preferred_backup_window(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe daily time range during which automated backups are created if automated backups are enabled, using the
BackupRetentionPeriod
parameter.The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region. To see the time blocks available, see Adjusting the Preferred Maintenance Window in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
Constraints:
-
Must be in the format
hh24:mi-hh24:mi
. -
Must be in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).
-
Must not conflict with the preferred maintenance window.
-
Must be at least 30 minutes.
-
- On success, responds with
PromoteReadReplicaOutput
with field(s):db_instance(Option<DbInstance>)
:Contains the details of an Amazon RDS DB instance.
This data type is used as a response element in the operations
CreateDBInstance
,CreateDBInstanceReadReplica
,DeleteDBInstance
,DescribeDBInstances
,ModifyDBInstance
,PromoteReadReplica
,RebootDBInstance
,RestoreDBInstanceFromDBSnapshot
,RestoreDBInstanceFromS3
,RestoreDBInstanceToPointInTime
,StartDBInstance
, andStopDBInstance
.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<PromoteReadReplicaError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn promote_read_replica_db_cluster(
&self,
) -> PromoteReadReplicaDBClusterFluentBuilder
pub fn promote_read_replica_db_cluster( &self, ) -> PromoteReadReplicaDBClusterFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the PromoteReadReplicaDBCluster
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe identifier of the DB cluster read replica to promote. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
Constraints:
-
Must match the identifier of an existing DB cluster read replica.
Example:
my-cluster-replica1
-
- On success, responds with
PromoteReadReplicaDbClusterOutput
with field(s):db_cluster(Option<DbCluster>)
:Contains the details of an Amazon Aurora DB cluster or Multi-AZ DB cluster.
For an Amazon Aurora DB cluster, this data type is used as a response element in the operations
CreateDBCluster
,DeleteDBCluster
,DescribeDBClusters
,FailoverDBCluster
,ModifyDBCluster
,PromoteReadReplicaDBCluster
,RestoreDBClusterFromS3
,RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot
,RestoreDBClusterToPointInTime
,StartDBCluster
, andStopDBCluster
.For a Multi-AZ DB cluster, this data type is used as a response element in the operations
CreateDBCluster
,DeleteDBCluster
,DescribeDBClusters
,FailoverDBCluster
,ModifyDBCluster
,RebootDBCluster
,RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot
, andRestoreDBClusterToPointInTime
.For more information on Amazon Aurora DB clusters, see What is Amazon Aurora? in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
For more information on Multi-AZ DB clusters, see Multi-AZ deployments with two readable standby DB instances in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<PromoteReadReplicaDBClusterError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn purchase_reserved_db_instances_offering(
&self,
) -> PurchaseReservedDBInstancesOfferingFluentBuilder
pub fn purchase_reserved_db_instances_offering( &self, ) -> PurchaseReservedDBInstancesOfferingFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the PurchaseReservedDBInstancesOffering
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
reserved_db_instances_offering_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_reserved_db_instances_offering_id(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe ID of the Reserved DB instance offering to purchase.
Example: 438012d3-4052-4cc7-b2e3-8d3372e0e706
reserved_db_instance_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_reserved_db_instance_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseCustomer-specified identifier to track this reservation.
Example: myreservationID
db_instance_count(i32)
/set_db_instance_count(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe number of instances to reserve.
Default:
1
tags(Tag)
/set_tags(Option<Vec::<Tag>>)
:
required: falseA list of tags.
For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide or Tagging Amazon Aurora and Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
- On success, responds with
PurchaseReservedDbInstancesOfferingOutput
with field(s):reserved_db_instance(Option<ReservedDbInstance>)
:This data type is used as a response element in the
DescribeReservedDBInstances
andPurchaseReservedDBInstancesOffering
actions.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<PurchaseReservedDBInstancesOfferingError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn reboot_db_cluster(&self) -> RebootDBClusterFluentBuilder
pub fn reboot_db_cluster(&self) -> RebootDBClusterFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the RebootDBCluster
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe DB cluster identifier. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
Constraints:
-
Must match the identifier of an existing DBCluster.
-
- On success, responds with
RebootDbClusterOutput
with field(s):db_cluster(Option<DbCluster>)
:Contains the details of an Amazon Aurora DB cluster or Multi-AZ DB cluster.
For an Amazon Aurora DB cluster, this data type is used as a response element in the operations
CreateDBCluster
,DeleteDBCluster
,DescribeDBClusters
,FailoverDBCluster
,ModifyDBCluster
,PromoteReadReplicaDBCluster
,RestoreDBClusterFromS3
,RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot
,RestoreDBClusterToPointInTime
,StartDBCluster
, andStopDBCluster
.For a Multi-AZ DB cluster, this data type is used as a response element in the operations
CreateDBCluster
,DeleteDBCluster
,DescribeDBClusters
,FailoverDBCluster
,ModifyDBCluster
,RebootDBCluster
,RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot
, andRestoreDBClusterToPointInTime
.For more information on Amazon Aurora DB clusters, see What is Amazon Aurora? in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
For more information on Multi-AZ DB clusters, see Multi-AZ deployments with two readable standby DB instances in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<RebootDBClusterError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn reboot_db_instance(&self) -> RebootDBInstanceFluentBuilder
pub fn reboot_db_instance(&self) -> RebootDBInstanceFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the RebootDBInstance
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe DB instance identifier. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
Constraints:
-
Must match the identifier of an existing DBInstance.
-
force_failover(bool)
/set_force_failover(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether the reboot is conducted through a Multi-AZ failover.
Constraint: You can’t enable force failover if the instance isn’t configured for Multi-AZ.
- On success, responds with
RebootDbInstanceOutput
with field(s):db_instance(Option<DbInstance>)
:Contains the details of an Amazon RDS DB instance.
This data type is used as a response element in the operations
CreateDBInstance
,CreateDBInstanceReadReplica
,DeleteDBInstance
,DescribeDBInstances
,ModifyDBInstance
,PromoteReadReplica
,RebootDBInstance
,RestoreDBInstanceFromDBSnapshot
,RestoreDBInstanceFromS3
,RestoreDBInstanceToPointInTime
,StartDBInstance
, andStopDBInstance
.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<RebootDBInstanceError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn reboot_db_shard_group(&self) -> RebootDBShardGroupFluentBuilder
pub fn reboot_db_shard_group(&self) -> RebootDBShardGroupFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the RebootDBShardGroup
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_shard_group_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_shard_group_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the DB shard group to reboot.
- On success, responds with
RebootDbShardGroupOutput
with field(s):db_shard_group_resource_id(Option<String>)
:The Amazon Web Services Region-unique, immutable identifier for the DB shard group.
db_shard_group_identifier(Option<String>)
:The name of the DB shard group.
db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:The name of the primary DB cluster for the DB shard group.
max_acu(Option<f64>)
:The maximum capacity of the DB shard group in Aurora capacity units (ACUs).
min_acu(Option<f64>)
:The minimum capacity of the DB shard group in Aurora capacity units (ACUs).
compute_redundancy(Option<i32>)
:Specifies whether to create standby DB shard groups for the DB shard group. Valid values are the following:
-
0 - Creates a DB shard group without a standby DB shard group. This is the default value.
-
1 - Creates a DB shard group with a standby DB shard group in a different Availability Zone (AZ).
-
2 - Creates a DB shard group with two standby DB shard groups in two different AZs.
-
status(Option<String>)
:The status of the DB shard group.
publicly_accessible(Option<bool>)
:Indicates whether the DB shard group is publicly accessible.
When the DB shard group is publicly accessible, its Domain Name System (DNS) endpoint resolves to the private IP address from within the DB shard group’s virtual private cloud (VPC). It resolves to the public IP address from outside of the DB shard group’s VPC. Access to the DB shard group is ultimately controlled by the security group it uses. That public access isn’t permitted if the security group assigned to the DB shard group doesn’t permit it.
When the DB shard group isn’t publicly accessible, it is an internal DB shard group with a DNS name that resolves to a private IP address.
For more information, see
CreateDBShardGroup
.This setting is only for Aurora Limitless Database.
endpoint(Option<String>)
:The connection endpoint for the DB shard group.
db_shard_group_arn(Option<String>)
:The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the DB shard group.
tag_list(Option<Vec::<Tag>>)
:A list of tags.
For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide or Tagging Amazon Aurora and Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<RebootDBShardGroupError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn register_db_proxy_targets(&self) -> RegisterDBProxyTargetsFluentBuilder
pub fn register_db_proxy_targets(&self) -> RegisterDBProxyTargetsFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the RegisterDBProxyTargets
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_proxy_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_proxy_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe identifier of the
DBProxy
that is associated with theDBProxyTargetGroup
.target_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_target_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe identifier of the
DBProxyTargetGroup
.db_instance_identifiers(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_instance_identifiers(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseOne or more DB instance identifiers.
db_cluster_identifiers(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_identifiers(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseOne or more DB cluster identifiers.
- On success, responds with
RegisterDbProxyTargetsOutput
with field(s):db_proxy_targets(Option<Vec::<DbProxyTarget>>)
:One or more
DBProxyTarget
objects that are created when you register targets with a target group.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<RegisterDBProxyTargetsError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn remove_from_global_cluster(&self) -> RemoveFromGlobalClusterFluentBuilder
pub fn remove_from_global_cluster(&self) -> RemoveFromGlobalClusterFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the RemoveFromGlobalCluster
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
global_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_global_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe cluster identifier to detach from the Aurora global database cluster.
db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Resource Name (ARN) identifying the cluster that was detached from the Aurora global database cluster.
- On success, responds with
RemoveFromGlobalClusterOutput
with field(s):global_cluster(Option<GlobalCluster>)
:A data type representing an Aurora global database.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<RemoveFromGlobalClusterError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn remove_role_from_db_cluster(
&self,
) -> RemoveRoleFromDBClusterFluentBuilder
pub fn remove_role_from_db_cluster( &self, ) -> RemoveRoleFromDBClusterFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the RemoveRoleFromDBCluster
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the DB cluster to disassociate the IAM role from.
role_arn(impl Into<String>)
/set_role_arn(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role to disassociate from the Aurora DB cluster, for example
arn:aws:iam::123456789012:role/AuroraAccessRole
.feature_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_feature_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of the feature for the DB cluster that the IAM role is to be disassociated from. For information about supported feature names, see
DBEngineVersion
.
- On success, responds with
RemoveRoleFromDbClusterOutput
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<RemoveRoleFromDBClusterError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn remove_role_from_db_instance(
&self,
) -> RemoveRoleFromDBInstanceFluentBuilder
pub fn remove_role_from_db_instance( &self, ) -> RemoveRoleFromDBInstanceFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the RemoveRoleFromDBInstance
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the DB instance to disassociate the IAM role from.
role_arn(impl Into<String>)
/set_role_arn(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role to disassociate from the DB instance, for example,
arn:aws:iam::123456789012:role/AccessRole
.feature_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_feature_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the feature for the DB instance that the IAM role is to be disassociated from. For information about supported feature names, see
DBEngineVersion
.
- On success, responds with
RemoveRoleFromDbInstanceOutput
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<RemoveRoleFromDBInstanceError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn remove_source_identifier_from_subscription(
&self,
) -> RemoveSourceIdentifierFromSubscriptionFluentBuilder
pub fn remove_source_identifier_from_subscription( &self, ) -> RemoveSourceIdentifierFromSubscriptionFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the RemoveSourceIdentifierFromSubscription
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
subscription_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_subscription_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the RDS event notification subscription you want to remove a source identifier from.
source_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_source_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe source identifier to be removed from the subscription, such as the DB instance identifier for a DB instance or the name of a security group.
- On success, responds with
RemoveSourceIdentifierFromSubscriptionOutput
with field(s):event_subscription(Option<EventSubscription>)
:Contains the results of a successful invocation of the
DescribeEventSubscriptions
action.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<RemoveSourceIdentifierFromSubscriptionError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Constructs a fluent builder for the RemoveTagsFromResource
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
resource_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_resource_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe Amazon RDS resource that the tags are removed from. This value is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN). For information about creating an ARN, see Constructing an ARN for Amazon RDS in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
tag_keys(impl Into<String>)
/set_tag_keys(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: trueThe tag key (name) of the tag to be removed.
- On success, responds with
RemoveTagsFromResourceOutput
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<RemoveTagsFromResourceError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn reset_db_cluster_parameter_group(
&self,
) -> ResetDBClusterParameterGroupFluentBuilder
pub fn reset_db_cluster_parameter_group( &self, ) -> ResetDBClusterParameterGroupFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the ResetDBClusterParameterGroup
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_cluster_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_parameter_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the DB cluster parameter group to reset.
reset_all_parameters(bool)
/set_reset_all_parameters(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to reset all parameters in the DB cluster parameter group to their default values. You can’t use this parameter if there is a list of parameter names specified for the
Parameters
parameter.parameters(Parameter)
/set_parameters(Option<Vec::<Parameter>>)
:
required: falseA list of parameter names in the DB cluster parameter group to reset to the default values. You can’t use this parameter if the
ResetAllParameters
parameter is enabled.
- On success, responds with
ResetDbClusterParameterGroupOutput
with field(s):db_cluster_parameter_group_name(Option<String>)
:The name of the DB cluster parameter group.
Constraints:
-
Must be 1 to 255 letters or numbers.
-
First character must be a letter
-
Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens
This value is stored as a lowercase string.
-
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<ResetDBClusterParameterGroupError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn reset_db_parameter_group(&self) -> ResetDBParameterGroupFluentBuilder
pub fn reset_db_parameter_group(&self) -> ResetDBParameterGroupFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the ResetDBParameterGroup
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_parameter_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the DB parameter group.
Constraints:
-
Must match the name of an existing
DBParameterGroup
.
-
reset_all_parameters(bool)
/set_reset_all_parameters(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to reset all parameters in the DB parameter group to default values. By default, all parameters in the DB parameter group are reset to default values.
parameters(Parameter)
/set_parameters(Option<Vec::<Parameter>>)
:
required: falseTo reset the entire DB parameter group, specify the
DBParameterGroup
name andResetAllParameters
parameters. To reset specific parameters, provide a list of the following:ParameterName
andApplyMethod
. A maximum of 20 parameters can be modified in a single request.MySQL
Valid Values (for Apply method):
immediate
|pending-reboot
You can use the immediate value with dynamic parameters only. You can use the
pending-reboot
value for both dynamic and static parameters, and changes are applied when DB instance reboots.MariaDB
Valid Values (for Apply method):
immediate
|pending-reboot
You can use the immediate value with dynamic parameters only. You can use the
pending-reboot
value for both dynamic and static parameters, and changes are applied when DB instance reboots.Oracle
Valid Values (for Apply method):
pending-reboot
- On success, responds with
ResetDbParameterGroupOutput
with field(s):db_parameter_group_name(Option<String>)
:The name of the DB parameter group.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<ResetDBParameterGroupError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn restore_db_cluster_from_s3(&self) -> RestoreDBClusterFromS3FluentBuilder
pub fn restore_db_cluster_from_s3(&self) -> RestoreDBClusterFromS3FluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the RestoreDBClusterFromS3
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
availability_zones(impl Into<String>)
/set_availability_zones(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseA list of Availability Zones (AZs) where instances in the restored DB cluster can be created.
backup_retention_period(i32)
/set_backup_retention_period(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe number of days for which automated backups of the restored DB cluster are retained. You must specify a minimum value of 1.
Default: 1
Constraints:
-
Must be a value from 1 to 35
-
character_set_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_character_set_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseA value that indicates that the restored DB cluster should be associated with the specified CharacterSet.
database_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_database_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe database name for the restored DB cluster.
db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the DB cluster to create from the source data in the Amazon S3 bucket. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
Constraints:
-
Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens.
-
First character must be a letter.
-
Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.
Example:
my-cluster1
-
db_cluster_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_parameter_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of the DB cluster parameter group to associate with the restored DB cluster. If this argument is omitted, the default parameter group for the engine version is used.
Constraints:
-
If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBClusterParameterGroup.
-
vpc_security_group_ids(impl Into<String>)
/set_vpc_security_group_ids(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseA list of EC2 VPC security groups to associate with the restored DB cluster.
db_subnet_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_subnet_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseA DB subnet group to associate with the restored DB cluster.
Constraints: If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBSubnetGroup.
Example:
mydbsubnetgroup
engine(impl Into<String>)
/set_engine(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the database engine to be used for this DB cluster.
Valid Values:
aurora-mysql
(for Aurora MySQL)engine_version(impl Into<String>)
/set_engine_version(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe version number of the database engine to use.
To list all of the available engine versions for
aurora-mysql
(Aurora MySQL), use the following command:aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine aurora-mysql –query “DBEngineVersions[].EngineVersion”
Aurora MySQL
Examples:
5.7.mysql_aurora.2.12.0
,8.0.mysql_aurora.3.04.0
port(i32)
/set_port(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe port number on which the instances in the restored DB cluster accept connections.
Default:
3306
master_username(impl Into<String>)
/set_master_username(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the master user for the restored DB cluster.
Constraints:
-
Must be 1 to 16 letters or numbers.
-
First character must be a letter.
-
Can’t be a reserved word for the chosen database engine.
-
master_user_password(impl Into<String>)
/set_master_user_password(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe password for the master database user. This password can contain any printable ASCII character except “/”, “”“, or “@”.
Constraints:
-
Must contain from 8 to 41 characters.
-
Can’t be specified if
ManageMasterUserPassword
is turned on.
-
option_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_option_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseA value that indicates that the restored DB cluster should be associated with the specified option group.
Permanent options can’t be removed from an option group. An option group can’t be removed from a DB cluster once it is associated with a DB cluster.
preferred_backup_window(impl Into<String>)
/set_preferred_backup_window(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe daily time range during which automated backups are created if automated backups are enabled using the
BackupRetentionPeriod
parameter.The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region. To view the time blocks available, see Backup window in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
Constraints:
-
Must be in the format
hh24:mi-hh24:mi
. -
Must be in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).
-
Must not conflict with the preferred maintenance window.
-
Must be at least 30 minutes.
-
preferred_maintenance_window(impl Into<String>)
/set_preferred_maintenance_window(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe weekly time range during which system maintenance can occur, in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).
Format:
ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi
The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region, occurring on a random day of the week. To see the time blocks available, see Adjusting the Preferred Maintenance Window in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
Valid Days: Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun.
Constraints: Minimum 30-minute window.
tags(Tag)
/set_tags(Option<Vec::<Tag>>)
:
required: falseA list of tags.
For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide or Tagging Amazon Aurora and Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
storage_encrypted(bool)
/set_storage_encrypted(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether the restored DB cluster is encrypted.
kms_key_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_kms_key_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for an encrypted DB cluster.
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN.
If the StorageEncrypted parameter is enabled, and you do not specify a value for the
KmsKeyId
parameter, then Amazon RDS will use your default KMS key. There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.enable_iam_database_authentication(bool)
/set_enable_iam_database_authentication(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to enable mapping of Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts. By default, mapping isn’t enabled.
For more information, see IAM Database Authentication in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
source_engine(impl Into<String>)
/set_source_engine(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe identifier for the database engine that was backed up to create the files stored in the Amazon S3 bucket.
Valid Values:
mysql
source_engine_version(impl Into<String>)
/set_source_engine_version(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe version of the database that the backup files were created from.
MySQL versions 5.7 and 8.0 are supported.
Example:
5.7.40
,8.0.28
s3_bucket_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_s3_bucket_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the Amazon S3 bucket that contains the data used to create the Amazon Aurora DB cluster.
s3_prefix(impl Into<String>)
/set_s3_prefix(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe prefix for all of the file names that contain the data used to create the Amazon Aurora DB cluster. If you do not specify a SourceS3Prefix value, then the Amazon Aurora DB cluster is created by using all of the files in the Amazon S3 bucket.
s3_ingestion_role_arn(impl Into<String>)
/set_s3_ingestion_role_arn(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) role that authorizes Amazon RDS to access the Amazon S3 bucket on your behalf.
backtrack_window(i64)
/set_backtrack_window(Option<i64>)
:
required: falseThe target backtrack window, in seconds. To disable backtracking, set this value to 0.
Currently, Backtrack is only supported for Aurora MySQL DB clusters.
Default: 0
Constraints:
-
If specified, this value must be set to a number from 0 to 259,200 (72 hours).
-
enable_cloudwatch_logs_exports(impl Into<String>)
/set_enable_cloudwatch_logs_exports(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseThe list of logs that the restored DB cluster is to export to CloudWatch Logs. The values in the list depend on the DB engine being used.
Aurora MySQL
Possible values are
audit
,error
,general
,instance
,slowquery
, andiam-db-auth-error
.Aurora PostgreSQL
Possible value are
instance
,postgresql
, andiam-db-auth-error
.For more information about exporting CloudWatch Logs for Amazon RDS, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
For more information about exporting CloudWatch Logs for Amazon Aurora, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
deletion_protection(bool)
/set_deletion_protection(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to enable deletion protection for the DB cluster. The database can’t be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection isn’t enabled.
copy_tags_to_snapshot(bool)
/set_copy_tags_to_snapshot(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to copy all tags from the restored DB cluster to snapshots of the restored DB cluster. The default is not to copy them.
domain(impl Into<String>)
/set_domain(Option<String>)
:
required: falseSpecify the Active Directory directory ID to restore the DB cluster in. The domain must be created prior to this operation.
For Amazon Aurora DB clusters, Amazon RDS can use Kerberos Authentication to authenticate users that connect to the DB cluster. For more information, see Kerberos Authentication in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
domain_iam_role_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_domain_iam_role_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseSpecify the name of the IAM role to be used when making API calls to the Directory Service.
serverless_v2_scaling_configuration(ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration)
/set_serverless_v2_scaling_configuration(Option<ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration>)
:
required: falseContains the scaling configuration of an Aurora Serverless v2 DB cluster.
For more information, see Using Amazon Aurora Serverless v2 in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
network_type(impl Into<String>)
/set_network_type(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe network type of the DB cluster.
Valid Values:
-
IPV4
-
DUAL
The network type is determined by the
DBSubnetGroup
specified for the DB cluster. ADBSubnetGroup
can support only the IPv4 protocol or the IPv4 and the IPv6 protocols (DUAL
).For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
-
manage_master_user_password(bool)
/set_manage_master_user_password(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to manage the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.
For more information, see Password management with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager in the Amazon RDS User Guide and Password management with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
Constraints:
-
Can’t manage the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager if
MasterUserPassword
is specified.
-
master_user_secret_kms_key_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_master_user_secret_kms_key_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier to encrypt a secret that is automatically generated and managed in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.
This setting is valid only if the master user password is managed by RDS in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager for the DB cluster.
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN.
If you don’t specify
MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId
, then theaws/secretsmanager
KMS key is used to encrypt the secret. If the secret is in a different Amazon Web Services account, then you can’t use theaws/secretsmanager
KMS key to encrypt the secret, and you must use a customer managed KMS key.There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.
storage_type(impl Into<String>)
/set_storage_type(Option<String>)
:
required: falseSpecifies the storage type to be associated with the DB cluster.
Valid Values:
aurora
,aurora-iopt1
Default:
aurora
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
engine_lifecycle_support(impl Into<String>)
/set_engine_lifecycle_support(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe life cycle type for this DB cluster.
By default, this value is set to
open-source-rds-extended-support
, which enrolls your DB cluster into Amazon RDS Extended Support. At the end of standard support, you can avoid charges for Extended Support by setting the value toopen-source-rds-extended-support-disabled
. In this case, RDS automatically upgrades your restored DB cluster to a higher engine version, if the major engine version is past its end of standard support date.You can use this setting to enroll your DB cluster into Amazon RDS Extended Support. With RDS Extended Support, you can run the selected major engine version on your DB cluster past the end of standard support for that engine version. For more information, see the following sections:
-
Amazon Aurora - Using Amazon RDS Extended Support in the Amazon Aurora User Guide
-
Amazon RDS - Using Amazon RDS Extended Support in the Amazon RDS User Guide
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
Valid Values:
open-source-rds-extended-support | open-source-rds-extended-support-disabled
Default:
open-source-rds-extended-support
-
- On success, responds with
RestoreDbClusterFromS3Output
with field(s):db_cluster(Option<DbCluster>)
:Contains the details of an Amazon Aurora DB cluster or Multi-AZ DB cluster.
For an Amazon Aurora DB cluster, this data type is used as a response element in the operations
CreateDBCluster
,DeleteDBCluster
,DescribeDBClusters
,FailoverDBCluster
,ModifyDBCluster
,PromoteReadReplicaDBCluster
,RestoreDBClusterFromS3
,RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot
,RestoreDBClusterToPointInTime
,StartDBCluster
, andStopDBCluster
.For a Multi-AZ DB cluster, this data type is used as a response element in the operations
CreateDBCluster
,DeleteDBCluster
,DescribeDBClusters
,FailoverDBCluster
,ModifyDBCluster
,RebootDBCluster
,RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot
, andRestoreDBClusterToPointInTime
.For more information on Amazon Aurora DB clusters, see What is Amazon Aurora? in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
For more information on Multi-AZ DB clusters, see Multi-AZ deployments with two readable standby DB instances in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<RestoreDBClusterFromS3Error>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn restore_db_cluster_from_snapshot(
&self,
) -> RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshotFluentBuilder
pub fn restore_db_cluster_from_snapshot( &self, ) -> RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshotFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
availability_zones(impl Into<String>)
/set_availability_zones(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseProvides the list of Availability Zones (AZs) where instances in the restored DB cluster can be created.
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the DB cluster to create from the DB snapshot or DB cluster snapshot. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
Constraints:
-
Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens
-
First character must be a letter
-
Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens
Example:
my-snapshot-id
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
-
snapshot_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_snapshot_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe identifier for the DB snapshot or DB cluster snapshot to restore from.
You can use either the name or the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) to specify a DB cluster snapshot. However, you can use only the ARN to specify a DB snapshot.
Constraints:
-
Must match the identifier of an existing Snapshot.
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
-
engine(impl Into<String>)
/set_engine(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe database engine to use for the new DB cluster.
Default: The same as source
Constraint: Must be compatible with the engine of the source
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
engine_version(impl Into<String>)
/set_engine_version(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe version of the database engine to use for the new DB cluster. If you don’t specify an engine version, the default version for the database engine in the Amazon Web Services Region is used.
To list all of the available engine versions for Aurora MySQL, use the following command:
aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine aurora-mysql –query “DBEngineVersions[].EngineVersion”
To list all of the available engine versions for Aurora PostgreSQL, use the following command:
aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine aurora-postgresql –query “DBEngineVersions[].EngineVersion”
To list all of the available engine versions for RDS for MySQL, use the following command:
aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine mysql –query “DBEngineVersions[].EngineVersion”
To list all of the available engine versions for RDS for PostgreSQL, use the following command:
aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine postgres –query “DBEngineVersions[].EngineVersion”
Aurora MySQL
See Database engine updates for Amazon Aurora MySQL in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
Aurora PostgreSQL
See Amazon Aurora PostgreSQL releases and engine versions in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
MySQL
See Amazon RDS for MySQL in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
PostgreSQL
See Amazon RDS for PostgreSQL versions and extensions in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
port(i32)
/set_port(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe port number on which the new DB cluster accepts connections.
Constraints: This value must be
1150-65535
Default: The same port as the original DB cluster.
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
db_subnet_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_subnet_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of the DB subnet group to use for the new DB cluster.
Constraints: If supplied, must match the name of an existing DB subnet group.
Example:
mydbsubnetgroup
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
database_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_database_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe database name for the restored DB cluster.
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
option_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_option_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of the option group to use for the restored DB cluster.
DB clusters are associated with a default option group that can’t be modified.
vpc_security_group_ids(impl Into<String>)
/set_vpc_security_group_ids(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseA list of VPC security groups that the new DB cluster will belong to.
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
tags(Tag)
/set_tags(Option<Vec::<Tag>>)
:
required: falseThe tags to be assigned to the restored DB cluster.
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
kms_key_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_kms_key_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier to use when restoring an encrypted DB cluster from a DB snapshot or DB cluster snapshot.
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN.
When you don’t specify a value for the
KmsKeyId
parameter, then the following occurs:-
If the DB snapshot or DB cluster snapshot in
SnapshotIdentifier
is encrypted, then the restored DB cluster is encrypted using the KMS key that was used to encrypt the DB snapshot or DB cluster snapshot. -
If the DB snapshot or DB cluster snapshot in
SnapshotIdentifier
isn’t encrypted, then the restored DB cluster isn’t encrypted.
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
-
enable_iam_database_authentication(bool)
/set_enable_iam_database_authentication(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to enable mapping of Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts. By default, mapping isn’t enabled.
For more information, see IAM Database Authentication in the Amazon Aurora User Guide or IAM database authentication for MariaDB, MySQL, and PostgreSQL in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
backtrack_window(i64)
/set_backtrack_window(Option<i64>)
:
required: falseThe target backtrack window, in seconds. To disable backtracking, set this value to 0.
Currently, Backtrack is only supported for Aurora MySQL DB clusters.
Default: 0
Constraints:
-
If specified, this value must be set to a number from 0 to 259,200 (72 hours).
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
-
enable_cloudwatch_logs_exports(impl Into<String>)
/set_enable_cloudwatch_logs_exports(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseThe list of logs that the restored DB cluster is to export to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. The values in the list depend on the DB engine being used.
RDS for MySQL
Possible values are
error
,general
,slowquery
, andiam-db-auth-error
.RDS for PostgreSQL
Possible values are
postgresql
,upgrade
, andiam-db-auth-error
.Aurora MySQL
Possible values are
audit
,error
,general
,instance
,slowquery
, andiam-db-auth-error
.Aurora PostgreSQL
Possible value are
instance
,postgresql
, andiam-db-auth-error
.For more information about exporting CloudWatch Logs for Amazon RDS, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
For more information about exporting CloudWatch Logs for Amazon Aurora, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
engine_mode(impl Into<String>)
/set_engine_mode(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe DB engine mode of the DB cluster, either
provisioned
orserverless
.For more information, see CreateDBCluster.
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
scaling_configuration(ScalingConfiguration)
/set_scaling_configuration(Option<ScalingConfiguration>)
:
required: falseFor DB clusters in
serverless
DB engine mode, the scaling properties of the DB cluster.Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
db_cluster_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_parameter_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of the DB cluster parameter group to associate with this DB cluster. If this argument is omitted, the default DB cluster parameter group for the specified engine is used.
Constraints:
-
If supplied, must match the name of an existing default DB cluster parameter group.
-
Must be 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens.
-
First character must be a letter.
-
Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
-
deletion_protection(bool)
/set_deletion_protection(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to enable deletion protection for the DB cluster. The database can’t be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection isn’t enabled.
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
copy_tags_to_snapshot(bool)
/set_copy_tags_to_snapshot(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to copy all tags from the restored DB cluster to snapshots of the restored DB cluster. The default is not to copy them.
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
domain(impl Into<String>)
/set_domain(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Active Directory directory ID to restore the DB cluster in. The domain must be created prior to this operation. Currently, only MySQL, Microsoft SQL Server, Oracle, and PostgreSQL DB instances can be created in an Active Directory Domain.
For more information, see Kerberos Authentication in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
domain_iam_role_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_domain_iam_role_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of the IAM role to be used when making API calls to the Directory Service.
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
db_cluster_instance_class(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_instance_class(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe compute and memory capacity of the each DB instance in the Multi-AZ DB cluster, for example db.m6gd.xlarge. Not all DB instance classes are available in all Amazon Web Services Regions, or for all database engines.
For the full list of DB instance classes, and availability for your engine, see DB Instance Class in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
Valid for: Multi-AZ DB clusters only
storage_type(impl Into<String>)
/set_storage_type(Option<String>)
:
required: falseSpecifies the storage type to be associated with the DB cluster.
When specified for a Multi-AZ DB cluster, a value for the
Iops
parameter is required.Valid Values:
aurora
,aurora-iopt1
(Aurora DB clusters);io1
(Multi-AZ DB clusters)Default:
aurora
(Aurora DB clusters);io1
(Multi-AZ DB clusters)Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
iops(i32)
/set_iops(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe amount of Provisioned IOPS (input/output operations per second) to be initially allocated for each DB instance in the Multi-AZ DB cluster.
For information about valid IOPS values, see Amazon RDS Provisioned IOPS storage in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
Constraints: Must be a multiple between .5 and 50 of the storage amount for the DB instance.
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
publicly_accessible(bool)
/set_publicly_accessible(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether the DB cluster is publicly accessible.
When the DB cluster is publicly accessible, its Domain Name System (DNS) endpoint resolves to the private IP address from within the DB cluster’s virtual private cloud (VPC). It resolves to the public IP address from outside of the DB cluster’s VPC. Access to the DB cluster is ultimately controlled by the security group it uses. That public access is not permitted if the security group assigned to the DB cluster doesn’t permit it.
When the DB cluster isn’t publicly accessible, it is an internal DB cluster with a DNS name that resolves to a private IP address.
Default: The default behavior varies depending on whether
DBSubnetGroupName
is specified.If
DBSubnetGroupName
isn’t specified, andPubliclyAccessible
isn’t specified, the following applies:-
If the default VPC in the target Region doesn’t have an internet gateway attached to it, the DB cluster is private.
-
If the default VPC in the target Region has an internet gateway attached to it, the DB cluster is public.
If
DBSubnetGroupName
is specified, andPubliclyAccessible
isn’t specified, the following applies:-
If the subnets are part of a VPC that doesn’t have an internet gateway attached to it, the DB cluster is private.
-
If the subnets are part of a VPC that has an internet gateway attached to it, the DB cluster is public.
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
-
serverless_v2_scaling_configuration(ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration)
/set_serverless_v2_scaling_configuration(Option<ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration>)
:
required: falseContains the scaling configuration of an Aurora Serverless v2 DB cluster.
For more information, see Using Amazon Aurora Serverless v2 in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
network_type(impl Into<String>)
/set_network_type(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe network type of the DB cluster.
Valid Values:
-
IPV4
-
DUAL
The network type is determined by the
DBSubnetGroup
specified for the DB cluster. ADBSubnetGroup
can support only the IPv4 protocol or the IPv4 and the IPv6 protocols (DUAL
).For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
-
rds_custom_cluster_configuration(RdsCustomClusterConfiguration)
/set_rds_custom_cluster_configuration(Option<RdsCustomClusterConfiguration>)
:
required: falseReserved for future use.
monitoring_interval(i32)
/set_monitoring_interval(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe interval, in seconds, between points when Enhanced Monitoring metrics are collected for the DB cluster. To turn off collecting Enhanced Monitoring metrics, specify
0
.If
MonitoringRoleArn
is specified, also setMonitoringInterval
to a value other than0
.Valid Values:
0 | 1 | 5 | 10 | 15 | 30 | 60
Default:
0
monitoring_role_arn(impl Into<String>)
/set_monitoring_role_arn(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the IAM role that permits RDS to send Enhanced Monitoring metrics to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. An example is
arn:aws:iam:123456789012:role/emaccess
.If
MonitoringInterval
is set to a value other than0
, supply aMonitoringRoleArn
value.enable_performance_insights(bool)
/set_enable_performance_insights(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to turn on Performance Insights for the DB cluster.
performance_insights_kms_key_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_performance_insights_kms_key_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for encryption of Performance Insights data.
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key.
If you don’t specify a value for
PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId
, then Amazon RDS uses your default KMS key. There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.performance_insights_retention_period(i32)
/set_performance_insights_retention_period(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe number of days to retain Performance Insights data.
Valid Values:
-
7
-
month * 31, where month is a number of months from 1-23. Examples:
93
(3 months * 31),341
(11 months * 31),589
(19 months * 31) -
731
Default:
7
daysIf you specify a retention period that isn’t valid, such as
94
, Amazon RDS issues an error.-
engine_lifecycle_support(impl Into<String>)
/set_engine_lifecycle_support(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe life cycle type for this DB cluster.
By default, this value is set to
open-source-rds-extended-support
, which enrolls your DB cluster into Amazon RDS Extended Support. At the end of standard support, you can avoid charges for Extended Support by setting the value toopen-source-rds-extended-support-disabled
. In this case, RDS automatically upgrades your restored DB cluster to a higher engine version, if the major engine version is past its end of standard support date.You can use this setting to enroll your DB cluster into Amazon RDS Extended Support. With RDS Extended Support, you can run the selected major engine version on your DB cluster past the end of standard support for that engine version. For more information, see the following sections:
-
Amazon Aurora - Using Amazon RDS Extended Support in the Amazon Aurora User Guide
-
Amazon RDS - Using Amazon RDS Extended Support in the Amazon RDS User Guide
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
Valid Values:
open-source-rds-extended-support | open-source-rds-extended-support-disabled
Default:
open-source-rds-extended-support
-
- On success, responds with
RestoreDbClusterFromSnapshotOutput
with field(s):db_cluster(Option<DbCluster>)
:Contains the details of an Amazon Aurora DB cluster or Multi-AZ DB cluster.
For an Amazon Aurora DB cluster, this data type is used as a response element in the operations
CreateDBCluster
,DeleteDBCluster
,DescribeDBClusters
,FailoverDBCluster
,ModifyDBCluster
,PromoteReadReplicaDBCluster
,RestoreDBClusterFromS3
,RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot
,RestoreDBClusterToPointInTime
,StartDBCluster
, andStopDBCluster
.For a Multi-AZ DB cluster, this data type is used as a response element in the operations
CreateDBCluster
,DeleteDBCluster
,DescribeDBClusters
,FailoverDBCluster
,ModifyDBCluster
,RebootDBCluster
,RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot
, andRestoreDBClusterToPointInTime
.For more information on Amazon Aurora DB clusters, see What is Amazon Aurora? in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
For more information on Multi-AZ DB clusters, see Multi-AZ deployments with two readable standby DB instances in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshotError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn restore_db_cluster_to_point_in_time(
&self,
) -> RestoreDBClusterToPointInTimeFluentBuilder
pub fn restore_db_cluster_to_point_in_time( &self, ) -> RestoreDBClusterToPointInTimeFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the RestoreDBClusterToPointInTime
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the new DB cluster to be created.
Constraints:
-
Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens
-
First character must be a letter
-
Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
-
restore_type(impl Into<String>)
/set_restore_type(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe type of restore to be performed. You can specify one of the following values:
-
full-copy
- The new DB cluster is restored as a full copy of the source DB cluster. -
copy-on-write
- The new DB cluster is restored as a clone of the source DB cluster.
If you don’t specify a
RestoreType
value, then the new DB cluster is restored as a full copy of the source DB cluster.Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
-
source_db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_source_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe identifier of the source DB cluster from which to restore.
Constraints:
-
Must match the identifier of an existing DBCluster.
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
-
restore_to_time(DateTime)
/set_restore_to_time(Option<DateTime>)
:
required: falseThe date and time to restore the DB cluster to.
Valid Values: Value must be a time in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC) format
Constraints:
-
Must be before the latest restorable time for the DB instance
-
Must be specified if
UseLatestRestorableTime
parameter isn’t provided -
Can’t be specified if the
UseLatestRestorableTime
parameter is enabled -
Can’t be specified if the
RestoreType
parameter iscopy-on-write
Example:
2015-03-07T23:45:00Z
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
-
use_latest_restorable_time(bool)
/set_use_latest_restorable_time(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to restore the DB cluster to the latest restorable backup time. By default, the DB cluster isn’t restored to the latest restorable backup time.
Constraints: Can’t be specified if
RestoreToTime
parameter is provided.Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
port(i32)
/set_port(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe port number on which the new DB cluster accepts connections.
Constraints: A value from
1150-65535
.Default: The default port for the engine.
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
db_subnet_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_subnet_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe DB subnet group name to use for the new DB cluster.
Constraints: If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBSubnetGroup.
Example:
mydbsubnetgroup
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
option_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_option_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of the option group for the new DB cluster.
DB clusters are associated with a default option group that can’t be modified.
vpc_security_group_ids(impl Into<String>)
/set_vpc_security_group_ids(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseA list of VPC security groups that the new DB cluster belongs to.
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
tags(Tag)
/set_tags(Option<Vec::<Tag>>)
:
required: falseA list of tags.
For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide or Tagging Amazon Aurora and Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
kms_key_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_kms_key_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier to use when restoring an encrypted DB cluster from an encrypted DB cluster.
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN.
You can restore to a new DB cluster and encrypt the new DB cluster with a KMS key that is different from the KMS key used to encrypt the source DB cluster. The new DB cluster is encrypted with the KMS key identified by the
KmsKeyId
parameter.If you don’t specify a value for the
KmsKeyId
parameter, then the following occurs:-
If the DB cluster is encrypted, then the restored DB cluster is encrypted using the KMS key that was used to encrypt the source DB cluster.
-
If the DB cluster isn’t encrypted, then the restored DB cluster isn’t encrypted.
If
DBClusterIdentifier
refers to a DB cluster that isn’t encrypted, then the restore request is rejected.Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
-
enable_iam_database_authentication(bool)
/set_enable_iam_database_authentication(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to enable mapping of Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts. By default, mapping isn’t enabled.
For more information, see IAM Database Authentication in the Amazon Aurora User Guide or IAM database authentication for MariaDB, MySQL, and PostgreSQL in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
backtrack_window(i64)
/set_backtrack_window(Option<i64>)
:
required: falseThe target backtrack window, in seconds. To disable backtracking, set this value to 0.
Default: 0
Constraints:
-
If specified, this value must be set to a number from 0 to 259,200 (72 hours).
Valid for: Aurora MySQL DB clusters only
-
enable_cloudwatch_logs_exports(impl Into<String>)
/set_enable_cloudwatch_logs_exports(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseThe list of logs that the restored DB cluster is to export to CloudWatch Logs. The values in the list depend on the DB engine being used.
RDS for MySQL
Possible values are
error
,general
,slowquery
, andiam-db-auth-error
.RDS for PostgreSQL
Possible values are
postgresql
,upgrade
, andiam-db-auth-error
.Aurora MySQL
Possible values are
audit
,error
,general
,instance
,slowquery
, andiam-db-auth-error
.Aurora PostgreSQL
Possible value are
instance
,postgresql
, andiam-db-auth-error
.For more information about exporting CloudWatch Logs for Amazon RDS, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
For more information about exporting CloudWatch Logs for Amazon Aurora, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
db_cluster_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_parameter_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of the custom DB cluster parameter group to associate with this DB cluster.
If the
DBClusterParameterGroupName
parameter is omitted, the default DB cluster parameter group for the specified engine is used.Constraints:
-
If supplied, must match the name of an existing DB cluster parameter group.
-
Must be 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens.
-
First character must be a letter.
-
Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
-
deletion_protection(bool)
/set_deletion_protection(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to enable deletion protection for the DB cluster. The database can’t be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection isn’t enabled.
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
copy_tags_to_snapshot(bool)
/set_copy_tags_to_snapshot(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to copy all tags from the restored DB cluster to snapshots of the restored DB cluster. The default is not to copy them.
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
domain(impl Into<String>)
/set_domain(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Active Directory directory ID to restore the DB cluster in. The domain must be created prior to this operation.
For Amazon Aurora DB clusters, Amazon RDS can use Kerberos Authentication to authenticate users that connect to the DB cluster. For more information, see Kerberos Authentication in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
domain_iam_role_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_domain_iam_role_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of the IAM role to be used when making API calls to the Directory Service.
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
scaling_configuration(ScalingConfiguration)
/set_scaling_configuration(Option<ScalingConfiguration>)
:
required: falseFor DB clusters in
serverless
DB engine mode, the scaling properties of the DB cluster.Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
engine_mode(impl Into<String>)
/set_engine_mode(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe engine mode of the new cluster. Specify
provisioned
orserverless
, depending on the type of the cluster you are creating. You can create an Aurora Serverless v1 clone from a provisioned cluster, or a provisioned clone from an Aurora Serverless v1 cluster. To create a clone that is an Aurora Serverless v1 cluster, the original cluster must be an Aurora Serverless v1 cluster or an encrypted provisioned cluster. To create a full copy that is an Aurora Serverless v1 cluster, specify the engine modeserverless
.Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
db_cluster_instance_class(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_instance_class(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe compute and memory capacity of the each DB instance in the Multi-AZ DB cluster, for example db.m6gd.xlarge. Not all DB instance classes are available in all Amazon Web Services Regions, or for all database engines.
For the full list of DB instance classes, and availability for your engine, see DB instance class in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
Valid for: Multi-AZ DB clusters only
storage_type(impl Into<String>)
/set_storage_type(Option<String>)
:
required: falseSpecifies the storage type to be associated with the DB cluster.
When specified for a Multi-AZ DB cluster, a value for the
Iops
parameter is required.Valid Values:
aurora
,aurora-iopt1
(Aurora DB clusters);io1
(Multi-AZ DB clusters)Default:
aurora
(Aurora DB clusters);io1
(Multi-AZ DB clusters)Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
publicly_accessible(bool)
/set_publicly_accessible(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether the DB cluster is publicly accessible.
When the DB cluster is publicly accessible, its Domain Name System (DNS) endpoint resolves to the private IP address from within the DB cluster’s virtual private cloud (VPC). It resolves to the public IP address from outside of the DB cluster’s VPC. Access to the DB cluster is ultimately controlled by the security group it uses. That public access is not permitted if the security group assigned to the DB cluster doesn’t permit it.
When the DB cluster isn’t publicly accessible, it is an internal DB cluster with a DNS name that resolves to a private IP address.
Default: The default behavior varies depending on whether
DBSubnetGroupName
is specified.If
DBSubnetGroupName
isn’t specified, andPubliclyAccessible
isn’t specified, the following applies:-
If the default VPC in the target Region doesn’t have an internet gateway attached to it, the DB cluster is private.
-
If the default VPC in the target Region has an internet gateway attached to it, the DB cluster is public.
If
DBSubnetGroupName
is specified, andPubliclyAccessible
isn’t specified, the following applies:-
If the subnets are part of a VPC that doesn’t have an internet gateway attached to it, the DB cluster is private.
-
If the subnets are part of a VPC that has an internet gateway attached to it, the DB cluster is public.
Valid for: Multi-AZ DB clusters only
-
iops(i32)
/set_iops(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe amount of Provisioned IOPS (input/output operations per second) to be initially allocated for each DB instance in the Multi-AZ DB cluster.
For information about valid IOPS values, see Amazon RDS Provisioned IOPS storage in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
Constraints: Must be a multiple between .5 and 50 of the storage amount for the DB instance.
Valid for: Multi-AZ DB clusters only
serverless_v2_scaling_configuration(ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration)
/set_serverless_v2_scaling_configuration(Option<ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration>)
:
required: falseContains the scaling configuration of an Aurora Serverless v2 DB cluster.
For more information, see Using Amazon Aurora Serverless v2 in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
network_type(impl Into<String>)
/set_network_type(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe network type of the DB cluster.
Valid Values:
-
IPV4
-
DUAL
The network type is determined by the
DBSubnetGroup
specified for the DB cluster. ADBSubnetGroup
can support only the IPv4 protocol or the IPv4 and the IPv6 protocols (DUAL
).For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
-
source_db_cluster_resource_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_source_db_cluster_resource_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe resource ID of the source DB cluster from which to restore.
rds_custom_cluster_configuration(RdsCustomClusterConfiguration)
/set_rds_custom_cluster_configuration(Option<RdsCustomClusterConfiguration>)
:
required: falseReserved for future use.
monitoring_interval(i32)
/set_monitoring_interval(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe interval, in seconds, between points when Enhanced Monitoring metrics are collected for the DB cluster. To turn off collecting Enhanced Monitoring metrics, specify
0
.If
MonitoringRoleArn
is specified, also setMonitoringInterval
to a value other than0
.Valid Values:
0 | 1 | 5 | 10 | 15 | 30 | 60
Default:
0
monitoring_role_arn(impl Into<String>)
/set_monitoring_role_arn(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the IAM role that permits RDS to send Enhanced Monitoring metrics to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. An example is
arn:aws:iam:123456789012:role/emaccess
.If
MonitoringInterval
is set to a value other than0
, supply aMonitoringRoleArn
value.enable_performance_insights(bool)
/set_enable_performance_insights(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to turn on Performance Insights for the DB cluster.
performance_insights_kms_key_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_performance_insights_kms_key_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for encryption of Performance Insights data.
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key.
If you don’t specify a value for
PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId
, then Amazon RDS uses your default KMS key. There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.performance_insights_retention_period(i32)
/set_performance_insights_retention_period(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe number of days to retain Performance Insights data.
Valid Values:
-
7
-
month * 31, where month is a number of months from 1-23. Examples:
93
(3 months * 31),341
(11 months * 31),589
(19 months * 31) -
731
Default:
7
daysIf you specify a retention period that isn’t valid, such as
94
, Amazon RDS issues an error.-
engine_lifecycle_support(impl Into<String>)
/set_engine_lifecycle_support(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe life cycle type for this DB cluster.
By default, this value is set to
open-source-rds-extended-support
, which enrolls your DB cluster into Amazon RDS Extended Support. At the end of standard support, you can avoid charges for Extended Support by setting the value toopen-source-rds-extended-support-disabled
. In this case, RDS automatically upgrades your restored DB cluster to a higher engine version, if the major engine version is past its end of standard support date.You can use this setting to enroll your DB cluster into Amazon RDS Extended Support. With RDS Extended Support, you can run the selected major engine version on your DB cluster past the end of standard support for that engine version. For more information, see the following sections:
-
Amazon Aurora - Using Amazon RDS Extended Support in the Amazon Aurora User Guide
-
Amazon RDS - Using Amazon RDS Extended Support in the Amazon RDS User Guide
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
Valid Values:
open-source-rds-extended-support | open-source-rds-extended-support-disabled
Default:
open-source-rds-extended-support
-
- On success, responds with
RestoreDbClusterToPointInTimeOutput
with field(s):db_cluster(Option<DbCluster>)
:Contains the details of an Amazon Aurora DB cluster or Multi-AZ DB cluster.
For an Amazon Aurora DB cluster, this data type is used as a response element in the operations
CreateDBCluster
,DeleteDBCluster
,DescribeDBClusters
,FailoverDBCluster
,ModifyDBCluster
,PromoteReadReplicaDBCluster
,RestoreDBClusterFromS3
,RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot
,RestoreDBClusterToPointInTime
,StartDBCluster
, andStopDBCluster
.For a Multi-AZ DB cluster, this data type is used as a response element in the operations
CreateDBCluster
,DeleteDBCluster
,DescribeDBClusters
,FailoverDBCluster
,ModifyDBCluster
,RebootDBCluster
,RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot
, andRestoreDBClusterToPointInTime
.For more information on Amazon Aurora DB clusters, see What is Amazon Aurora? in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
For more information on Multi-AZ DB clusters, see Multi-AZ deployments with two readable standby DB instances in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<RestoreDBClusterToPointInTimeError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn restore_db_instance_from_db_snapshot(
&self,
) -> RestoreDBInstanceFromDBSnapshotFluentBuilder
pub fn restore_db_instance_from_db_snapshot( &self, ) -> RestoreDBInstanceFromDBSnapshotFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the RestoreDBInstanceFromDBSnapshot
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the DB instance to create from the DB snapshot. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
Constraints:
-
Must contain from 1 to 63 numbers, letters, or hyphens.
-
First character must be a letter.
-
Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.
Example:
my-snapshot-id
-
db_snapshot_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_snapshot_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe identifier for the DB snapshot to restore from.
Constraints:
-
Must match the identifier of an existing DB snapshot.
-
Can’t be specified when
DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier
is specified. -
Must be specified when
DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier
isn’t specified. -
If you are restoring from a shared manual DB snapshot, the
DBSnapshotIdentifier
must be the ARN of the shared DB snapshot.
-
db_instance_class(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_instance_class(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe compute and memory capacity of the Amazon RDS DB instance, for example db.m4.large. Not all DB instance classes are available in all Amazon Web Services Regions, or for all database engines. For the full list of DB instance classes, and availability for your engine, see DB Instance Class in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
Default: The same DBInstanceClass as the original DB instance.
port(i32)
/set_port(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe port number on which the database accepts connections.
Default: The same port as the original DB instance
Constraints: Value must be
1150-65535
availability_zone(impl Into<String>)
/set_availability_zone(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Availability Zone (AZ) where the DB instance will be created.
Default: A random, system-chosen Availability Zone.
Constraint: You can’t specify the
AvailabilityZone
parameter if the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment.Example:
us-east-1a
db_subnet_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_subnet_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of the DB subnet group to use for the new instance.
Constraints:
-
If supplied, must match the name of an existing DB subnet group.
Example:
mydbsubnetgroup
-
multi_az(bool)
/set_multi_az(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
Constraint: You can’t specify the
AvailabilityZone
parameter if the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment.publicly_accessible(bool)
/set_publicly_accessible(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether the DB instance is publicly accessible.
When the DB instance is publicly accessible, its Domain Name System (DNS) endpoint resolves to the private IP address from within the DB instance’s virtual private cloud (VPC). It resolves to the public IP address from outside of the DB instance’s VPC. Access to the DB instance is ultimately controlled by the security group it uses. That public access is not permitted if the security group assigned to the DB instance doesn’t permit it.
When the DB instance isn’t publicly accessible, it is an internal DB instance with a DNS name that resolves to a private IP address.
For more information, see
CreateDBInstance
.auto_minor_version_upgrade(bool)
/set_auto_minor_version_upgrade(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to automatically apply minor version upgrades to the DB instance during the maintenance window.
If you restore an RDS Custom DB instance, you must disable this parameter.
For more information about automatic minor version upgrades, see Automatically upgrading the minor engine version.
license_model(impl Into<String>)
/set_license_model(Option<String>)
:
required: falseLicense model information for the restored DB instance.
License models for RDS for Db2 require additional configuration. The Bring Your Own License (BYOL) model requires a custom parameter group and an Amazon Web Services License Manager self-managed license. The Db2 license through Amazon Web Services Marketplace model requires an Amazon Web Services Marketplace subscription. For more information, see Amazon RDS for Db2 licensing options in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
This setting doesn’t apply to Amazon Aurora or RDS Custom DB instances.
Valid Values:
-
RDS for Db2 -
bring-your-own-license | marketplace-license
-
RDS for MariaDB -
general-public-license
-
RDS for Microsoft SQL Server -
license-included
-
RDS for MySQL -
general-public-license
-
RDS for Oracle -
bring-your-own-license | license-included
-
RDS for PostgreSQL -
postgresql-license
Default: Same as the source.
-
db_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of the database for the restored DB instance.
This parameter only applies to RDS for Oracle and RDS for SQL Server DB instances. It doesn’t apply to the other engines or to RDS Custom DB instances.
engine(impl Into<String>)
/set_engine(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe database engine to use for the new instance.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
Default: The same as source
Constraint: Must be compatible with the engine of the source. For example, you can restore a MariaDB 10.1 DB instance from a MySQL 5.6 snapshot.
Valid Values:
-
db2-ae
-
db2-se
-
mariadb
-
mysql
-
oracle-ee
-
oracle-ee-cdb
-
oracle-se2
-
oracle-se2-cdb
-
postgres
-
sqlserver-ee
-
sqlserver-se
-
sqlserver-ex
-
sqlserver-web
-
iops(i32)
/set_iops(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseSpecifies the amount of provisioned IOPS for the DB instance, expressed in I/O operations per second. If this parameter isn’t specified, the IOPS value is taken from the backup. If this parameter is set to 0, the new instance is converted to a non-PIOPS instance. The conversion takes additional time, though your DB instance is available for connections before the conversion starts.
The provisioned IOPS value must follow the requirements for your database engine. For more information, see Amazon RDS Provisioned IOPS storage in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
Constraints: Must be an integer greater than 1000.
option_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_option_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of the option group to be used for the restored DB instance.
Permanent options, such as the TDE option for Oracle Advanced Security TDE, can’t be removed from an option group, and that option group can’t be removed from a DB instance after it is associated with a DB instance.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
tags(Tag)
/set_tags(Option<Vec::<Tag>>)
:
required: falseA list of tags.
For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide or Tagging Amazon Aurora and Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
storage_type(impl Into<String>)
/set_storage_type(Option<String>)
:
required: falseSpecifies the storage type to be associated with the DB instance.
Valid Values:
gp2 | gp3 | io1 | io2 | standard
If you specify
io1
,io2
, orgp3
, you must also include a value for theIops
parameter.Default:
io1
if theIops
parameter is specified, otherwisegp3
tde_credential_arn(impl Into<String>)
/set_tde_credential_arn(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe ARN from the key store with which to associate the instance for TDE encryption.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
tde_credential_password(impl Into<String>)
/set_tde_credential_password(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe password for the given ARN from the key store in order to access the device.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
vpc_security_group_ids(impl Into<String>)
/set_vpc_security_group_ids(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseA list of EC2 VPC security groups to associate with this DB instance.
Default: The default EC2 VPC security group for the DB subnet group’s VPC.
domain(impl Into<String>)
/set_domain(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Active Directory directory ID to restore the DB instance in. The domain/ must be created prior to this operation. Currently, you can create only Db2, MySQL, Microsoft SQL Server, Oracle, and PostgreSQL DB instances in an Active Directory Domain.
For more information, see Kerberos Authentication in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
domain_fqdn(impl Into<String>)
/set_domain_fqdn(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of an Active Directory domain.
Constraints:
-
Can’t be longer than 64 characters.
Example:
mymanagedADtest.mymanagedAD.mydomain
-
domain_ou(impl Into<String>)
/set_domain_ou(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Active Directory organizational unit for your DB instance to join.
Constraints:
-
Must be in the distinguished name format.
-
Can’t be longer than 64 characters.
Example:
OU=mymanagedADtestOU,DC=mymanagedADtest,DC=mymanagedAD,DC=mydomain
-
domain_auth_secret_arn(impl Into<String>)
/set_domain_auth_secret_arn(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe ARN for the Secrets Manager secret with the credentials for the user joining the domain.
Constraints:
-
Can’t be longer than 64 characters.
Example:
arn:aws:secretsmanager:region:account-number:secret:myselfmanagedADtestsecret-123456
-
domain_dns_ips(impl Into<String>)
/set_domain_dns_ips(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseThe IPv4 DNS IP addresses of your primary and secondary Active Directory domain controllers.
Constraints:
-
Two IP addresses must be provided. If there isn’t a secondary domain controller, use the IP address of the primary domain controller for both entries in the list.
Example:
123.124.125.126,234.235.236.237
-
copy_tags_to_snapshot(bool)
/set_copy_tags_to_snapshot(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to copy all tags from the restored DB instance to snapshots of the DB instance.
In most cases, tags aren’t copied by default. However, when you restore a DB instance from a DB snapshot, RDS checks whether you specify new tags. If yes, the new tags are added to the restored DB instance. If there are no new tags, RDS looks for the tags from the source DB instance for the DB snapshot, and then adds those tags to the restored DB instance.
For more information, see Copying tags to DB instance snapshots in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
domain_iam_role_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_domain_iam_role_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of the IAM role to use when making API calls to the Directory Service.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
enable_iam_database_authentication(bool)
/set_enable_iam_database_authentication(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to enable mapping of Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts. By default, mapping is disabled.
For more information about IAM database authentication, see IAM Database Authentication for MySQL and PostgreSQL in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
enable_cloudwatch_logs_exports(impl Into<String>)
/set_enable_cloudwatch_logs_exports(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseThe list of logs for the restored DB instance to export to CloudWatch Logs. The values in the list depend on the DB engine. For more information, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
processor_features(ProcessorFeature)
/set_processor_features(Option<Vec::<ProcessorFeature>>)
:
required: falseThe number of CPU cores and the number of threads per core for the DB instance class of the DB instance.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
use_default_processor_features(bool)
/set_use_default_processor_features(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether the DB instance class of the DB instance uses its default processor features.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
db_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_parameter_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of the DB parameter group to associate with this DB instance.
If you don’t specify a value for
DBParameterGroupName
, then RDS uses the defaultDBParameterGroup
for the specified DB engine.This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
Constraints:
-
If supplied, must match the name of an existing DB parameter group.
-
Must be 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens.
-
First character must be a letter.
-
Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.
-
deletion_protection(bool)
/set_deletion_protection(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to enable deletion protection for the DB instance. The database can’t be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection isn’t enabled. For more information, see Deleting a DB Instance.
enable_customer_owned_ip(bool)
/set_enable_customer_owned_ip(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to enable a customer-owned IP address (CoIP) for an RDS on Outposts DB instance.
A CoIP provides local or external connectivity to resources in your Outpost subnets through your on-premises network. For some use cases, a CoIP can provide lower latency for connections to the DB instance from outside of its virtual private cloud (VPC) on your local network.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
For more information about RDS on Outposts, see Working with Amazon RDS on Amazon Web Services Outposts in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
For more information about CoIPs, see Customer-owned IP addresses in the Amazon Web Services Outposts User Guide.
custom_iam_instance_profile(impl Into<String>)
/set_custom_iam_instance_profile(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe instance profile associated with the underlying Amazon EC2 instance of an RDS Custom DB instance. The instance profile must meet the following requirements:
-
The profile must exist in your account.
-
The profile must have an IAM role that Amazon EC2 has permissions to assume.
-
The instance profile name and the associated IAM role name must start with the prefix
AWSRDSCustom
.
For the list of permissions required for the IAM role, see Configure IAM and your VPC in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
This setting is required for RDS Custom.
-
backup_target(impl Into<String>)
/set_backup_target(Option<String>)
:
required: falseSpecifies where automated backups and manual snapshots are stored for the restored DB instance.
Possible values are
outposts
(Amazon Web Services Outposts) andregion
(Amazon Web Services Region). The default isregion
.For more information, see Working with Amazon RDS on Amazon Web Services Outposts in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
network_type(impl Into<String>)
/set_network_type(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe network type of the DB instance.
Valid Values:
-
IPV4
-
DUAL
The network type is determined by the
DBSubnetGroup
specified for the DB instance. ADBSubnetGroup
can support only the IPv4 protocol or the IPv4 and the IPv6 protocols (DUAL
).For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
-
storage_throughput(i32)
/set_storage_throughput(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseSpecifies the storage throughput value for the DB instance.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom or Amazon Aurora.
db_cluster_snapshot_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_snapshot_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe identifier for the Multi-AZ DB cluster snapshot to restore from.
For more information on Multi-AZ DB clusters, see Multi-AZ DB cluster deployments in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
Constraints:
-
Must match the identifier of an existing Multi-AZ DB cluster snapshot.
-
Can’t be specified when
DBSnapshotIdentifier
is specified. -
Must be specified when
DBSnapshotIdentifier
isn’t specified. -
If you are restoring from a shared manual Multi-AZ DB cluster snapshot, the
DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier
must be the ARN of the shared snapshot. -
Can’t be the identifier of an Aurora DB cluster snapshot.
-
allocated_storage(i32)
/set_allocated_storage(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe amount of storage (in gibibytes) to allocate initially for the DB instance. Follow the allocation rules specified in CreateDBInstance.
This setting isn’t valid for RDS for SQL Server.
Be sure to allocate enough storage for your new DB instance so that the restore operation can succeed. You can also allocate additional storage for future growth.
dedicated_log_volume(bool)
/set_dedicated_log_volume(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to enable a dedicated log volume (DLV) for the DB instance.
ca_certificate_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_ca_certificate_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe CA certificate identifier to use for the DB instance’s server certificate.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
For more information, see Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB instance in the Amazon RDS User Guide and Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB cluster in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
engine_lifecycle_support(impl Into<String>)
/set_engine_lifecycle_support(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe life cycle type for this DB instance.
By default, this value is set to
open-source-rds-extended-support
, which enrolls your DB instance into Amazon RDS Extended Support. At the end of standard support, you can avoid charges for Extended Support by setting the value toopen-source-rds-extended-support-disabled
. In this case, RDS automatically upgrades your restored DB instance to a higher engine version, if the major engine version is past its end of standard support date.You can use this setting to enroll your DB instance into Amazon RDS Extended Support. With RDS Extended Support, you can run the selected major engine version on your DB instance past the end of standard support for that engine version. For more information, see Using Amazon RDS Extended Support in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
This setting applies only to RDS for MySQL and RDS for PostgreSQL. For Amazon Aurora DB instances, the life cycle type is managed by the DB cluster.
Valid Values:
open-source-rds-extended-support | open-source-rds-extended-support-disabled
Default:
open-source-rds-extended-support
manage_master_user_password(bool)
/set_manage_master_user_password(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to manage the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager in the restored DB instance.
For more information, see Password management with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
Constraints:
-
Applies to RDS for Oracle only.
-
master_user_secret_kms_key_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_master_user_secret_kms_key_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier to encrypt a secret that is automatically generated and managed in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.
This setting is valid only if the master user password is managed by RDS in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager for the DB instance.
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN.
If you don’t specify
MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId
, then theaws/secretsmanager
KMS key is used to encrypt the secret. If the secret is in a different Amazon Web Services account, then you can’t use theaws/secretsmanager
KMS key to encrypt the secret, and you must use a customer managed KMS key.There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.
- On success, responds with
RestoreDbInstanceFromDbSnapshotOutput
with field(s):db_instance(Option<DbInstance>)
:Contains the details of an Amazon RDS DB instance.
This data type is used as a response element in the operations
CreateDBInstance
,CreateDBInstanceReadReplica
,DeleteDBInstance
,DescribeDBInstances
,ModifyDBInstance
,PromoteReadReplica
,RebootDBInstance
,RestoreDBInstanceFromDBSnapshot
,RestoreDBInstanceFromS3
,RestoreDBInstanceToPointInTime
,StartDBInstance
, andStopDBInstance
.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<RestoreDBInstanceFromDBSnapshotError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn restore_db_instance_from_s3(
&self,
) -> RestoreDBInstanceFromS3FluentBuilder
pub fn restore_db_instance_from_s3( &self, ) -> RestoreDBInstanceFromS3FluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the RestoreDBInstanceFromS3
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of the database to create when the DB instance is created. Follow the naming rules specified in
CreateDBInstance
.db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe DB instance identifier. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
Constraints:
-
Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens.
-
First character must be a letter.
-
Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.
Example:
mydbinstance
-
allocated_storage(i32)
/set_allocated_storage(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe amount of storage (in gibibytes) to allocate initially for the DB instance. Follow the allocation rules specified in
CreateDBInstance
.This setting isn’t valid for RDS for SQL Server.
Be sure to allocate enough storage for your new DB instance so that the restore operation can succeed. You can also allocate additional storage for future growth.
db_instance_class(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_instance_class(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe compute and memory capacity of the DB instance, for example db.m4.large. Not all DB instance classes are available in all Amazon Web Services Regions, or for all database engines. For the full list of DB instance classes, and availability for your engine, see DB Instance Class in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
Importing from Amazon S3 isn’t supported on the db.t2.micro DB instance class.
engine(impl Into<String>)
/set_engine(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the database engine to be used for this instance.
Valid Values:
mysql
master_username(impl Into<String>)
/set_master_username(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name for the master user.
Constraints:
-
Must be 1 to 16 letters or numbers.
-
First character must be a letter.
-
Can’t be a reserved word for the chosen database engine.
-
master_user_password(impl Into<String>)
/set_master_user_password(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe password for the master user.
Constraints:
-
Can’t be specified if
ManageMasterUserPassword
is turned on. -
Can include any printable ASCII character except “/”, “”“, or “@”. For RDS for Oracle, can’t include the “&” (ampersand) or the “’” (single quotes) character.
Length Constraints:
-
RDS for Db2 - Must contain from 8 to 128 characters.
-
RDS for MariaDB - Must contain from 8 to 41 characters.
-
RDS for Microsoft SQL Server - Must contain from 8 to 128 characters.
-
RDS for MySQL - Must contain from 8 to 41 characters.
-
RDS for Oracle - Must contain from 8 to 30 characters.
-
RDS for PostgreSQL - Must contain from 8 to 128 characters.
-
db_security_groups(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_security_groups(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseA list of DB security groups to associate with this DB instance.
Default: The default DB security group for the database engine.
vpc_security_group_ids(impl Into<String>)
/set_vpc_security_group_ids(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseA list of VPC security groups to associate with this DB instance.
availability_zone(impl Into<String>)
/set_availability_zone(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Availability Zone that the DB instance is created in. For information about Amazon Web Services Regions and Availability Zones, see Regions and Availability Zones in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
Default: A random, system-chosen Availability Zone in the endpoint’s Amazon Web Services Region.
Example:
us-east-1d
Constraint: The
AvailabilityZone
parameter can’t be specified if the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment. The specified Availability Zone must be in the same Amazon Web Services Region as the current endpoint.db_subnet_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_subnet_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseA DB subnet group to associate with this DB instance.
Constraints: If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBSubnetGroup.
Example:
mydbsubnetgroup
preferred_maintenance_window(impl Into<String>)
/set_preferred_maintenance_window(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe time range each week during which system maintenance can occur, in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC). For more information, see Amazon RDS Maintenance Window in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
Constraints:
-
Must be in the format
ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi
. -
Valid Days: Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun.
-
Must be in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).
-
Must not conflict with the preferred backup window.
-
Must be at least 30 minutes.
-
db_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_parameter_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of the DB parameter group to associate with this DB instance.
If you do not specify a value for
DBParameterGroupName
, then the defaultDBParameterGroup
for the specified DB engine is used.backup_retention_period(i32)
/set_backup_retention_period(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe number of days for which automated backups are retained. Setting this parameter to a positive number enables backups. For more information, see
CreateDBInstance
.preferred_backup_window(impl Into<String>)
/set_preferred_backup_window(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe time range each day during which automated backups are created if automated backups are enabled. For more information, see Backup window in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
Constraints:
-
Must be in the format
hh24:mi-hh24:mi
. -
Must be in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).
-
Must not conflict with the preferred maintenance window.
-
Must be at least 30 minutes.
-
port(i32)
/set_port(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe port number on which the database accepts connections.
Type: Integer
Valid Values:
1150
-65535
Default:
3306
multi_az(bool)
/set_multi_az(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment. If the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment, you can’t set the
AvailabilityZone
parameter.engine_version(impl Into<String>)
/set_engine_version(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe version number of the database engine to use. Choose the latest minor version of your database engine. For information about engine versions, see
CreateDBInstance
, or callDescribeDBEngineVersions
.auto_minor_version_upgrade(bool)
/set_auto_minor_version_upgrade(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to automatically apply minor engine upgrades to the DB instance during the maintenance window. By default, minor engine upgrades are not applied automatically.
For more information about automatic minor version upgrades, see Automatically upgrading the minor engine version.
license_model(impl Into<String>)
/set_license_model(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe license model for this DB instance. Use
general-public-license
.iops(i32)
/set_iops(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe amount of Provisioned IOPS (input/output operations per second) to allocate initially for the DB instance. For information about valid IOPS values, see Amazon RDS Provisioned IOPS storage in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
option_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_option_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of the option group to associate with this DB instance. If this argument is omitted, the default option group for the specified engine is used.
publicly_accessible(bool)
/set_publicly_accessible(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether the DB instance is publicly accessible.
When the DB instance is publicly accessible, its Domain Name System (DNS) endpoint resolves to the private IP address from within the DB instance’s virtual private cloud (VPC). It resolves to the public IP address from outside of the DB instance’s VPC. Access to the DB instance is ultimately controlled by the security group it uses. That public access is not permitted if the security group assigned to the DB instance doesn’t permit it.
When the DB instance isn’t publicly accessible, it is an internal DB instance with a DNS name that resolves to a private IP address.
For more information, see
CreateDBInstance
.tags(Tag)
/set_tags(Option<Vec::<Tag>>)
:
required: falseA list of tags to associate with this DB instance. For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS Resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
storage_type(impl Into<String>)
/set_storage_type(Option<String>)
:
required: falseSpecifies the storage type to be associated with the DB instance.
Valid Values:
gp2 | gp3 | io1 | io2 | standard
If you specify
io1
,io2
, orgp3
, you must also include a value for theIops
parameter.Default:
io1
if theIops
parameter is specified; otherwisegp2
storage_encrypted(bool)
/set_storage_encrypted(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether the new DB instance is encrypted or not.
kms_key_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_kms_key_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for an encrypted DB instance.
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN.
If the
StorageEncrypted
parameter is enabled, and you do not specify a value for theKmsKeyId
parameter, then Amazon RDS will use your default KMS key. There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.copy_tags_to_snapshot(bool)
/set_copy_tags_to_snapshot(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to copy all tags from the DB instance to snapshots of the DB instance. By default, tags are not copied.
monitoring_interval(i32)
/set_monitoring_interval(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe interval, in seconds, between points when Enhanced Monitoring metrics are collected for the DB instance. To disable collecting Enhanced Monitoring metrics, specify 0.
If
MonitoringRoleArn
is specified, then you must also setMonitoringInterval
to a value other than 0.Valid Values: 0, 1, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60
Default:
0
monitoring_role_arn(impl Into<String>)
/set_monitoring_role_arn(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe ARN for the IAM role that permits RDS to send enhanced monitoring metrics to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. For example,
arn:aws:iam:123456789012:role/emaccess
. For information on creating a monitoring role, see Setting Up and Enabling Enhanced Monitoring in the Amazon RDS User Guide.If
MonitoringInterval
is set to a value other than 0, then you must supply aMonitoringRoleArn
value.enable_iam_database_authentication(bool)
/set_enable_iam_database_authentication(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to enable mapping of Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts. By default, mapping isn’t enabled.
For more information about IAM database authentication, see IAM Database Authentication for MySQL and PostgreSQL in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
source_engine(impl Into<String>)
/set_source_engine(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the engine of your source database.
Valid Values:
mysql
source_engine_version(impl Into<String>)
/set_source_engine_version(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe version of the database that the backup files were created from.
MySQL versions 5.6 and 5.7 are supported.
Example:
5.6.40
s3_bucket_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_s3_bucket_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of your Amazon S3 bucket that contains your database backup file.
s3_prefix(impl Into<String>)
/set_s3_prefix(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe prefix of your Amazon S3 bucket.
s3_ingestion_role_arn(impl Into<String>)
/set_s3_ingestion_role_arn(Option<String>)
:
required: trueAn Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) role with a trust policy and a permissions policy that allows Amazon RDS to access your Amazon S3 bucket. For information about this role, see Creating an IAM role manually in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
database_insights_mode(DatabaseInsightsMode)
/set_database_insights_mode(Option<DatabaseInsightsMode>)
:
required: falseSpecifies the mode of Database Insights to enable for the DB instance.
Aurora DB instances inherit this value from the DB cluster, so you can’t change this value.
enable_performance_insights(bool)
/set_enable_performance_insights(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to enable Performance Insights for the DB instance.
For more information, see Using Amazon Performance Insights in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
performance_insights_kms_key_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_performance_insights_kms_key_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for encryption of Performance Insights data.
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key.
If you do not specify a value for
PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId
, then Amazon RDS uses your default KMS key. There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.performance_insights_retention_period(i32)
/set_performance_insights_retention_period(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe number of days to retain Performance Insights data. The default is 7 days. The following values are valid:
-
7
-
month * 31, where month is a number of months from 1-23
-
731
For example, the following values are valid:
-
93 (3 months * 31)
-
341 (11 months * 31)
-
589 (19 months * 31)
-
731
If you specify a retention period such as 94, which isn’t a valid value, RDS issues an error.
-
enable_cloudwatch_logs_exports(impl Into<String>)
/set_enable_cloudwatch_logs_exports(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseThe list of logs that the restored DB instance is to export to CloudWatch Logs. The values in the list depend on the DB engine being used. For more information, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
processor_features(ProcessorFeature)
/set_processor_features(Option<Vec::<ProcessorFeature>>)
:
required: falseThe number of CPU cores and the number of threads per core for the DB instance class of the DB instance.
use_default_processor_features(bool)
/set_use_default_processor_features(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether the DB instance class of the DB instance uses its default processor features.
deletion_protection(bool)
/set_deletion_protection(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to enable deletion protection for the DB instance. The database can’t be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection isn’t enabled. For more information, see Deleting a DB Instance.
max_allocated_storage(i32)
/set_max_allocated_storage(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe upper limit in gibibytes (GiB) to which Amazon RDS can automatically scale the storage of the DB instance.
For more information about this setting, including limitations that apply to it, see Managing capacity automatically with Amazon RDS storage autoscaling in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
network_type(impl Into<String>)
/set_network_type(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe network type of the DB instance.
Valid Values:
-
IPV4
-
DUAL
The network type is determined by the
DBSubnetGroup
specified for the DB instance. ADBSubnetGroup
can support only the IPv4 protocol or the IPv4 and the IPv6 protocols (DUAL
).For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
-
storage_throughput(i32)
/set_storage_throughput(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseSpecifies the storage throughput value for the DB instance.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom or Amazon Aurora.
manage_master_user_password(bool)
/set_manage_master_user_password(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to manage the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.
For more information, see Password management with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
Constraints:
-
Can’t manage the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager if
MasterUserPassword
is specified.
-
master_user_secret_kms_key_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_master_user_secret_kms_key_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier to encrypt a secret that is automatically generated and managed in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.
This setting is valid only if the master user password is managed by RDS in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager for the DB instance.
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN.
If you don’t specify
MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId
, then theaws/secretsmanager
KMS key is used to encrypt the secret. If the secret is in a different Amazon Web Services account, then you can’t use theaws/secretsmanager
KMS key to encrypt the secret, and you must use a customer managed KMS key.There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.
dedicated_log_volume(bool)
/set_dedicated_log_volume(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to enable a dedicated log volume (DLV) for the DB instance.
ca_certificate_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_ca_certificate_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe CA certificate identifier to use for the DB instance’s server certificate.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
For more information, see Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB instance in the Amazon RDS User Guide and Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB cluster in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
engine_lifecycle_support(impl Into<String>)
/set_engine_lifecycle_support(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe life cycle type for this DB instance.
By default, this value is set to
open-source-rds-extended-support
, which enrolls your DB instance into Amazon RDS Extended Support. At the end of standard support, you can avoid charges for Extended Support by setting the value toopen-source-rds-extended-support-disabled
. In this case, RDS automatically upgrades your restored DB instance to a higher engine version, if the major engine version is past its end of standard support date.You can use this setting to enroll your DB instance into Amazon RDS Extended Support. With RDS Extended Support, you can run the selected major engine version on your DB instance past the end of standard support for that engine version. For more information, see Using Amazon RDS Extended Support in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
This setting applies only to RDS for MySQL and RDS for PostgreSQL. For Amazon Aurora DB instances, the life cycle type is managed by the DB cluster.
Valid Values:
open-source-rds-extended-support | open-source-rds-extended-support-disabled
Default:
open-source-rds-extended-support
- On success, responds with
RestoreDbInstanceFromS3Output
with field(s):db_instance(Option<DbInstance>)
:Contains the details of an Amazon RDS DB instance.
This data type is used as a response element in the operations
CreateDBInstance
,CreateDBInstanceReadReplica
,DeleteDBInstance
,DescribeDBInstances
,ModifyDBInstance
,PromoteReadReplica
,RebootDBInstance
,RestoreDBInstanceFromDBSnapshot
,RestoreDBInstanceFromS3
,RestoreDBInstanceToPointInTime
,StartDBInstance
, andStopDBInstance
.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<RestoreDBInstanceFromS3Error>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn restore_db_instance_to_point_in_time(
&self,
) -> RestoreDBInstanceToPointInTimeFluentBuilder
pub fn restore_db_instance_to_point_in_time( &self, ) -> RestoreDBInstanceToPointInTimeFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the RestoreDBInstanceToPointInTime
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
source_db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_source_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe identifier of the source DB instance from which to restore.
Constraints:
-
Must match the identifier of an existing DB instance.
-
target_db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_target_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the new DB instance to create.
Constraints:
-
Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens.
-
First character must be a letter.
-
Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.
-
restore_time(DateTime)
/set_restore_time(Option<DateTime>)
:
required: falseThe date and time to restore from.
Constraints:
-
Must be a time in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC) format.
-
Must be before the latest restorable time for the DB instance.
-
Can’t be specified if the
UseLatestRestorableTime
parameter is enabled.
Example:
2009-09-07T23:45:00Z
-
use_latest_restorable_time(bool)
/set_use_latest_restorable_time(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether the DB instance is restored from the latest backup time. By default, the DB instance isn’t restored from the latest backup time.
Constraints:
-
Can’t be specified if the
RestoreTime
parameter is provided.
-
db_instance_class(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_instance_class(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe compute and memory capacity of the Amazon RDS DB instance, for example db.m4.large. Not all DB instance classes are available in all Amazon Web Services Regions, or for all database engines. For the full list of DB instance classes, and availability for your engine, see DB Instance Class in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
Default: The same DB instance class as the original DB instance.
port(i32)
/set_port(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe port number on which the database accepts connections.
Default: The same port as the original DB instance.
Constraints:
-
The value must be
1150-65535
.
-
availability_zone(impl Into<String>)
/set_availability_zone(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Availability Zone (AZ) where the DB instance will be created.
Default: A random, system-chosen Availability Zone.
Constraints:
-
You can’t specify the
AvailabilityZone
parameter if the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment.
Example:
us-east-1a
-
db_subnet_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_subnet_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe DB subnet group name to use for the new instance.
Constraints:
-
If supplied, must match the name of an existing DB subnet group.
Example:
mydbsubnetgroup
-
multi_az(bool)
/set_multi_az(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSecifies whether the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
Constraints:
-
You can’t specify the
AvailabilityZone
parameter if the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment.
-
publicly_accessible(bool)
/set_publicly_accessible(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether the DB instance is publicly accessible.
When the DB cluster is publicly accessible, its Domain Name System (DNS) endpoint resolves to the private IP address from within the DB cluster’s virtual private cloud (VPC). It resolves to the public IP address from outside of the DB cluster’s VPC. Access to the DB cluster is ultimately controlled by the security group it uses. That public access isn’t permitted if the security group assigned to the DB cluster doesn’t permit it.
When the DB instance isn’t publicly accessible, it is an internal DB instance with a DNS name that resolves to a private IP address.
For more information, see
CreateDBInstance
.auto_minor_version_upgrade(bool)
/set_auto_minor_version_upgrade(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether minor version upgrades are applied automatically to the DB instance during the maintenance window.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
For more information about automatic minor version upgrades, see Automatically upgrading the minor engine version.
license_model(impl Into<String>)
/set_license_model(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe license model information for the restored DB instance.
License models for RDS for Db2 require additional configuration. The Bring Your Own License (BYOL) model requires a custom parameter group and an Amazon Web Services License Manager self-managed license. The Db2 license through Amazon Web Services Marketplace model requires an Amazon Web Services Marketplace subscription. For more information, see Amazon RDS for Db2 licensing options in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
This setting doesn’t apply to Amazon Aurora or RDS Custom DB instances.
Valid Values:
-
RDS for Db2 -
bring-your-own-license | marketplace-license
-
RDS for MariaDB -
general-public-license
-
RDS for Microsoft SQL Server -
license-included
-
RDS for MySQL -
general-public-license
-
RDS for Oracle -
bring-your-own-license | license-included
-
RDS for PostgreSQL -
postgresql-license
Default: Same as the source.
-
db_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe database name for the restored DB instance.
This parameter doesn’t apply to the following DB instances:
-
RDS Custom
-
RDS for Db2
-
RDS for MariaDB
-
RDS for MySQL
-
engine(impl Into<String>)
/set_engine(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe database engine to use for the new instance.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
Valid Values:
-
db2-ae
-
db2-se
-
mariadb
-
mysql
-
oracle-ee
-
oracle-ee-cdb
-
oracle-se2
-
oracle-se2-cdb
-
postgres
-
sqlserver-ee
-
sqlserver-se
-
sqlserver-ex
-
sqlserver-web
Default: The same as source
Constraints:
-
Must be compatible with the engine of the source.
-
iops(i32)
/set_iops(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe amount of Provisioned IOPS (input/output operations per second) to initially allocate for the DB instance.
This setting doesn’t apply to SQL Server.
Constraints:
-
Must be an integer greater than 1000.
-
option_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_option_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of the option group to use for the restored DB instance.
Permanent options, such as the TDE option for Oracle Advanced Security TDE, can’t be removed from an option group, and that option group can’t be removed from a DB instance after it is associated with a DB instance
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
copy_tags_to_snapshot(bool)
/set_copy_tags_to_snapshot(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to copy all tags from the restored DB instance to snapshots of the DB instance. By default, tags are not copied.
tags(Tag)
/set_tags(Option<Vec::<Tag>>)
:
required: falseA list of tags.
For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide or Tagging Amazon Aurora and Amazon RDS resources in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
storage_type(impl Into<String>)
/set_storage_type(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe storage type to associate with the DB instance.
Valid Values:
gp2 | gp3 | io1 | io2 | standard
Default:
io1
, if theIops
parameter is specified. Otherwise,gp3
.Constraints:
-
If you specify
io1
,io2
, orgp3
, you must also include a value for theIops
parameter.
-
tde_credential_arn(impl Into<String>)
/set_tde_credential_arn(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe ARN from the key store with which to associate the instance for TDE encryption.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
tde_credential_password(impl Into<String>)
/set_tde_credential_password(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe password for the given ARN from the key store in order to access the device.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
vpc_security_group_ids(impl Into<String>)
/set_vpc_security_group_ids(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseA list of EC2 VPC security groups to associate with this DB instance.
Default: The default EC2 VPC security group for the DB subnet group’s VPC.
domain(impl Into<String>)
/set_domain(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Active Directory directory ID to restore the DB instance in. Create the domain before running this command. Currently, you can create only the MySQL, Microsoft SQL Server, Oracle, and PostgreSQL DB instances in an Active Directory Domain.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
For more information, see Kerberos Authentication in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
domain_iam_role_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_domain_iam_role_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of the IAM role to use when making API calls to the Directory Service.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
domain_fqdn(impl Into<String>)
/set_domain_fqdn(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of an Active Directory domain.
Constraints:
-
Can’t be longer than 64 characters.
Example:
mymanagedADtest.mymanagedAD.mydomain
-
domain_ou(impl Into<String>)
/set_domain_ou(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Active Directory organizational unit for your DB instance to join.
Constraints:
-
Must be in the distinguished name format.
-
Can’t be longer than 64 characters.
Example:
OU=mymanagedADtestOU,DC=mymanagedADtest,DC=mymanagedAD,DC=mydomain
-
domain_auth_secret_arn(impl Into<String>)
/set_domain_auth_secret_arn(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe ARN for the Secrets Manager secret with the credentials for the user joining the domain.
Constraints:
-
Can’t be longer than 64 characters.
Example:
arn:aws:secretsmanager:region:account-number:secret:myselfmanagedADtestsecret-123456
-
domain_dns_ips(impl Into<String>)
/set_domain_dns_ips(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseThe IPv4 DNS IP addresses of your primary and secondary Active Directory domain controllers.
Constraints:
-
Two IP addresses must be provided. If there isn’t a secondary domain controller, use the IP address of the primary domain controller for both entries in the list.
Example:
123.124.125.126,234.235.236.237
-
enable_iam_database_authentication(bool)
/set_enable_iam_database_authentication(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to enable mapping of Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts. By default, mapping isn’t enabled.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
For more information about IAM database authentication, see IAM Database Authentication for MySQL and PostgreSQL in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
enable_cloudwatch_logs_exports(impl Into<String>)
/set_enable_cloudwatch_logs_exports(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseThe list of logs that the restored DB instance is to export to CloudWatch Logs. The values in the list depend on the DB engine being used. For more information, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
processor_features(ProcessorFeature)
/set_processor_features(Option<Vec::<ProcessorFeature>>)
:
required: falseThe number of CPU cores and the number of threads per core for the DB instance class of the DB instance.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
use_default_processor_features(bool)
/set_use_default_processor_features(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether the DB instance class of the DB instance uses its default processor features.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
db_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_parameter_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of the DB parameter group to associate with this DB instance.
If you do not specify a value for
DBParameterGroupName
, then the defaultDBParameterGroup
for the specified DB engine is used.This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
Constraints:
-
If supplied, must match the name of an existing DB parameter group.
-
Must be 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens.
-
First character must be a letter.
-
Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.
-
deletion_protection(bool)
/set_deletion_protection(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether the DB instance has deletion protection enabled. The database can’t be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection isn’t enabled. For more information, see Deleting a DB Instance.
source_dbi_resource_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_source_dbi_resource_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe resource ID of the source DB instance from which to restore.
max_allocated_storage(i32)
/set_max_allocated_storage(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe upper limit in gibibytes (GiB) to which Amazon RDS can automatically scale the storage of the DB instance.
For more information about this setting, including limitations that apply to it, see Managing capacity automatically with Amazon RDS storage autoscaling in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
source_db_instance_automated_backups_arn(impl Into<String>)
/set_source_db_instance_automated_backups_arn(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the replicated automated backups from which to restore, for example,
arn:aws:rds:us-east-1:123456789012:auto-backup:ab-L2IJCEXJP7XQ7HOJ4SIEXAMPLE
.This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
enable_customer_owned_ip(bool)
/set_enable_customer_owned_ip(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to enable a customer-owned IP address (CoIP) for an RDS on Outposts DB instance.
A CoIP provides local or external connectivity to resources in your Outpost subnets through your on-premises network. For some use cases, a CoIP can provide lower latency for connections to the DB instance from outside of its virtual private cloud (VPC) on your local network.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
For more information about RDS on Outposts, see Working with Amazon RDS on Amazon Web Services Outposts in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
For more information about CoIPs, see Customer-owned IP addresses in the Amazon Web Services Outposts User Guide.
custom_iam_instance_profile(impl Into<String>)
/set_custom_iam_instance_profile(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe instance profile associated with the underlying Amazon EC2 instance of an RDS Custom DB instance. The instance profile must meet the following requirements:
-
The profile must exist in your account.
-
The profile must have an IAM role that Amazon EC2 has permissions to assume.
-
The instance profile name and the associated IAM role name must start with the prefix
AWSRDSCustom
.
For the list of permissions required for the IAM role, see Configure IAM and your VPC in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
This setting is required for RDS Custom.
-
backup_target(impl Into<String>)
/set_backup_target(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe location for storing automated backups and manual snapshots for the restored DB instance.
Valid Values:
-
outposts
(Amazon Web Services Outposts) -
region
(Amazon Web Services Region)
Default:
region
For more information, see Working with Amazon RDS on Amazon Web Services Outposts in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
-
network_type(impl Into<String>)
/set_network_type(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe network type of the DB instance.
The network type is determined by the
DBSubnetGroup
specified for the DB instance. ADBSubnetGroup
can support only the IPv4 protocol or the IPv4 and the IPv6 protocols (DUAL
).For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
Valid Values:
-
IPV4
-
DUAL
-
storage_throughput(i32)
/set_storage_throughput(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe storage throughput value for the DB instance.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom or Amazon Aurora.
allocated_storage(i32)
/set_allocated_storage(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe amount of storage (in gibibytes) to allocate initially for the DB instance. Follow the allocation rules specified in
CreateDBInstance
.This setting isn’t valid for RDS for SQL Server.
Be sure to allocate enough storage for your new DB instance so that the restore operation can succeed. You can also allocate additional storage for future growth.
dedicated_log_volume(bool)
/set_dedicated_log_volume(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to enable a dedicated log volume (DLV) for the DB instance.
ca_certificate_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_ca_certificate_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe CA certificate identifier to use for the DB instance’s server certificate.
This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
For more information, see Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB instance in the Amazon RDS User Guide and Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB cluster in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
engine_lifecycle_support(impl Into<String>)
/set_engine_lifecycle_support(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe life cycle type for this DB instance.
By default, this value is set to
open-source-rds-extended-support
, which enrolls your DB instance into Amazon RDS Extended Support. At the end of standard support, you can avoid charges for Extended Support by setting the value toopen-source-rds-extended-support-disabled
. In this case, RDS automatically upgrades your restored DB instance to a higher engine version, if the major engine version is past its end of standard support date.You can use this setting to enroll your DB instance into Amazon RDS Extended Support. With RDS Extended Support, you can run the selected major engine version on your DB instance past the end of standard support for that engine version. For more information, see Using Amazon RDS Extended Support in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
This setting applies only to RDS for MySQL and RDS for PostgreSQL. For Amazon Aurora DB instances, the life cycle type is managed by the DB cluster.
Valid Values:
open-source-rds-extended-support | open-source-rds-extended-support-disabled
Default:
open-source-rds-extended-support
manage_master_user_password(bool)
/set_manage_master_user_password(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether to manage the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager in the restored DB instance.
For more information, see Password management with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
Constraints:
-
Applies to RDS for Oracle only.
-
master_user_secret_kms_key_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_master_user_secret_kms_key_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier to encrypt a secret that is automatically generated and managed in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.
This setting is valid only if the master user password is managed by RDS in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager for the DB instance.
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN.
If you don’t specify
MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId
, then theaws/secretsmanager
KMS key is used to encrypt the secret. If the secret is in a different Amazon Web Services account, then you can’t use theaws/secretsmanager
KMS key to encrypt the secret, and you must use a customer managed KMS key.There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.
- On success, responds with
RestoreDbInstanceToPointInTimeOutput
with field(s):db_instance(Option<DbInstance>)
:Contains the details of an Amazon RDS DB instance.
This data type is used as a response element in the operations
CreateDBInstance
,CreateDBInstanceReadReplica
,DeleteDBInstance
,DescribeDBInstances
,ModifyDBInstance
,PromoteReadReplica
,RebootDBInstance
,RestoreDBInstanceFromDBSnapshot
,RestoreDBInstanceFromS3
,RestoreDBInstanceToPointInTime
,StartDBInstance
, andStopDBInstance
.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<RestoreDBInstanceToPointInTimeError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn revoke_db_security_group_ingress(
&self,
) -> RevokeDBSecurityGroupIngressFluentBuilder
pub fn revoke_db_security_group_ingress( &self, ) -> RevokeDBSecurityGroupIngressFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the RevokeDBSecurityGroupIngress
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_security_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_security_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the DB security group to revoke ingress from.
cidrip(impl Into<String>)
/set_cidrip(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe IP range to revoke access from. Must be a valid CIDR range. If
CIDRIP
is specified,EC2SecurityGroupName
,EC2SecurityGroupId
andEC2SecurityGroupOwnerId
can’t be provided.ec2_security_group_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_ec2_security_group_name(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe name of the EC2 security group to revoke access from. For VPC DB security groups,
EC2SecurityGroupId
must be provided. Otherwise, EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId and eitherEC2SecurityGroupName
orEC2SecurityGroupId
must be provided.ec2_security_group_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_ec2_security_group_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe id of the EC2 security group to revoke access from. For VPC DB security groups,
EC2SecurityGroupId
must be provided. Otherwise, EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId and eitherEC2SecurityGroupName
orEC2SecurityGroupId
must be provided.ec2_security_group_owner_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_ec2_security_group_owner_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Web Services account number of the owner of the EC2 security group specified in the
EC2SecurityGroupName
parameter. The Amazon Web Services access key ID isn’t an acceptable value. For VPC DB security groups,EC2SecurityGroupId
must be provided. Otherwise, EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId and eitherEC2SecurityGroupName
orEC2SecurityGroupId
must be provided.
- On success, responds with
RevokeDbSecurityGroupIngressOutput
with field(s):db_security_group(Option<DbSecurityGroup>)
:Contains the details for an Amazon RDS DB security group.
This data type is used as a response element in the
DescribeDBSecurityGroups
action.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<RevokeDBSecurityGroupIngressError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn start_activity_stream(&self) -> StartActivityStreamFluentBuilder
pub fn start_activity_stream(&self) -> StartActivityStreamFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the StartActivityStream
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
resource_arn(impl Into<String>)
/set_resource_arn(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the DB cluster, for example,
arn:aws:rds:us-east-1:12345667890:cluster:das-cluster
.mode(ActivityStreamMode)
/set_mode(Option<ActivityStreamMode>)
:
required: trueSpecifies the mode of the database activity stream. Database events such as a change or access generate an activity stream event. The database session can handle these events either synchronously or asynchronously.
kms_key_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_kms_key_id(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for encrypting messages in the database activity stream. The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key.
apply_immediately(bool)
/set_apply_immediately(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether or not the database activity stream is to start as soon as possible, regardless of the maintenance window for the database.
engine_native_audit_fields_included(bool)
/set_engine_native_audit_fields_included(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether the database activity stream includes engine-native audit fields. This option applies to an Oracle or Microsoft SQL Server DB instance. By default, no engine-native audit fields are included.
- On success, responds with
StartActivityStreamOutput
with field(s):kms_key_id(Option<String>)
:The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for encryption of messages in the database activity stream.
kinesis_stream_name(Option<String>)
:The name of the Amazon Kinesis data stream to be used for the database activity stream.
status(Option<ActivityStreamStatus>)
:The status of the database activity stream.
mode(Option<ActivityStreamMode>)
:The mode of the database activity stream.
apply_immediately(Option<bool>)
:Indicates whether or not the database activity stream will start as soon as possible, regardless of the maintenance window for the database.
engine_native_audit_fields_included(Option<bool>)
:Indicates whether engine-native audit fields are included in the database activity stream.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<StartActivityStreamError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn start_db_cluster(&self) -> StartDBClusterFluentBuilder
pub fn start_db_cluster(&self) -> StartDBClusterFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the StartDBCluster
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe DB cluster identifier of the Amazon Aurora DB cluster to be started. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
- On success, responds with
StartDbClusterOutput
with field(s):db_cluster(Option<DbCluster>)
:Contains the details of an Amazon Aurora DB cluster or Multi-AZ DB cluster.
For an Amazon Aurora DB cluster, this data type is used as a response element in the operations
CreateDBCluster
,DeleteDBCluster
,DescribeDBClusters
,FailoverDBCluster
,ModifyDBCluster
,PromoteReadReplicaDBCluster
,RestoreDBClusterFromS3
,RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot
,RestoreDBClusterToPointInTime
,StartDBCluster
, andStopDBCluster
.For a Multi-AZ DB cluster, this data type is used as a response element in the operations
CreateDBCluster
,DeleteDBCluster
,DescribeDBClusters
,FailoverDBCluster
,ModifyDBCluster
,RebootDBCluster
,RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot
, andRestoreDBClusterToPointInTime
.For more information on Amazon Aurora DB clusters, see What is Amazon Aurora? in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
For more information on Multi-AZ DB clusters, see Multi-AZ deployments with two readable standby DB instances in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<StartDBClusterError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn start_db_instance(&self) -> StartDBInstanceFluentBuilder
pub fn start_db_instance(&self) -> StartDBInstanceFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the StartDBInstance
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe user-supplied instance identifier.
- On success, responds with
StartDbInstanceOutput
with field(s):db_instance(Option<DbInstance>)
:Contains the details of an Amazon RDS DB instance.
This data type is used as a response element in the operations
CreateDBInstance
,CreateDBInstanceReadReplica
,DeleteDBInstance
,DescribeDBInstances
,ModifyDBInstance
,PromoteReadReplica
,RebootDBInstance
,RestoreDBInstanceFromDBSnapshot
,RestoreDBInstanceFromS3
,RestoreDBInstanceToPointInTime
,StartDBInstance
, andStopDBInstance
.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<StartDBInstanceError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn start_db_instance_automated_backups_replication(
&self,
) -> StartDBInstanceAutomatedBackupsReplicationFluentBuilder
pub fn start_db_instance_automated_backups_replication( &self, ) -> StartDBInstanceAutomatedBackupsReplicationFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the StartDBInstanceAutomatedBackupsReplication
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
source_db_instance_arn(impl Into<String>)
/set_source_db_instance_arn(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the source DB instance for the replicated automated backups, for example,
arn:aws:rds:us-west-2:123456789012:db:mydatabase
.backup_retention_period(i32)
/set_backup_retention_period(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe retention period for the replicated automated backups.
kms_key_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_kms_key_id(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for encryption of the replicated automated backups. The KMS key ID is the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the KMS encryption key in the destination Amazon Web Services Region, for example,
arn:aws:kms:us-east-1:123456789012:key/AKIAIOSFODNN7EXAMPLE
.pre_signed_url(impl Into<String>)
/set_pre_signed_url(Option<String>)
:
required: falseIn an Amazon Web Services GovCloud (US) Region, an URL that contains a Signature Version 4 signed request for the
StartDBInstanceAutomatedBackupsReplication
operation to call in the Amazon Web Services Region of the source DB instance. The presigned URL must be a valid request for theStartDBInstanceAutomatedBackupsReplication
API operation that can run in the Amazon Web Services Region that contains the source DB instance.This setting applies only to Amazon Web Services GovCloud (US) Regions. It’s ignored in other Amazon Web Services Regions.
To learn how to generate a Signature Version 4 signed request, see Authenticating Requests: Using Query Parameters (Amazon Web Services Signature Version 4) and Signature Version 4 Signing Process.
If you are using an Amazon Web Services SDK tool or the CLI, you can specify
SourceRegion
(or–source-region
for the CLI) instead of specifyingPreSignedUrl
manually. SpecifyingSourceRegion
autogenerates a presigned URL that is a valid request for the operation that can run in the source Amazon Web Services Region.
- On success, responds with
StartDbInstanceAutomatedBackupsReplicationOutput
with field(s):db_instance_automated_backup(Option<DbInstanceAutomatedBackup>)
:An automated backup of a DB instance. It consists of system backups, transaction logs, and the database instance properties that existed at the time you deleted the source instance.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<StartDBInstanceAutomatedBackupsReplicationError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn start_export_task(&self) -> StartExportTaskFluentBuilder
pub fn start_export_task(&self) -> StartExportTaskFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the StartExportTask
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
export_task_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_export_task_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueA unique identifier for the export task. This ID isn’t an identifier for the Amazon S3 bucket where the data is to be exported.
source_arn(impl Into<String>)
/set_source_arn(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the snapshot or cluster to export to Amazon S3.
s3_bucket_name(impl Into<String>)
/set_s3_bucket_name(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the Amazon S3 bucket to export the snapshot or cluster data to.
iam_role_arn(impl Into<String>)
/set_iam_role_arn(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe name of the IAM role to use for writing to the Amazon S3 bucket when exporting a snapshot or cluster.
In the IAM policy attached to your IAM role, include the following required actions to allow the transfer of files from Amazon RDS or Amazon Aurora to an S3 bucket:
-
s3:PutObject*
-
s3:GetObject*
-
s3:ListBucket
-
s3:DeleteObject*
-
s3:GetBucketLocation
In the policy, include the resources to identify the S3 bucket and objects in the bucket. The following list of resources shows the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) format for accessing S3:
-
arn:aws:s3:::your-s3-bucket
-
arn:aws:s3:::your-s3-bucket/*
-
kms_key_id(impl Into<String>)
/set_kms_key_id(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe ID of the Amazon Web Services KMS key to use to encrypt the data exported to Amazon S3. The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. The caller of this operation must be authorized to run the following operations. These can be set in the Amazon Web Services KMS key policy:
-
kms:Encrypt
-
kms:Decrypt
-
kms:GenerateDataKey
-
kms:GenerateDataKeyWithoutPlaintext
-
kms:ReEncryptFrom
-
kms:ReEncryptTo
-
kms:CreateGrant
-
kms:DescribeKey
-
kms:RetireGrant
-
s3_prefix(impl Into<String>)
/set_s3_prefix(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe Amazon S3 bucket prefix to use as the file name and path of the exported data.
export_only(impl Into<String>)
/set_export_only(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:
required: falseThe data to be exported from the snapshot or cluster. If this parameter isn’t provided, all of the data is exported.
Valid Values:
-
database
- Export all the data from a specified database. -
database.table
table-name - Export a table of the snapshot or cluster. This format is valid only for RDS for MySQL, RDS for MariaDB, and Aurora MySQL. -
database.schema
schema-name - Export a database schema of the snapshot or cluster. This format is valid only for RDS for PostgreSQL and Aurora PostgreSQL. -
database.schema.table
table-name - Export a table of the database schema. This format is valid only for RDS for PostgreSQL and Aurora PostgreSQL.
-
- On success, responds with
StartExportTaskOutput
with field(s):export_task_identifier(Option<String>)
:A unique identifier for the snapshot or cluster export task. This ID isn’t an identifier for the Amazon S3 bucket where the data is exported.
source_arn(Option<String>)
:The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the snapshot or cluster exported to Amazon S3.
export_only(Option<Vec::<String>>)
:The data exported from the snapshot or cluster.
Valid Values:
-
database
- Export all the data from a specified database. -
database.table
table-name - Export a table of the snapshot or cluster. This format is valid only for RDS for MySQL, RDS for MariaDB, and Aurora MySQL. -
database.schema
schema-name - Export a database schema of the snapshot or cluster. This format is valid only for RDS for PostgreSQL and Aurora PostgreSQL. -
database.schema.table
table-name - Export a table of the database schema. This format is valid only for RDS for PostgreSQL and Aurora PostgreSQL.
-
snapshot_time(Option<DateTime>)
:The time when the snapshot was created.
task_start_time(Option<DateTime>)
:The time when the snapshot or cluster export task started.
task_end_time(Option<DateTime>)
:The time when the snapshot or cluster export task ended.
s3_bucket(Option<String>)
:The Amazon S3 bucket where the snapshot or cluster is exported to.
s3_prefix(Option<String>)
:The Amazon S3 bucket prefix that is the file name and path of the exported data.
iam_role_arn(Option<String>)
:The name of the IAM role that is used to write to Amazon S3 when exporting a snapshot or cluster.
kms_key_id(Option<String>)
:The key identifier of the Amazon Web Services KMS key that is used to encrypt the data when it’s exported to Amazon S3. The KMS key identifier is its key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name. The IAM role used for the export must have encryption and decryption permissions to use this KMS key.
status(Option<String>)
:The progress status of the export task. The status can be one of the following:
-
CANCELED
-
CANCELING
-
COMPLETE
-
FAILED
-
IN_PROGRESS
-
STARTING
-
percent_progress(Option<i32>)
:The progress of the snapshot or cluster export task as a percentage.
total_extracted_data_in_gb(Option<i32>)
:The total amount of data exported, in gigabytes.
failure_cause(Option<String>)
:The reason the export failed, if it failed.
warning_message(Option<String>)
:A warning about the snapshot or cluster export task.
source_type(Option<ExportSourceType>)
:The type of source for the export.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<StartExportTaskError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn stop_activity_stream(&self) -> StopActivityStreamFluentBuilder
pub fn stop_activity_stream(&self) -> StopActivityStreamFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the StopActivityStream
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
resource_arn(impl Into<String>)
/set_resource_arn(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the DB cluster for the database activity stream. For example,
arn:aws:rds:us-east-1:12345667890:cluster:das-cluster
.apply_immediately(bool)
/set_apply_immediately(Option<bool>)
:
required: falseSpecifies whether or not the database activity stream is to stop as soon as possible, regardless of the maintenance window for the database.
- On success, responds with
StopActivityStreamOutput
with field(s):kms_key_id(Option<String>)
:The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier used for encrypting messages in the database activity stream.
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key.
kinesis_stream_name(Option<String>)
:The name of the Amazon Kinesis data stream used for the database activity stream.
status(Option<ActivityStreamStatus>)
:The status of the database activity stream.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<StopActivityStreamError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn stop_db_cluster(&self) -> StopDBClusterFluentBuilder
pub fn stop_db_cluster(&self) -> StopDBClusterFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the StopDBCluster
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe DB cluster identifier of the Amazon Aurora DB cluster to be stopped. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
- On success, responds with
StopDbClusterOutput
with field(s):db_cluster(Option<DbCluster>)
:Contains the details of an Amazon Aurora DB cluster or Multi-AZ DB cluster.
For an Amazon Aurora DB cluster, this data type is used as a response element in the operations
CreateDBCluster
,DeleteDBCluster
,DescribeDBClusters
,FailoverDBCluster
,ModifyDBCluster
,PromoteReadReplicaDBCluster
,RestoreDBClusterFromS3
,RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot
,RestoreDBClusterToPointInTime
,StartDBCluster
, andStopDBCluster
.For a Multi-AZ DB cluster, this data type is used as a response element in the operations
CreateDBCluster
,DeleteDBCluster
,DescribeDBClusters
,FailoverDBCluster
,ModifyDBCluster
,RebootDBCluster
,RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot
, andRestoreDBClusterToPointInTime
.For more information on Amazon Aurora DB clusters, see What is Amazon Aurora? in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
For more information on Multi-AZ DB clusters, see Multi-AZ deployments with two readable standby DB instances in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<StopDBClusterError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn stop_db_instance(&self) -> StopDBInstanceFluentBuilder
pub fn stop_db_instance(&self) -> StopDBInstanceFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the StopDBInstance
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe user-supplied instance identifier.
db_snapshot_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_snapshot_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: falseThe user-supplied instance identifier of the DB Snapshot created immediately before the DB instance is stopped.
- On success, responds with
StopDbInstanceOutput
with field(s):db_instance(Option<DbInstance>)
:Contains the details of an Amazon RDS DB instance.
This data type is used as a response element in the operations
CreateDBInstance
,CreateDBInstanceReadReplica
,DeleteDBInstance
,DescribeDBInstances
,ModifyDBInstance
,PromoteReadReplica
,RebootDBInstance
,RestoreDBInstanceFromDBSnapshot
,RestoreDBInstanceFromS3
,RestoreDBInstanceToPointInTime
,StartDBInstance
, andStopDBInstance
.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<StopDBInstanceError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn stop_db_instance_automated_backups_replication(
&self,
) -> StopDBInstanceAutomatedBackupsReplicationFluentBuilder
pub fn stop_db_instance_automated_backups_replication( &self, ) -> StopDBInstanceAutomatedBackupsReplicationFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the StopDBInstanceAutomatedBackupsReplication
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
source_db_instance_arn(impl Into<String>)
/set_source_db_instance_arn(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the source DB instance for which to stop replicating automate backups, for example,
arn:aws:rds:us-west-2:123456789012:db:mydatabase
.
- On success, responds with
StopDbInstanceAutomatedBackupsReplicationOutput
with field(s):db_instance_automated_backup(Option<DbInstanceAutomatedBackup>)
:An automated backup of a DB instance. It consists of system backups, transaction logs, and the database instance properties that existed at the time you deleted the source instance.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<StopDBInstanceAutomatedBackupsReplicationError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn switchover_blue_green_deployment(
&self,
) -> SwitchoverBlueGreenDeploymentFluentBuilder
pub fn switchover_blue_green_deployment( &self, ) -> SwitchoverBlueGreenDeploymentFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the SwitchoverBlueGreenDeployment
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
blue_green_deployment_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_blue_green_deployment_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe resource ID of the blue/green deployment.
Constraints:
-
Must match an existing blue/green deployment resource ID.
-
switchover_timeout(i32)
/set_switchover_timeout(Option<i32>)
:
required: falseThe amount of time, in seconds, for the switchover to complete.
Default: 300
If the switchover takes longer than the specified duration, then any changes are rolled back, and no changes are made to the environments.
- On success, responds with
SwitchoverBlueGreenDeploymentOutput
with field(s):blue_green_deployment(Option<BlueGreenDeployment>)
:Details about a blue/green deployment.
For more information, see Using Amazon RDS Blue/Green Deployments for database updates in the Amazon RDS User Guide and Using Amazon RDS Blue/Green Deployments for database updates in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<SwitchoverBlueGreenDeploymentError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn switchover_global_cluster(&self) -> SwitchoverGlobalClusterFluentBuilder
pub fn switchover_global_cluster(&self) -> SwitchoverGlobalClusterFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the SwitchoverGlobalCluster
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
global_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_global_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe identifier of the global database cluster to switch over. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
Constraints:
-
Must match the identifier of an existing global database cluster (Aurora global database).
-
target_db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_target_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe identifier of the secondary Aurora DB cluster to promote to the new primary for the global database cluster. Use the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the identifier so that Aurora can locate the cluster in its Amazon Web Services Region.
- On success, responds with
SwitchoverGlobalClusterOutput
with field(s):global_cluster(Option<GlobalCluster>)
:A data type representing an Aurora global database.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<SwitchoverGlobalClusterError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn switchover_read_replica(&self) -> SwitchoverReadReplicaFluentBuilder
pub fn switchover_read_replica(&self) -> SwitchoverReadReplicaFluentBuilder
Constructs a fluent builder for the SwitchoverReadReplica
operation.
- The fluent builder is configurable:
db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>)
/set_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>)
:
required: trueThe DB instance identifier of the current standby database. This value is stored as a lowercase string.
Constraints:
-
Must match the identifier of an existing Oracle read replica DB instance.
-
- On success, responds with
SwitchoverReadReplicaOutput
with field(s):db_instance(Option<DbInstance>)
:Contains the details of an Amazon RDS DB instance.
This data type is used as a response element in the operations
CreateDBInstance
,CreateDBInstanceReadReplica
,DeleteDBInstance
,DescribeDBInstances
,ModifyDBInstance
,PromoteReadReplica
,RebootDBInstance
,RestoreDBInstanceFromDBSnapshot
,RestoreDBInstanceFromS3
,RestoreDBInstanceToPointInTime
,StartDBInstance
, andStopDBInstance
.
- On failure, responds with
SdkError<SwitchoverReadReplicaError>
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn from_conf(conf: Config) -> Self
pub fn from_conf(conf: Config) -> Self
Creates a new client from the service Config
.
§Panics
This method will panic in the following cases:
- Retries or timeouts are enabled without a
sleep_impl
configured. - Identity caching is enabled without a
sleep_impl
andtime_source
configured. - No
behavior_version
is provided.
The panic message for each of these will have instructions on how to resolve them.
Source§impl Client
impl Client
Sourcepub fn new(sdk_config: &SdkConfig) -> Self
pub fn new(sdk_config: &SdkConfig) -> Self
Creates a new client from an SDK Config.
§Panics
- This method will panic if the
sdk_config
is missing an async sleep implementation. If you experience this panic, set thesleep_impl
on the Config passed into this function to fix it. - This method will panic if the
sdk_config
is missing an HTTP connector. If you experience this panic, set thehttp_connector
on the Config passed into this function to fix it. - This method will panic if no
BehaviorVersion
is provided. If you experience this panic, setbehavior_version
on the Config or enable thebehavior-version-latest
Cargo feature.
Trait Implementations§
Source§impl Waiters for Client
impl Waiters for Client
Source§fn wait_until_db_cluster_available(&self) -> DbClusterAvailableFluentBuilder
fn wait_until_db_cluster_available(&self) -> DbClusterAvailableFluentBuilder
db_cluster_available
Source§fn wait_until_db_cluster_deleted(&self) -> DbClusterDeletedFluentBuilder
fn wait_until_db_cluster_deleted(&self) -> DbClusterDeletedFluentBuilder
db_cluster_deleted
Source§fn wait_until_db_cluster_snapshot_available(
&self,
) -> DbClusterSnapshotAvailableFluentBuilder
fn wait_until_db_cluster_snapshot_available( &self, ) -> DbClusterSnapshotAvailableFluentBuilder
db_cluster_snapshot_available
Source§fn wait_until_db_cluster_snapshot_deleted(
&self,
) -> DbClusterSnapshotDeletedFluentBuilder
fn wait_until_db_cluster_snapshot_deleted( &self, ) -> DbClusterSnapshotDeletedFluentBuilder
db_cluster_snapshot_deleted
Source§fn wait_until_db_instance_available(&self) -> DbInstanceAvailableFluentBuilder
fn wait_until_db_instance_available(&self) -> DbInstanceAvailableFluentBuilder
db_instance_available
Source§fn wait_until_db_instance_deleted(&self) -> DbInstanceDeletedFluentBuilder
fn wait_until_db_instance_deleted(&self) -> DbInstanceDeletedFluentBuilder
db_instance_deleted
Source§fn wait_until_db_snapshot_available(&self) -> DbSnapshotAvailableFluentBuilder
fn wait_until_db_snapshot_available(&self) -> DbSnapshotAvailableFluentBuilder
db_snapshot_available
Source§fn wait_until_db_snapshot_deleted(&self) -> DbSnapshotDeletedFluentBuilder
fn wait_until_db_snapshot_deleted(&self) -> DbSnapshotDeletedFluentBuilder
db_snapshot_deleted
Source§fn wait_until_tenant_database_available(
&self,
) -> TenantDatabaseAvailableFluentBuilder
fn wait_until_tenant_database_available( &self, ) -> TenantDatabaseAvailableFluentBuilder
tenant_database_available
Source§fn wait_until_tenant_database_deleted(
&self,
) -> TenantDatabaseDeletedFluentBuilder
fn wait_until_tenant_database_deleted( &self, ) -> TenantDatabaseDeletedFluentBuilder
tenant_database_deleted
Auto Trait Implementations§
impl Freeze for Client
impl !RefUnwindSafe for Client
impl Send for Client
impl Sync for Client
impl Unpin for Client
impl !UnwindSafe for Client
Blanket Implementations§
Source§impl<T> BorrowMut<T> for Twhere
T: ?Sized,
impl<T> BorrowMut<T> for Twhere
T: ?Sized,
Source§fn borrow_mut(&mut self) -> &mut T
fn borrow_mut(&mut self) -> &mut T
Source§impl<T> CloneToUninit for Twhere
T: Clone,
impl<T> CloneToUninit for Twhere
T: Clone,
Source§impl<T> Instrument for T
impl<T> Instrument for T
Source§fn instrument(self, span: Span) -> Instrumented<Self>
fn instrument(self, span: Span) -> Instrumented<Self>
Source§fn in_current_span(self) -> Instrumented<Self>
fn in_current_span(self) -> Instrumented<Self>
Source§impl<T> IntoEither for T
impl<T> IntoEither for T
Source§fn into_either(self, into_left: bool) -> Either<Self, Self>
fn into_either(self, into_left: bool) -> Either<Self, Self>
self
into a Left
variant of Either<Self, Self>
if into_left
is true
.
Converts self
into a Right
variant of Either<Self, Self>
otherwise. Read moreSource§fn into_either_with<F>(self, into_left: F) -> Either<Self, Self>
fn into_either_with<F>(self, into_left: F) -> Either<Self, Self>
self
into a Left
variant of Either<Self, Self>
if into_left(&self)
returns true
.
Converts self
into a Right
variant of Either<Self, Self>
otherwise. Read moreSource§impl<T> Paint for Twhere
T: ?Sized,
impl<T> Paint for Twhere
T: ?Sized,
Source§fn fg(&self, value: Color) -> Painted<&T>
fn fg(&self, value: Color) -> Painted<&T>
Returns a styled value derived from self
with the foreground set to
value
.
This method should be used rarely. Instead, prefer to use color-specific
builder methods like red()
and
green()
, which have the same functionality but are
pithier.
§Example
Set foreground color to white using fg()
:
use yansi::{Paint, Color};
painted.fg(Color::White);
Set foreground color to white using white()
.
use yansi::Paint;
painted.white();
Source§fn bright_black(&self) -> Painted<&T>
fn bright_black(&self) -> Painted<&T>
Source§fn bright_red(&self) -> Painted<&T>
fn bright_red(&self) -> Painted<&T>
Source§fn bright_green(&self) -> Painted<&T>
fn bright_green(&self) -> Painted<&T>
Source§fn bright_yellow(&self) -> Painted<&T>
fn bright_yellow(&self) -> Painted<&T>
Source§fn bright_blue(&self) -> Painted<&T>
fn bright_blue(&self) -> Painted<&T>
Source§fn bright_magenta(&self) -> Painted<&T>
fn bright_magenta(&self) -> Painted<&T>
Source§fn bright_cyan(&self) -> Painted<&T>
fn bright_cyan(&self) -> Painted<&T>
Source§fn bright_white(&self) -> Painted<&T>
fn bright_white(&self) -> Painted<&T>
Source§fn bg(&self, value: Color) -> Painted<&T>
fn bg(&self, value: Color) -> Painted<&T>
Returns a styled value derived from self
with the background set to
value
.
This method should be used rarely. Instead, prefer to use color-specific
builder methods like on_red()
and
on_green()
, which have the same functionality but
are pithier.
§Example
Set background color to red using fg()
:
use yansi::{Paint, Color};
painted.bg(Color::Red);
Set background color to red using on_red()
.
use yansi::Paint;
painted.on_red();
Source§fn on_primary(&self) -> Painted<&T>
fn on_primary(&self) -> Painted<&T>
Source§fn on_magenta(&self) -> Painted<&T>
fn on_magenta(&self) -> Painted<&T>
Source§fn on_bright_black(&self) -> Painted<&T>
fn on_bright_black(&self) -> Painted<&T>
Source§fn on_bright_red(&self) -> Painted<&T>
fn on_bright_red(&self) -> Painted<&T>
Source§fn on_bright_green(&self) -> Painted<&T>
fn on_bright_green(&self) -> Painted<&T>
Source§fn on_bright_yellow(&self) -> Painted<&T>
fn on_bright_yellow(&self) -> Painted<&T>
Source§fn on_bright_blue(&self) -> Painted<&T>
fn on_bright_blue(&self) -> Painted<&T>
Source§fn on_bright_magenta(&self) -> Painted<&T>
fn on_bright_magenta(&self) -> Painted<&T>
Source§fn on_bright_cyan(&self) -> Painted<&T>
fn on_bright_cyan(&self) -> Painted<&T>
Source§fn on_bright_white(&self) -> Painted<&T>
fn on_bright_white(&self) -> Painted<&T>
Source§fn attr(&self, value: Attribute) -> Painted<&T>
fn attr(&self, value: Attribute) -> Painted<&T>
Enables the styling Attribute
value
.
This method should be used rarely. Instead, prefer to use
attribute-specific builder methods like bold()
and
underline()
, which have the same functionality
but are pithier.
§Example
Make text bold using attr()
:
use yansi::{Paint, Attribute};
painted.attr(Attribute::Bold);
Make text bold using using bold()
.
use yansi::Paint;
painted.bold();
Source§fn rapid_blink(&self) -> Painted<&T>
fn rapid_blink(&self) -> Painted<&T>
Source§fn quirk(&self, value: Quirk) -> Painted<&T>
fn quirk(&self, value: Quirk) -> Painted<&T>
Enables the yansi
Quirk
value
.
This method should be used rarely. Instead, prefer to use quirk-specific
builder methods like mask()
and
wrap()
, which have the same functionality but are
pithier.
§Example
Enable wrapping using .quirk()
:
use yansi::{Paint, Quirk};
painted.quirk(Quirk::Wrap);
Enable wrapping using wrap()
.
use yansi::Paint;
painted.wrap();
Source§fn clear(&self) -> Painted<&T>
👎Deprecated since 1.0.1: renamed to resetting()
due to conflicts with Vec::clear()
.
The clear()
method will be removed in a future release.
fn clear(&self) -> Painted<&T>
resetting()
due to conflicts with Vec::clear()
.
The clear()
method will be removed in a future release.Source§fn whenever(&self, value: Condition) -> Painted<&T>
fn whenever(&self, value: Condition) -> Painted<&T>
Conditionally enable styling based on whether the Condition
value
applies. Replaces any previous condition.
See the crate level docs for more details.
§Example
Enable styling painted
only when both stdout
and stderr
are TTYs:
use yansi::{Paint, Condition};
painted.red().on_yellow().whenever(Condition::STDOUTERR_ARE_TTY);